Exception Message 07

Effectively handling group 3 - exception message 07

Recommended Videos

View all

Recommended Reading

Your Voice Charts Our Course

If the video you're seeking is not in our collection, don't worry. Just let us know and we'll look into creating it.

Thank you member! Your submission has been received!
Oops! Something went wrong while submitting the form.

Your Journey Beyond Videos Begins Here

As a valued Reveal TV+ or Performance Assurance member, you get exclusive access to our expert team.
Whether you want to ask a question, dive deeper into a video, or schedule a meeting to discuss a key topic,
we're here to help. We want to turn your insights and challenges into impactful, real-world outcomes.

Thank you member! Your submission has been received!
Oops! Something went wrong while submitting the form.
Thank you! Your submission has been received!
Oops! Something went wrong while submitting the form.

No results. Try changing your search keyword.

Materials Not Turning

Quickly identify non-moving, dust-collecting materials in inventory

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LX03
Hi, Martin here, and welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. In this video, we're going to focus on materials not turning in the warehouse. So, Steven, we know the best way to learn is by doing. Tell us how we're going to find these dusty old materials without actually walking the warehouse floor. Sure, Martin. Being able to systematically locate materials not turning in your warehouse is a game changer. Storage bin real estate is critical in a warehouse, and it is important to identify materials that are not turning or selling to have cross functional conversations as to why. In this demonstration, we will focus on using time in location feature to quickly identify these materials. If you're walking through your warehouse and you spot a material with dust on it, you should absolutely question why. There could be some strategic reasons why a material isn't turning such as you need that part or there's been a decision made to keep that for services down the road but in most cases there is most likely something wrong, either no material master or put away strategy, so it's all manual, it could just be incorrect rules or even outdated rules. Although the warehouse associates and team may not be directly responsible for material turns the buying and selling, it's critical because space is critical in the warehouse and every square inch, every volume, every bin adds up and counts, so you really want to manage your materials very well and you want good, healthy materials that are turning. You want those high velocity materials in there. So how do we find those materials or that data that we could potentially identify and partner with maybe the buyers planners who are responsible for bringing in and fulfilling our warehouse. So quickest way rather than going and just doing some spot checks around the warehouse by walking, just go into LX03. LX03 is going to be your overall bins in your warehouse. You could run it wide open with all the storage types in there, you can do only bins with stock. So if you ran this wide open, it's going to show you all the bins within that warehouse, whether there's materials in there or if they're empty. So in this case, let's just execute it and this is the default that's shown here. You just have your plant, your storage location, your storage type, so on and so forth. There is so much information in LX03. So I clicked on this staircase, which again shows you, I'll move this over here, all the information that's shown. But then on the right is everything that you can bring over in this view and the power of LX03 is you can save variants for specific things. So we want to just find those materials that are expiring. But the fifth one down is duration. So we want to highlight that and do a single click over, and there you go. So you could see, all right, these ones are empty. But then you have TiL and TiL simply time in location. So these are some pretty old materials. What I would do is go ahead and sort these descending so it brings the oldest to the top and you could just quickly see the quantity where they are what the material is and the time in location. So now you have a set of data where you can go and identify who's responsible for the material, such as the MRP controller, and say hey, this material has been sitting in the storage bin for X amount is that, did we know that, is there something that we could do about it, because I really need this bin for something else for something high turning. So there's just a quick way to find some materials that are not turning in your storage bins and in your warehouse. So in summary we have covered how to quickly identify materials not turning in your warehouse to provide data for strategic conversations. Thanks, Steven. That's great stuff and some powerful information to arm our warehouse folks to have strategic conversations. Speaking of strategic conversations, guys, if you want to see more about how to get the most out of your system, please check out our other videos and of course if you have a burning question, please submit it below.

Midpoint Scheduling

Apply theory of constraints to manage bottleneck resources effectively

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
Scheduling & Shop Floor
PP; PTM
CM21; CM25
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi Martin here, and in this video we are going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's midpoint scheduling capability. Midpoint scheduling can be great help to simplify the production planning process and help focus on the bottlenecks. Eacliffe, how about you tell us a bit more about midpoint scheduling? Sure Martin. Midpoint scheduling is a powerful feature when used correctly and in this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things. Explain the concept of midpoint scheduling. Show what settings are required to get midpoint scheduling to work. And demonstrate how midpoint scheduling process works. The intent here is to look at midpoint scheduling functionality that exists on the production planning, graphical planning board transaction, CM25. Midpoint scheduling is an approach a production planner can take to create a realistic production schedule when dealing with multiple operations. Basically involves focusing on a strategic or bottleneck equipment that's involved in the manufacturing run, which drives the scheduling of other work centers involved in making that item. So let's take a look at transaction CA02 to show what the routing would typically look like before we actually get into this functionality. So right now this is transaction CA02. We're going to go to an operation overview and what we can see here is that we have multiple operations involved in making this product and these are the different work centers which are involved in making that inventory. The goal is that when we schedule one of these work centers here, the other, in this case, the other three work centers will align from a scheduling perspective. Okay, let's go into transaction MD11 and create a plan order for this material. Okay, so this is our material it's in MRP area, 1000. Okay. let's do for quantity of 10,000 units and I'm going to pick a date of, let's see, do the drop down and we want it to finish, so right now it's February 13, let's move it to March 4. I'm going to hit enter to populate these dates. Notice there's only three tabs here. Basically that header tab, the assignment master data. I'm going to click the scheduling icon, I have a warning, get through that, click on scheduling a new tab detail scheduling got created and here we can see the different work centers involved and the start an end date for each one of these work centers to produce this item. Okay and it's these work centers that we are going to bring up on the planning board. So with that said I'm going to click and save and we now have this planned order, now let's go into transaction code CM25 which is the graphical planning board slash m CM25, I'm just going to pick a generic keyboard. See there are multiple options in terms of which profile we end up working with. I'm going to pick this one here, the two graph, green check. Okay, I do have a variant already defined, say get variant. I called mine V1. Okay, and by doing that it has now populated the different work centers of interest. So we can see this here and from here we are going to, we're interested in this case the focus is on machine capacity because we're scheduling the equipment, which are machines, in this case, and execute. So here we can see that we have multiple entries sitting available for scheduling. Anything that sits in this section in the pool section of the graphical planning board is what's available for scheduling. Anything which was scheduled already would be residing in this section up here. So, with that said, let me just adjust this a little bit, okay, so before we can do midpoint scheduling, what we are going to do is we are going to take a look at our settings. So we're going to go into our strategies and there's one setting which is specific to midpoint scheduling, it resides in this section, the dispatching control, so I'm going to scroll down and let's do this again. So we can see under dispatching control, we have this midpoint scheduling and that indicator is turned on. So with that said, the way this works is that any orders which are, or operations which are associated with these work centers, would be displayed here and in this case you could see we have two different orders, one ending in 533, and the other one ending in 534. So the question is, which one is crucial to how the line is scheduled? Instead of looking at Operation 10, let's assume that operation 30, the MB Work Center, is the one that has some challenges for us. So what we want to do is take that work center and we are going to schedule it. So let me dispatch it and you could see it is now sitting here. So here's another work center, another order for that same work center, I noticed it's overlap. So the point is that we have finite scheduling, in other words we could only run one at a time. If I took this one now and say dispatch it you could see it came to the end here. So because this moved out into the future, the point is it cannot run at the same time as this one. If I come to Operation 10, suddenly you could see Operation 10 is no longer aligned with 534, it's no longer in the same timing as 533. So, the point is that we have things sequenced in terms of who could run first, who could run second, and so forth. We can see that there's still a bit of overlap from a 10 perspective so based on the rule of the master data, we know that this has to move out a bit. So if I took this and I moved it out a bit, you could see this one now moved out. You could also see that these guys are now starting to move out. So there's a gap between, for operation 20, there's a bit of a gap, and for Operation 40 there's a bit of a gap, and you can see now looking at all of them there is no overlap. So from a scheduling perspective, the midpoint scheduling says, look when I moved something, for example if I took the previous order and I moved it, let's say moved it a little earlier, the other operations tag along automatically. Okay, so that's the whole point about midpoint scheduling is you pick that critical work center, you schedule that work center and once it is scheduled, so I can take this guy, hold the shift key down, take the other one and dispatch them both. Okay and now you can see they are up here scheduled together where we have the first one, the second one, this remain intact, and the point is because these operations are no longer overlapping, the schedule is now considered realistic. So that's the feature of midpoint scheduling on the graphical planning board so that we can reflect a realistic production schedule. So in summary we have covered midpoint scheduling which allows you. Perform scheduling using the graphical planning board. And how to maintain the settings to perform midpoint scheduling. Yeah, thanks Eacliffe. Much appreciate it. Using this feature can really help planners and schedulers optimize their order scheduling, and in doing so, of course, improve productivity. So if you'd like to learn more about how to get the most of the SAP system please check out our other videos and if you can't find a video to an answer to a burning question you may have, please submit a suggestion.

Moving From Push to Pull

Pull vs push supply chain best practices

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; IBP; P2P; PTM
MC.9; MD04
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi Martin here, and in this video we are going to provide an overview of the value of moving our organization from a push to a pull company. Now, what that really means is from a material point of view, are we pulling our materials through the supply chain or are we pushing them through the supply chain? I'm going to let Kristie explain that in a little more detail. Thanks, Martin. Moving from push to pull is a powerful strategy when used correctly. And in this demonstration, I'm going to focus on three key things. First of all, what are some of the reasons and techniques for why and how we would move from push to pull with an emphasis on decoupling techniques. Also, how would we analyze materials behavior to determine the truth of whether we are pushing or pulling? And lastly, what does that transition from push to pull look like? Stabilization, inventory optimization and responding to the signal. Moving from push to pull is such an important conversation. So, whether you are starting to receive information from your customer, so they're getting more integrated into the process, so you're getting a clear pull signal from them that's more reliable, you're starting to integrate that into your demand planning process through CPFR, or maybe even receiving scheduling agreements from that customer with firm free and tradeoff zones, or whether you're thinking about decoupling strategies. So how you're able to service many customers by going to an assembled to order model and just being in a good place to be able to supply depending on what it is that they're asking for in their final variation or you're thinking about decoupling because your signal at the end item is just not good and so you want to be able to position for pull and you're starting to pull through your supply network or your up and running on S/4, maybe you're exploring a DDMRP strategy, which is kind of the ultimate in pull. As you're thinking through these things and locating where your inventory in the appropriate places throughout the supply network, it's really good to be able to evaluate how you can shift from push to pull. But one of the things that's fundamental to doing that and one of the starting places is to just be able to go in and analyze the behavior of your materials. So I picked a material kind of at random here, and this is MC.9, and I'm just going to look and see what's been going on with this over the last year. So I've got a material and a plant in here, and I've got a period of evaluation that I'm going to look at, I'm going to look at it for the last year. Now, if I'm going from push to pull, I'm probably looking at smaller more finite pieces in order to be able to take cuts on what's going on. And immediately when I come in here it's going to give me some statistics so I'm getting some evaluated stock values, my current stock value, how many units I have on hand, my average, and then I can compare where I am for evaluated stock versus average. Wow, almost twice as much as what is normal for me, so it's going to be some good information for me to consider how many times I've issued the product, and then what, I'm looking at for patterns over the last year. But what I'm really interested in is if I come up here and I go to extras, there's this detailed info button, I can get a lot of, first of all statistics on what's going on, but I can also get some pictures. So the two things I'm most interested here right now are the key figures. Coming down here, I'm going to go ahead and pull based on total stock. And what it's going to do is pop up a bunch of information for me so I can see, what has been happening, my opening, my mean value, and my closing so I can see I'm actually growing an inventory on this particular item. I can see the last time it was consumed. What my average days of coverage is. So this is definitely, I'm pushing, I've got 394 days of coverage. I can see my current inventory turns, how many times I've stocked out. Very, very important as we're going from push to pull. We may make an intention to stock out if we're moving to make to order, but in general, we want to make sure we're working that slowly down, I can see my dead stock percentage and then I get just a little bit more information on what is going on. Now for those of us who like to look more at time series information I can also do that from here as well, so I can go to extras and then I'm going to go to detailed information and what I actually want, I could look at just more red line graph through stock level and look at total stock, but I want a little more information. I want to see how I've actually been planning this item, so I'm going to do my receipts versus issues diagram and I'm going to click on total stock. This is going to give me a little bit more information on what's been happening. So, you can see here, let me make this nice and big for you, so over time, over my period of evaluation, I can see the red line here and I can show on my legend. My red line is my stock balance so I can see my stock has started to go up a little bit and then my blue is my cumulative receipt quantity so I can see my supply pattern, how that's playing out and my green line is my cumulative issues quantity and what we can see here is that the patterns are very similar, but as we're looking at that accumulation, my issues is really lagging behind my receipts. And the bigger that gap gets, we can see it has a direct relation to what is going on with my stocking level, right? So as we see more blank space between the receipt and the issues, that's a time delay and I can see that my red line is graph is going up. So if I'm thinking about how I can get this back into control as I'm thinking about how I'm working through the behavior of this item, I want to start to get things just to be as stable and predictable from a supply perspective as I possibly can. And what that's going to allow me to do is as that becomes more predictable and stable, now I can start to reduce down how much inventory I am holding with less risk of stock out. So you can see at a very normalized pattern, we just recently started using it and then as that has happened now we're really starting to see this tick up in a big way. So I want to reduce that process deviation, it's going to help me get closer to, being in a position to pull rather than push and really start to bring that inventory safely down to a level that allows us to serve the customer within that customer's tolerance time. And that's a couple of the different ways that we can evaluate and look at information that will help us to go from push to pull. So in summary. We have covered how moving from push to pull allows you to position yourself for your customer's demand. Reduce inventory that is stagnant and stabilized supply. And decouple where necessary to protect and buffer against volatility and variability in demand. Oh, once again, thanks Kristie. Making this philosophical decision and allowing SAP to pull the materials through the supply chain can make such a difference to the business. If you want to learn more about this specific topic and others about your SAP system, please check out our video catalog, and if you have a specific question feel free to submit it below.

Moving Materials in Mass

Master the art of moving materials in bulk

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LT10; LX02
The best way to learn is by doing and welcome to the video service that reveals and unlocks the hidden value in your system. Martin here, and in this video, we're going to focus on how to move materials in mass within your warehouse. Steven, tell us a little bit more about how to do that. Yes, Martin. Moving materials in mass truly can be a game changer for warehouse folks. This powerful capability can save a lot of time, but also it can create a lot of damage if not utilized correctly. In this video, I will demonstrate the use of this powerful tool and highlight the pros, cons, and when it may make sense to use. The most common way materials are moved in a warehouse are from system generated transfer orders, usually in the form of a goods receipt, a production staging, or an outbound pick. These are usually singular or specific transfer orders created from a material document or an integrated area within the supply chain. But what about moving materials in mass where there's no system generated documents? That is where transaction LT10 comes into use. This powerful tool has tremendous capability and streamlines moving materials from one storage bin to the other. So let's just jump straight into LT10 and I'll demonstrate how this transaction works. So a couple of things to point out. The first two things, a warehouse number is a required field. The storage type right below is going to be your origin storage type or where you want to move the materials from. You have the option to specify other details, a storage location, a material, et cetera. It then defaults in actual movement type. So in this case, we'll just go with a 999, a straight bin to bin, not tied to a material document. You then have three bubbles at the bottom, which display a quant so you can actually move a specific quant if there's mixed materials in that storage bin. You can actually do the same from a storage unit. So again, from a mixed storage perspective, if there are multiple storage units or different storage units, you could specify that storage unit and do a bin to bin. In this case, we're just going to use the storage bin transfer. What this will do, it's black and white from the standpoint, it will move all materials from one bin to the other. So if there are mixed storage, if you have mixed storage enabled in your warehouse, it will move all the materials that are in there from your origin bin to your destination bin. So let's just go ahead and execute this. I'll show you the next screen here. What you'll get is within my warehouse and storage type, it pulls up a number of options starting with the bin, the material, the stock, et cetera. You could pull in more fields if you would like but this is going to be your standard layout. These lock boxes over here are demonstrating that they are a lock, you cannot actually perform a bin to bin transfer. I just, I know there's an open material inventory counts. So, it's nice because the system is smart enough to know that there's a open inventory document so it won't allow you to do a bin to bin transfer because that would throw off your inventory. So those are going to be locked. You then see some check boxes right below, and these are the options that you have for bin to bins. First thing that I will point out, you see there's a gap here and then all these other ones are just singular boxes. Well, that gap is because there are two different material numbers in that same bin. So that's fine, let's go ahead and actually just move that. So all you do is you simply click the box, it selects and highlights both, you then want to go to this plus with the forklift, which is going to be your stock transfer in the foreground or where we want to move those materials to. So, again, you have some options here. You do have to pull in a actual storage type for your destination. So, in this case, we'll just show you the different variety or flavor. We just want to move it to 007, our pallet storage. If you leave it blank, like we're going to do so, it will actually use the system rules and go ahead, depending on your material master and your structure setup, it will automatically just place these two materials in a bin. So let's go ahead and just do that. I can even click this confirm immediately, and it will close out that transfer order. It's going to use that 999 movement type. I'm going to click copy and they both turn to green. You could refresh and they should drop off and let's just go ahead and see where those went. So I'm going to go and I'm going to open a new session, LX02. We moved it to storage type 007. So let's take a look, and there we go. You could see our two materials actually right there went to the same bin. So because of the material master and the setup, they actually consolidated both into the same bin. So it went both from the origin bin in that same bin to the destination bin in the same bin. So we will then just go ahead and click a singular, let's specify a bin here, click that. We're going to do the same thing, the plus foreground, same storage type, but let's pick a different bin, let's just go to 01-02 here, the one next to it, confirm immediately, went to green, it'll drop off, and go back to LX02, unfortunately you can't refresh, so we just have to go back and execute it once again, and there you go. It actually went to 01-02 or that bin that we specified. You can also straight from here, it doesn't have to be a different storage type so this last example, we will just move this material here into this bin and that same storage type. So we're just going to hit the plus once again, we're going to keep it in 001 and then we're going to specify 01-05-04. Okay, confirm immediately. All right, and then we'll refresh and there you go. They're both in that same bin. LT10 is a fantastic and very easy to use transaction, especially from the standpoint of you just confirm immediately and it moves materials. The transaction, the power that we displayed, the best practice would be to not use this on a daily basis or on your regular operation. You really want to utilize this transaction when you're doing warehouse projects, so in the past I've used these a lot from slotting. So we're moving materials around for the sake of finding the most optimal or that golden zone and we want to move all those materials from one bin to the other. It was a specific project. That's the form or fashion that you want to use it. Another way that I've used this in the past was we were doing an actual warehouse reconfiguration where we're moving racking around and we want to quickly do bin to bin transfers. This was going to be it. So. This is how you want to actually utilize that transaction and kind of those one off situations that will support any projects that you have. So with great power comes great responsibility and I would highly recommend you do not want to open this transaction up to just everyone. You want to ensure that this is only locked down to your trusted SAP users that are fully educated on the capability of this tool. So in summary, we have covered how moving materials in mass can save warehouse folks significant time, but if not done correctly can cause a lot of systematic damage within your warehouse. Thank you Steven. Wow, I can certainly see how this can save a lot of time for our warehouse project. Folks, if you want to learn more about warehouse management and any kind of capabilities in your SAP system check out our other videos and please submit any suggestions below.

Navigation Profiles

Discover Navigation Profiles and the efficiency they offer

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
MM; PP; SD
MD04; MD05
Best way to learn is by doing and so of course welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. My name is Martin. In this video we will be discussing something called navigation profiles. Now, navigation profiles are typically a role based selection of transaction codes that are embedded in the top of the MRP stock requirements list and it makes for moving seamlessly between transactions as it relates to the planning process that we have to conduct. They aren't hard to set up, they do drive significant value, and profoundly important. So Kristie, show us where these navigation profiles exist and how to use them. Fantastic, Martin. I'd love to tell you more about this efficiency builder. Let's jump into the system and understand. What navigation profiles are. Where they live. And how they work. Now a navigation profile is a planner's best friend when they are properly configured for that role. Let's go take a look. Navigation profiles are one of those great tips or tricks that really help to enhance our experience when we're working in these cockpit transactions like MD04 and MD05, so the stock requirements list and the MRP list. And if you're not sure what a navigation profile is, it's when you see these little buttons that appear. Now there's a couple of different ways to make this happen. Navigation profiles are kind of hotkeys but the navigation profile is the standard way to be able to add transactions to the header of your screen and be able to navigate directly to them. So if I click on MD02, It's going to take me directly through for this particular material, in this particular MRP area, in this particular plant with my standard default values for single item, multi level MRP. Now, depending on your environment, it may make a lot more sense for you to be going to MD03, which is single item, single level MRP. But, it's very nice to be able to have these transactions listed here for us and I'm going to show you a couple of different ways for how you can get to and select your navigation profile. So the first option is under settings. And if you go to Settings and then down to Settings, you'll see here we've got a whole lot of different options for how to customize our experience in the stock requirements list and the MRP list. If you haven't started exploring in here, there's so many good things that can really help you with being able to get the most out of your experience. It just makes life a lot easier. This is all the usability stuff that helps to be able to get to a place where you're seeing your information exactly how you would like to see it. It really is helping you to make decisions and flow. One of those things is the navigation profile and if you've been through a transformation with us you probably will see one that has oVO in the description, that's what I have displayed here. And then if I click on this button right here to see the drop down list, what this is going to show me is all of the navigation profiles that are out there. So this is something you can have your IT department go out and configure for you so it appears in the list and it will appear for everyone. And when you come in here, and you can also default these, when you come in here you'll see a bunch of different options. So, right now I'm on the Optimization Profile for OVO. I could also go in and choose based on the type of role, or the type of experience that I'm looking for. So you can see here, I've got one for Buyer. Let's go ahead and click on that. And then when I choose this, it's going to come in here and I'm going to say save, if I wasn't sure I wanted to keep it, I could just hit continue, but I'll go ahead and hit save and it's going to say settings for my user have been saved. I'll go ahead and click continue and now you'll see up at the top, I have an entirely different list of transactions that I can move to that are really germane to the role that it is that I'm trying to perform. Some of us are planners and buyers, so we may want to flip across navigation profiles depending on what it is that we're trying to do, where we are in our daily cadence of activities. So we might want to be able to quickly navigate to these other transactions. And there are so many different ways to move directly from MD05 and MD04 to other parts of the system. We know we have these elements here that we're able to move through. We know also that we have all the different options under Go To as well as under Environment and all of these things are related to the work that we're trying to do. So the other thing that you can do here, we went to Settings, Settings and selected Navigation Profile. You can also use this Navigation Profile button right here. And so if you come in here, you can choose Assign, and it's going to take you right back into that screen, and you can select a different option to help you with the process. I'm going to go here and just go to a third one, Profile for Planning, and again you can go out and explore these. and see what is the most useful to you. So simple little trick or tip that can make things much easier. And you can see I just picked one for planning and this is really oriented around more of the long term planning, going out and working with the forecast and those kinds of things. So again, depending on where you are, your area of responsibility, what you're working on at that particular point in the day, where you are in your daily, weekly, monthly cadence, you may want to use different navigation profiles to help you with that process. And the more you think about orienting it to your process and the types of transactions that you might want to seamlessly move to from your MD04 stock requirements list or MD05 MRP list can make a huge difference in the usability of these transactions and they're intended to be a cockpit and really help you with the end to end process. So this is another way that you can increase the value and make it easier to go out and do the things that you need to do. So today we learned a little bit about the navigation profile and how it can actually make our life easier. We explored some of the standard profiles as well as the ones we typically have for our transformation teams. We will focus on some of the key transactions that are most vital to their success. And lastly, we looked at how to choose a navigation profile and began actually working with it. Great stuff, thank you, Kristie, much appreciated. Navigation profiles are super powerful for planners and buyers and can really make life so much easier to just seamlessly kind of work around different environments and different transaction codes. So guys, if you want to know more about this video service and anything else please check out our catalog. And of course if you have a burning suggestion or question please submit it below.

Needles in Haystacks

Managing supply shortages: Strategies for identification and resolution

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; IBP; P2P; PTM
MD04; MD05; MD06; MD07
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi Martin here, and in this video we are going to focus on how to find needles in the proverbial SAP haystack. Given the breadth and depth of SAP, sometimes it can be difficult to know where to start. If we just focus on the vital few things we can quickly uncover where the biggest differences can be made. Kristie, how about you help us figure out where these needles/problems potentially exist? Absolutely Martin. Let me give you the tour. Needles in haystacks via the exception monitors provide a powerful capability when used correctly and in this demonstration I'm going to focus on three ways to identify these needles in the haystack. First of all, we can use red lights to help us. Second days of forward coverage. And lastly, using the exception messages to help us identify these needles in the haystack. Let's take a look. Do you ever feel like you come into your exception monitor and you're looking for a needle in a haystack? Usually feels that way when you're first getting started, and sometimes when we have a lot of volatility or variability and the situation gets away from us a little bit, it can feel like it then too. So you're definitely not alone, I certainly have felt that way. So how do we find these supply situations that are the most urgent? I'm going to give you a couple of different ways to do that. So the first one is the one that we're likely really familiar with, and that's our red lights here. So when we have a red light, it means we're at risk of service level degradation. It means that we do not have enough inventory as of this moment in time to cover our current or past due demand. And you can see here we actually get a calculation that says how far in the hole we are. So that's one of the ways we can know which items need the most support in order to be able to recover. And then we can also see if we have a recovery plan currently in place based on what's going on in this first receipt days of supply and your second receipt days of supply. There's another video that walks through examples of how those calculations are made, but that will help you also to know where you want to focus your time and attention. So particularly on the ones that don't have a recovery plan in place. So we're not seeing any improvement in the days of supply after the first receipt days of supply. Alright, so then the other way that you can do it is you can come into the binoculars and we can look for some exception messages. Always update your statistics, you can see I've got a lot of different materials that I've pulled in here and I'm going to go ahead and update those statistics because as we go through the day things are changing. So I want to make sure that I have the most up to date information and I can work my exception monitor throughout the day. And as I'm moving forward in my day, I'm probably transitioning if I'm in ECC or I'm not yet running MRP live from MD06 to MD07, so I've got the current stock situation and I can come over here and I want to go to find exception messages. I'll come in here and I'm going to look to see which exception messages have me the most concerned. So, highlight here we've got one where we've got some items that have the stock fallen below safety stock level. So that message 96, I've got 4 occurrences of that. I also have a lot of reschedule ins, so those are items where my supply is due to come in later than what is needed. So beyond that mad date for the customer or beyond the forecasted demand for orders that have not yet filled in or beyond when it's needed for use in production or for stock transfer. Even more important or more critical than that are these, these 7 30's These are the ones where I know that I need to get this process in motion, I'm actually already behind. Unless I had a time machine, I would not be able to get the material here according to the current lead time. So my goal with these is to get my orders placed and then start to work through the process of moving them in within lead time if possible, and in order to do that, I might need to work some of my reschedule out or my cancel messages to free up time, space, materials capacity, room on containers, all of those good things that will allow me to create a hole to bring in these critical items. So I can use this to help me find those really critical supply situations and then start to work through them. There's also reporting an SAP that will help us with this. So some of our inventory analysis reports would let us go in and take a look to see where we've got that negative days of supply. So really helpful would be MC42 or MC43 to be able to go in and filter on negative days of supply and even work that near selection criteria in. As you're going into your exception monitor, you also have some of those filters. Let me go ahead and leave this overview, yep, that's fine, and I'm going to go ahead and scroll down to the bottom. You'll see here I'm using the extended selection criteria for MD07. This is also there for you on one of your tabs if you are just using regular old MD07, but this extended criteria is nice. I wish when I was a planner that I had known that this existed many, many years ago at the beginning in my career, I didn't find out until I'd been working with SAP for quite a while, and boy was this a game changer for me because I could look at multiple plants or specific material numbers altogether. It gave me lots of different ways to group and prioritize. So this is really helpful. But you can see down here in this range of coverage, you can actually pull in based on certain stock days of supplies, so you can work through your threshold. So for example, eliminating some of those positive 999 messages, really throttling to your inventory that you're currently managing through and then looking at your 999's as a seperate use case might be helpful, focusing on some of the recovery for your first receipt days of supply. So those are, in most cases, it's going to be the things that are scheduled to come in, so purchase orders, ship notifications, production orders, process orders, those kinds of things, firm stock transfers. So you can see how your pipeline is filling back up and what you're looking at in terms of recovery, that will also help you to prioritize. So really nice to have not only the exception messages, the red lights with those days of supply calculations sitting right next to them, but also some of the filtering on the front as you're entering into MD07 to be able to set some of these thresholds so you can focus on them as well as the inventory analysis reports. So things like MC42 or MC43, where you could go in and actually filter based on specific days of supply and that allows you to look at it not only from forward looking, so what you're predicting to use, but also backwards looking in terms of usage. So nice to have those different options in your back pocket. That'll help you to find those needles in the haystack so that you can move through and work through those exception messages and get those orders placed so you're in a good position for supply going forward. So in summary we have covered how using the exception monitor to find needles and haystacks allows you to. Focus on the materials in the most critical planning situations. Evaluate and resolve the supply and demand imbalances. And lastly, find materials with very specific planning situations. When we are first getting started with exception monitoring, it can feel completely overwhelming. In fact, you may feel like the data or exceptions are not real, rest assured life can be different. Too true Kristie. Thank you. Understanding how to get key insights from SAP allows you to narrow your focus and get the biggest impact from a few key actions. So if you want to learn more about doing that and other things around your SAP system please feel free to check out our video catalog. If you have a specific question that needs to be answered feel free to log it below.

Negative Stock

Address stock shortages with effective correlation and rectification

4 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LL01
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, Martin here, in this video we're going to focus on the negative stocks within the Warehouse Activity Monitor. Steve, I know this is a big deal, why don't you tell us more about why negative stock is such a problem? Sure, Martin. Negative stocks within the warehouse activity monitor have surpassed the time allotment and are now deemed as critical and are creating a supply chain disruption. In this video we'll demonstrate. How to analyze this portion of the monitor. And review strategies to manage and take action upon. In this video, I'll demonstrate negative stocks in the warehouse activity monitor. So we'll go into LL01, which is the activity monitor. The required field here is going to be your warehouse number, mine defaulted to 001, so I'll go ahead and execute this. Negative stocks are going to be at the bottom of this report. You can then hone in and the interim storage types where negatives maybe listed there. So you have the option to include these in specific variants if you own that portion of the warehouse monitor, you could create ranges, so on and so forth. But what we're going to do here, just like many other users that use the activity monitor, we're just going to execute and get the holistic picture of everything. You can see I have 33 negative stocks. If I click this subfolder, it just breaks down the actual storage type in which they're in, both are interims. One is 999, one is 998. So we'll just go ahead and get the whole view here, the list. Unlike the other portions of the activity monitor, you cannot just create or convert the straight into a TO, a little more due diligence and research is needed because at this point, all we see is that there's a material, there could be a status in there, in this case there's a quality block on this one, we have the bin and the stock. So what you could do though, is select one, jump straight, if you click this transfer order for quant, that's where you're going to get your additional research. So in this case, you had your TO numbers associated to that. So if you just click on the TO number it jumps you straight there. So now you can see that it's in this interim trying to be put away from here. You don't want to do this just blindly, again you want to do your research because it will confirm it to this bin because you do have the option to do so here. You can confirm, you can cancel straight to this bin. In this case, what I would do I'll go to the header details, find the user, say what's going on, really you want to understand why these have exceeded that time parameter and why these are negative. So as we are working these, you have the option, just like the other reports, you can notate anything that's going on with these, but ultimately you want to balance these because these are all a negative, these are all issues that have exceeded that time parameter. So, in summary, we have covered. How negative stocks or supply chain disruptions push through the warehouse activity monitor and have surpassed the time allotment. These negative stocks are late and need to be quickly corrected. Thanks, Steve. I can certainly see why it is imperative to move as quickly as you can on these overdue negative stocks. Folks, if you want to learn more about WM and other areas within SAP and see how you can get the most out of it, please check out our other videos and of course if you have any questions please submit them below.

Now's the Time to Run the Delivery Due List

Explore SAP’s delivery due list for effective logistics execution

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
OTC; WM
VL10G; VL10BATCH; VL01N; VA02; VL10A-E
Greetings supply chain professionals. I am Martin, and today, we're on a mission to uncover the hidden value in your SAP system. So let's get started. In this video, we're going to explore one of the gateways from planning into execution. It's called the delivery due list. The delivery due list helps us to know what orders are ready to be moved into delivery so we can stay on time with execution and deal with any exception that may crop up. So Dave, I know we're all eager to know more. Tell us more what we need to know about a delivery due list. Hi Martin. Today's walkthrough, we're going to go over a few key things. First, we'll pull up a delivery due list so we all know where it is in SAP. And I'll also speak to where it falls into the process. Second, we'll talk about what it is or the purpose. And lastly, we'll highlight how it can be used to make the transition into logistics execution more effective. I think it's best we go and take a look. What is the delivery due list? Delivery due list is where we take sales orders that have a delivery date on them and we use the transaction to convert them into delivery document, which is the instruction for a warehouse to go and pick the product and ship it out to the customer. Deliveries can be created in a number of different ways, we can create them directly from a sales order VA02, and then use the delivery create button. We can create them manually using VL01N, and we have a number of alternatives to create a collective number of deliveries for a number of sales orders, and those options are VL10A for the header items, VL10C for the items, and VL10E for schedule line details. Likewise, we can create deliveries for STOs, for stock transport orders. In the same way, we have VL01N, or VL10B, or VL10D, and VL10F. These are all used to create the deliveries for stock transport orders. In addition to all of these options, we create deliveries via background jobs, and these can be set up in VL10BATCH. When we create delivery documents, the important parameters we need to know where we're shipping from, or for a range of shipping points. We need to know which plant we're shipping from? Are we going to create deliveries specific to a customer? Do we include overdue orders? Do we include documents not blocked for delivery, which are due today or possibly in the future. These are all decisions that the delivery create transaction can manage for us. Typically, the delivery is created on the date that the system calculates the material availability date. We derive the material availability date on a sales order through the process of ATP checks, and also MRP calculations. We have a number of recordings which speak specifically about how ATP works and what these MRP calculations are. For this demo, let's schedule a manual delivery create using the VL10G which does sales orders, and purchase orders, really stock transfer orders, right? We can do those simultaneously. I am showing you a list of the VL10 transactions, as you can see, there is a number. We're going to use Documents due for Delivery, which is the VL10G. This transaction covers all of the variations we have for STO's and purchase orders simultaneously. I have a variant that I've created. I'm going to pull up my variant, which is called VL10G, and in this variant, I have set up a delivery create range, which is automatically loaded. The delivery create range is doing dynamic dates for me, so I can eventually just put this into a background job and then let this run on a daily basis at its pre-determined time. If I run it here, you'll see that this runs quickly. I'm getting a really quick picture, everything in red is overdue, everything in yellow is almost overdue, everything in green means I'm creating it ahead of its delivery due date. These are important factors. We can modify the screen. We can add additional fields and columns to give you more details about the delivery create. I want to quickly take you through the batch job, the automating of this task, and we do that through the VL10BATCH transaction. VL10BATCH is pretty neat. I can take the variant I've just shown you, I can schedule it. I can set it periodic scheduling. I can say I want to run this on a daily basis and I'm done. This is going to run every day at the same time, 2200, 26 minutes, and it will run every day at this particular time. So what happens in the morning, I come in, I've got my deliveries they're being distributed to the correct location to the warehouse and they can go ahead and pick and schedule what needs to be picked for that particular day? Let's talk about the so what. Timing is everything. We want to make sure that we are making all of our hand offs from one functional area to the next on time so that we can then be on time to our customers. When we run the delivery due list, we get one last chance for review. Now, hopefully over time, we don't have to have that manual intervention and we can start to automate. But if we're early on in our journey to quality ATP, or if the master data is not quite right yet, there is a good opportunity to verify everything looks good and is ready to execute. Thank you, Dave. There's nothing worse than getting the inventory in the place only to fall down at the last moment when handing off to shipping. Timely, accurate and complete hand offs are essential. If you want to learn more about this video and other topics related to this, please check out our video catalog, and of course, if you have a burning question, please submit it below.

Open Posting Changes

Clarifying open posting changes and how they are resolved

4 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LL01
Hi, Martin here and welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. In this video we're going to focus on the open posting changes within the warehouse activity monitor. Hey, Steve and as you know the best way to learn is by doing so please tell us more about this particular feature. Not a problem, Martin. Open posting changes within the warehouse activity monitor have surpassed the time allotment and are now deemed as critical and are creating a supply chain disruption. In this video we will demonstrate. How to analyze this portion of the monitor. An review strategies to manage and take action on. So first we will go into LL01 which is the warehouse activity monitor. The default is you're going to enter your warehouse number, mine populated already so I'm going to click execute. You can see open posting changes is going to be the third thing down, so we have some options here where we can actually select and specify movement types for those open posting changes. So again, as I've mentioned in previous videos, you could save a variance if you would like, or you could just run right through the report here and we have five open posting changes. You can click the subfolder and it breaks down the actual movement type, so of the five, four of them are in the quality bucket and one is just posted, that 309 movement, to a general posting change movement. So, we'll collapse this and go back into them. Here you could see the ones that are in that quality hold right away because they have that queue that are represented right there. You also get additional information with the movement types, the storage types and then there's our one that we have that is not of quality hold. So, posting changes, as we know, there's something within the characteristic of this material that is changing. So in this bottom one, let's click in number 31, in this case, the material, the 309 movement is your general posting change. It's moving from this batch to a general batch. So the characteristic of this batch is going to change or needs to change, that's what's holding it up. So, it hadn't done so within the specific time parameter, which is why it's on the warehouse activity monitor. So within here too, as I mentioned in previous videos, you could click notes and really identify what is going on with these open posting changes. You want to absolutely investigate why are, they are still delayed, what is going on with them? Because from here too, just like the other videos and the transfer requirements, you can actually create a TO or the actual movement to clear this up and really confirm this transfer order straight from this posting change. So great functionality, great power here in that you can do this in mass, but really these have exceeded that time parameter, they need to be addressed because they're causing potential supply chain service disruptions. So, in summary we have covered how open posting changes are supply chain disruptions pushed through the warehouse activity monitor and have surpassed the time allotment. These posting changes are late. And need to be researched and quickly corrected. Thanks again, Steve, great information. Those are certainly some great pointers and strategies to quickly take action on those open posting changes. If you want to learn more about this and any other topic about how to maximize the use of SAP please check out our video catalog and of course, if you have a specific question please post them below.

Operation Analysis

Assess operation and work center performance for optimal output

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Scheduling & Shop Floor
PP; PTM
MCP1
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin, and in this video we are going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's operational analytics. When used correctly operation analysis reports can provide real-time information about operations which enable organizations to better analyze operational data. Eacliffe, how about you take us into the bowels of this. My pleasure Martin. Operation analysis is a powerful feature when used correctly identifies how well a production order operation is performing against the scheduled commitments. In this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things. Provide an understanding of what insight the report provides at a production order operational level. How it goes about providing this insight on production order operation. And how to evaluate the production order operation performance. The intent here is to use transaction MCP1 to perform operation analysis of production orders. In this report the data is captured at a plant work center material order and operation level. This differs on the work center analysis because the fact that a work center can be used in more than one operation, the point is by using this LIS report we can say, okay, for this work center which operation are we seeing some form of deviation or data that's outside expectations. So let me run this transaction and what I'm going to do is quickly do a switch drill down and I'm actually going to bring it down to a work center level. So from here I'm going to take this target, target is how much execution time we expected versus actual, this is what came through confirmation. By sorting this in descending order I can see the worst contributing work center to this evaluation. In this case, because all these entries here are 0 it's telling me that a confirmation has not taken place as yet but we do have this one entry where confirmation was done and we will focus on this. So one thing that should be aware of these reports when we are working in unit of measure of days sometimes it doesn't make sense to add up the days and therefore what SAP does is it performs some averaging. So in this case we saw 10.1 days yet it only comes up to 0.2 on the header level and the question is why? Like I said SAP does averaging, we have multiple entries here, so we would take this number and divided by the number of work centers and that's what is being presented as an average on tap. So this really tells you to be somewhat cautious around the range of data that you do retrieve. So lets come here, I'm going to do a drill down by which means I'm going to ignore all these other work centers and just focus on this one here. So I select the line item, what I'm going to do is drill line by and then from network center I want to see which orders are involved with this entry or this particular work center. So green check and we can see we have several orders which is involved with this particular work center. I'm going to take this and I am now going to again, sort in descending order and now we see that dealing with some averaging and so forth, we can now see what's truly contributing and the averaging is decreasing. So what I'm now going to do is pick this particular order so from this work center we came to this one order. Only one order is contributing to this significant difference it should be one day yet in terms of execution time yet the actual is reflecting 7 26. So this would imply somehow we happened to pick an old order and did some recent posting against it which sends up a red flag to say, hey what's going on, did a user make an error or so forth in terms of how we managed to achieve this. But the key point is that we were able to identify that we did have an issue. We know exactly which order it belongs to. I'm going to do a drill down again and I'm going bring it down to an operation level. So from an operational level we could see that it was operation 10 within this order and that's where something was not done correctly and therefore we can now proceed and take corrective measure. Of course the key or the primary reason we actually go through this exercise is to say where do we have a breakdown in our supply chain process from a manufacturing perspective? The question would be is the one day correct versus the actuals, if we're getting actuals and it's completely different from the target that implies that we are not planning our production floor properly. Ideally what we would like to see is for any one of these key figures, be it execution time, queue time, etcera, they all should be aligned or closely aligned and only when they're closely aligned can we truly say that we're able to schedule our production, our floor properly and minimize the risk of any kind of disruption due to some kind of variance happening in terms of this is what I'm telling you to do versus this is what actually happened. So in summary we have covered how operational analysis allows you to. Appreciate the feedback the report is providing at an operation level of a production order. Identify which key figures to focus on in this report. And how to evaluate the production order operation performance. I can see when working on improving and optimizing the operations within the manufacturing process how these reports can be super helpful. If you'd like to know more about these kind of operational reports or other features within your SAP system please check out our other videos and of course if you have a specific question feel free to submit it at any time.

Options for Confirmation

Evaluating confirmation options and their selection criteria

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Order Fulfillment & ATP
SD
VA01; VA02; VA03; CO09
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin and in this video we'll focus on options for how to confirm availability in a sales order. Pretty awesome right? I like the options and it's so common in SAP that we use the same business rules for all occasions even though our business behaviors may be completely different. Options give us the opportunity to use the right tool for the right job. So, let's get into it. Kristie, tell us about the options that we have to get this right. Certainly, Martin. I like options too, but I like them best when I've got a good idea of what to choose and when. So today we're going to take a dive into just a single screen in SAP and walk through. The results of an availability check. And which confirmation scenario we might choose. And for what reason and when. I'm excited, so let's jump into SAP. Okay, so now let's go in and take a look at what happens when your customer calls or emails and they are working with you on availability situation for an order. So you're in there and you're interactively running it, or maybe you have seen through some sales order monitoring that you maybe have a problem with an order and you want to go in and either prioritize or just run ATP in an interactive fashion and see what is going on. So I'm going to do that, I'm going to choose this order here and I'm going to go ahead and double click and come into it. Now this is using a very generous ATP check, it's assuming really good quality information around this material and when you're getting started you're probably going to do this with a little bit more reservation. Meaning you're not going to be checking all the way out against planned orders. But for the purposes of this demonstration, this is going to let us go in and take a look at whatever different options are. Now, if you're curious about how to get started with ATP, there's some other great videos that walk you through good starting places around checking against inventory and also against your scheduled production and scheduled inbound procurement. So, make sure you go take a look at those if you're trying to figure out where the best place is to get started. But here I want to focus with you on the confirmation screen, so I'm going to go ahead and choose this line item here. This is the 110. And I'm going to go ahead and run the availability check. And when this comes back, it's going to pop me into the availability control. So, these are my ATP results for this particular line item and here is where you really want to have either the rules for that customer well known or you're in with a conversation and you're trying to manage an exception. So you run the ATP check, it's happened in an interactive fashion, meaning I am in the sales order and I run it. Now I have a couple of different options that have come back. The first is if we were to have this available for the customer on the day that they are looking for, what quantity could we confirm, and we can see that we have nothing available. So if for that particular customer the date is the most important thing and if we do not have it by the date they are looking for we would need to cancel the order, or reject that particular line item in this case. Then, this is the option that we would choose. Hopefully that's not the case. Hopefully you've got some flexibility there or you can work with supply in order to meet their needs. So what would end up happening is that until the line item is rejected, that line item would remain open, it would just be unconfirmed, so it's going to show up as an abnormal condition. And then you would work that with the supply side of the house to see if you could meet that customer's needs. Now down below that is if the quantity is the most important thing and you need to know what the best date is in order to deliver all 14 of these pieces, then you would choose this one. It says we can have all 14 pieces delivered or available to ship, depending on what your conditions are, by the 22nd of December. And I can see that we may have another option, we might be allowed to do partial deliveries, so maybe we have multiple line items on the order that are going to ship at different times, or we may even be able to break that particular line item into multiple shipments. And if so, then we have the option to have 11 available on the 15th and then 3 additional available on the 22nd. And if that's the case, the customer will take whatever the quantity is that you can get for them as early and as soon as you can possibly get it, then this would be the delivery proposal. So you're proposing two different shipments. Now you could even make a decision to split that quantity in a different way and still be able to confirm it, so long as you didn't go above 11 in the first shipment and 3 in the second. So, here I can choose these by clicking on the green tick boxes, or I can come up here and choose complete delivery, which is this guy right here, the delivery proposal down here, or if I'm going to wait and see if I can get some more available by the date that they originally requested, then I would just simply hit continue and we'll try that availability check again, allow something like backorder processing or rescheduling to pick up and try to make that order happen based on the customer's need. So once I've chosen my option in this case I'm going to go ahead and say 11 and 3 on the 15th and the 22nd I'm going to go ahead and click on this green tick box, and I'm going to go ahead and save yes please and then the next thing I want to do, I'm not going to see any changes here watch me refresh the stock requirements list I won't see any changes here still shows up for me, I'm still trying to meet that very best date of the 4th. If we wanted to hold those dates that we just selected we would use something called the fixed date and quantity flag, which we'll cover off in another video but let's assume we're going to continue to try and improve those dates for the customer, then we're still going to work towards that December 4th date. What I'm going to do here is just flip over so that you can now see the availability overview and what you're going to see here is the 14 pieces for this particular custom order are showing up here. Okay, so 14 pieces required. 0 confirmed and we're at a negative 8 in terms of what it is that we need on the 4th of December. And if I double click here you can see the order that is referenced. Let's scroll down just a little bit and I just want to show you how it breaks apart and you'll see it here. So then on the 15th you can see we're actually confirming 23 pieces, but there was a sales order that was already previously confirmed for that date, so it's in line first. So 12 of those pieces are going to 14805, because that was confirmed before this guy was, this availability check was run after. Then 14710 gets 11 of those pieces. Now, if you're looking at that and going, well hang on, 14710 is an older order, we'll talk about that when we get into our rescheduling videos of how we actually can control and make sure that those documents get their shipments first. Then down below here you'll see the 3 pieces that are additional. Now if you saw this situation and you needed to clean it up for whatever reason, there's also other tools that will help you to do that, but we've chosen to split the shipment here, so 11 pieces on the 15th, 3 on the 22nd, and I can still see up here that I have 14 pieces that are not being satisfied on the date that they are originally intended. So, what's great about this is I can see I'm behind, I can see what my current proposal and recovery plan is like, and I can make some decisions on which order should get that quantity in when. So really good and powerful information here that lead on to additional actions and activities, but the most important part is making sure that you know what the best options are to satisfy that particular customer's needs by having that conversation with them or knowing what their rules are for how they like to receive inventory from you. Is it most important to get it all at one time? Is it most important that you hit the date? And if not, then it's not going to ship on that order or is it most important that you get as much to them as quickly as you possibly can and then ship the remaining balance as soon as it's available, and they will wait for it. Alright, so in summary, we have taken a tour through the confirmation screen on a sales order. And we have discussed several different options for managing the outcome of that check. We've discussed some use cases for each to paint a picture of how we might think about the customer experience and the flow of materials. And we've also discussed how different scenarios might change the supply side and how they work their magic, and how we would retain the right to revisit the situation if it does change and if the customer will allow it. So back over to you Martin, bring us home. Thanks a lot, Kristie. I imagine these choices may have been new to many people. It's good to know that we have these options to choose from and try to meet the customer needs and that there are rules or expectations that we can consider driving the right choices in that particular situation. So, if you want to learn more about this and other topics related to using SAP as effectively as possible, please check out our video catalog and of course if you have particular questions please submit it below.

Order Analysis

Enhance order efficiency: Assessing order performance

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Scheduling & Shop Floor
PP; PTM
MCP3
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin, and in this video we are going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's production order analysis reporting. In essence, this is how we manage the performance of our production orders, plan versus schedule versus actual. When used correctly order analysis can really help organizations make more informed decisions about their sales and operations strategies. Eacliffe, tell us more about that. Sure Martin. Order analysis is a powerful feature when used correctly to identify how well production orders are performing in keeping its commitment to the schedule. In this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things. Provide an understanding of what insight this report provides for the entire production order. How it goes about providing this insight on the production order performance. And how to evaluate the production order performance itself. The intent here is to use transaction MCP3 to perform production order analysis. The data in this report basically lies at a level of plant material order month. So let's go ahead and execute this transaction and by default we come in at a plant level. What we can then do is a switch drill down to determine things from a material perspective or an order perspective, probably makes more sense to go from a material perspective. So here we have the different materials that we manufacture, and the goal is to then say, okay, for these materials, let's take a look at some of the variances from a scheduling perspective. So we have T versus A, which is target versus actual, where the target is coming from a production order, actual would come from a confirmation. Just to double click on one of these rows or even the total, what you get is a listing of all the different options which are available within this report. We have plan versus actual P/A for deliveries, lead time, et cetera, we also have target versus actual. So the difference between plan and target is the fact that the dates or quantities associated with the plan is coming from a plan order versus the T, it means that timing, dates, quantities is coming from a production order while the actuals, the A in both circumstances is related to a confirmation. Someone did a confirmation, it could be the start of an order, et cetera. So here I put more emphasis on the target only because I know when I have a production order, it is scheduled and the question is, how well are we doing against a schedule, in terms of if we have like a positive numbers in terms of number of days, it basically implies that the production order has started early versus if there was a negative entry like for example here in this case, this is a quantity, it means that we assured, but if we have a negative entry in terms of days, it means that the production order has started late. So the goal is that we can take these reports or these key figures, we can sort them in ascending or descending to see, look who's starting really early, who's starting really late, why do we have a big variance in terms of plan versus target or plan versus actual, or more so target versus actual. When it's plan versus target, we recognize that we get the plan orders, we need to schedule it by scheduling it, we're changing the date, hence ideally we are producing that inventory earlier to meet the plan. If we are scheduling it after the planed dates, it means, hey, you are not providing that inventory in time. So again, this is some of the insight we can get from looking at these key figures to appreciate what is going on at an order level recognizing that we have other reports that can take these orders and break it down to a lower level, which would be at an operational level. For each operation are they starting on time, finishing on time, are we losing time from queue time and so forth? So it's good to start at an order level, get this kind of insight, and if we need to dig further, recognize we have other LIS reports to to use to aid with our analysis. So in summary we have covered order analysis which allows you to. Appreciate the feedback this report provides at a production order level. Identify which key figures to focus on when looking at this report. And to evaluate the production order performance itself. Thanks Eacliffe. Evaluating our production performance is critical in establishing how well we are doing in meeting the plan. Each variation to the plan is an opportunity to either improve our planning or our execution. If you'd like to learn more about how to get the most out of your SAP system please check our other videos and of course if you have a specific burning question please submit it below.

Our Suppliers Need a Forecast

Setting suppliers up for success with timely and relevant information

10 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
P2P
ME5A; MD04; ME53N; ME38; MCBZ
Hey there procurement professionals, I am Martin, and we're thrilled to have you join us as we work with you to help you set up your suppliers for success. In today's video, we're seeking to provide clarity around how you might provide a forecast to your supplier. Now I'll start by saying this, when you share information with your suppliers for the purposes of planning, it's very important that everyone's on the same page with how that information will be used and what your commercial obligations are or not. This is very important piece of conversation to have with them. Okay, folks, so let's hand this over to our ever diligent, Rutul. Rutul I'd love for you to walk our viewers through specifically how to use some of these tools and techniques that will actually allow them to successfully provide a forecast to one or two of their suppliers. Hello everyone. This is a common request and fortunately we have a few options to achieve the outcome we are looking for. Let's start with clarity on what sending a forecast really means. First things first, are you providing your supplier with your forecasted demand or their forecasted supply? These are two very different things. Most of the time, we would recommend sending their forecasted supply or your expected goods receipts. The good news is that we have a few options to get to this information and I'll walk you through three of those options today. Let's go in and take a look. All right, we talked about multiple ways where we can share the information with our suppliers about forecasted supplies or demand. Let's take a look at a few ways that we can see this information in SAP. First one we will go to is called transaction ME5A. This is a list of all purchase requisitions, they are not firm, by nature purchase requisitions are only a pre step for firm purchase orders. So we're going to take a look at this here in this transaction, where you can see all the different purchase requisitions for different criterias. We can put in purchase material, specific selection criteria, the vendor number. But what we are going to look at here right now is everything in the plant and then I am going to change the scope of list as a layout for ALV. I want to see this list in a little bit better format. So I'm going to put the plant as 1000, one of the plants that you want to look for and the scope of list. And when you click on execute, you have all of your purchase requisitions by material, sorted out that you can see and perhaps communicate to vendors in terms of forecasting. Please be careful here that purchase requisitions again are not firm requirements yet. Another way you can look at the purchase acquisitions is also through MD04. So we're going to go there. We have this material, we are looking for, 100-130. And then the material requirements list, stock requirements list shows everything from all the exceptions and the purchase requisitions, sales orders, reservations, those things. We can easily filter the information in this requirements list to say I only want to see receipts. So you click on this display filter and that standard display filter is showing only receipt. So you click on the SAP only receipts and here it tells you what your purchase requisitions are. You can see the number and you can see the date that is coming in. We can also navigate from here to purchase requisition itself and you can see the information about when it's supposed to be coming in, delivery date of July 8th 2024. That's when it's supposed to come in. So that's a couple of ways that you can see and communicate with your vendors on the forecasted supplies. Another way you can do if you have scheduling agreements in place, then you can see that information at the delivery schedule level. So we will go ahead and look at that. For that, we will navigate to transaction ME38 and enter the scheduling agreement number. Here it shows what the material number we are scheduling agreements for and then when you select the line and click on delivery schedule it will show you all the different delivery schedule for this material that is agreed upon with the vendor. Now you'll see one of the things that you want to see here in the scheduling agreements additional feature is in scheduling agreement is what they call the firm zone and trade off zone. What the firm zone means is that vendor can ship against those schedule lines and delivery lines that is communicated with them. Firm zone falls within certain time frame that vendors can without any further communication, it's ready to go, ready to be shipped versus there is also called trade off zone. And if the scheduled delivery lines fall under and mark as a trade off zone, that means there may still be room for changes to the delivery schedule for that. So that means vendor should not ship against that request yet until it goes into the firm zone. How do you know, or how does the system let you know which is firm zone versus the trade off zone? You'll see that each of these delivery lines has this indicator called firm zone versus trade off zone. Let's take a look at that. You'll notice that when the delivery line is indicated with 1, that indicator means firm zone, which means the suppliers can ship against this quantity requested for that material. If the delivery schedule line was marked with 2, that means they cannot, and they should not, ship against that request yet. All right. Now, there is another, scenario and another way that we can look at the past and even future goods receipt and goods issue information. For that, we will go to transaction MCBZ. You can put in the plant information and we will look at this material again We are going to expand the date period, that we are looking the data for so that we can see goods receipts and goods issues in the past or in the future. So we will go a couple months back and we will go all the way out to the next year. We're going to look from March of 2024 till August of 2025. We'll see what the goods receipt and goods issue picture looks like for this material. Now by default, it does not bring in that information. So we will bring in that additional information and we will look at goods issues, MRP, and goods receipt, MRP, and we will bring them over. Now standard SAP functionality, you can select this line and we can drill down by, and then we look at them by month and now you are looking at what your total goods receipt, and goods issue, projected goods issue and projected goods receipt for this material from March 2024 till August 2025. These are the projected goods issues that's already assigned, which is these are the projected goods receipt assigned and projected for this material. We can look at this graphically, we can select the two goods issue and goods receipt information that we want to look at and we can expand this view a little bit, and we can certainly also look at the options, configure the 2D options as lines and you can see the projected goods receipts and goods issue for this material. This will help you communicate with your vendors or for you to know how much is going to be issued and received and then contractually contact your vendors to make any adjustments that they need Excellent. So to wrap up our time together today, a few key reminders. First, sharing a forecast of your anticipated goods receipt plan with your supplier is meant to help them with the pre planning. Second, there needs to be upfront conversation and clarity around which signals you are sharing with them, and for what purposes? This leads us to the third and very important point, and Martin highlighted this earlier. It is very important that you align with your suppliers on what the commercial implications of acting on that signal in advance of a firm PO or a delivery schedule really means. Hey, thank you Rutul. Always a pleasure to hear your perspective on things, and walking through the options with you. I feel like there will be many more discussions to come out of this video. And I kind of look forward to part two. So once again, thank you. Hey folks, you're going to learn more about this topic or others and even part two, please feel free to check out the video catalog we have. If you have a specific question for us, feel free to submit it below.

Periodic Totals

Learn the how and why of rolling up to period totals

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
Demand & Supply Planning
MM; PP; SD; DM
MD04; MD05
Hey folks, welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. So we know the best way to learn by doing, so let's get cracking on this video. We're going to be discussing an effective feature available in MRP list and stock requirements list, and it's called the periodic totals. Yes, ladies and gentlemen, clicking on that green sigma button will take you to a place that's very useful. Kristie, tell us more about periodic totals. Well Martin, sometimes it's nice to take a peek at the forest and not just the trees. It can be a super useful way to look at what's happening at the day, week, or even month level. There's some great intel we can glean from these rolls up. But you don't have to take my word for it, we're going to go in and take a tour. We'll go see where to access the periodic totals. Review the information that lives there. And then provide some solid examples of where this functionality can be really helpful. Let's plant some seeds to get your minds churning. All right, let's get in and take a look around at periodic totals. You can see here I'm in the stock requirements list. Now you can get to this similarly in the MRP list as well for those of you who are still running classic MRP. But bear in mind your MRP list is static as of the last time the MRP run occurred versus your stock requirements list or MD04 is dynamic as of the moment that you entered it or when you last hit your refresh button. And this is the way that most of us are used to looking at our planning situation, right, so it's date by date, requirement by requirement, element by element. But sometimes it's really helpful, especially if you are having a conversation around a recovery situation or when you're expecting to be caught up in back and balance. If you just need to get a really quick rough cut look, it can be very helpful to roll this up to periodic totals. And the way that we do that is actually by clicking on this little guy right here. So see this little green sigma button? When I click on that, it's going to give me some different options for how I might want to look at this. Now I can go ahead and click on this, and here you'll see we've got these different options, so we can look at it day by day, so it's going to accumulate our forecast, planned independent requirements, our requirements, so our actual sales orders, deliveries, etc. And then our receipts, so what we plan to have in terms of replenishment and then it will calculate for us our available quantity, so what is it that we expect to have available in order to be able to serve the customer. And then over here, you're going to see the actual coverage which is what we intend to have in terms of the number of days of supply, so it's calculating that out for us. And we can look at this on a day by day, a week by week or a month by month basis. So I'm going to go ahead and switch over to the week accumulations that we can see that now it's getting a little easier to see right what those actual balances are and then I can even come up to month and what I love about week and month is that as we look at the planned independent requirements, we can start to think about that as our remaining available to sell so what do we expect to still have coming in, in terms of sales orders or deliveries or other customer requirements, stock transfer orders? What else is out there that is going to come in and consume that forecast that we need to adjust for? Or, if we're planning to that forecast, irrespective of our requirements, what is it that we still anticipate needing to serve? So, open balance remaining to sell, requirements that we have in hand. How much we are expecting to receive. So, you can see here, let's do the math, we are expecting to receive, we have 0 available right now, we have 6 pieces that we are expecting to receive, we have 2 pieces of requirements already on hand, so our balance at the end of the week is 4 pieces. Okay, and then if we come down here, same thing, no additional requirements for this week, we have 11 additional pieces planned to come in, so we have 15 pieces available. Coming down a little bit more, we have 17 pieces planned to go out the door, we have no more coming in, so 17 deducted from 15 gives us a negative 2, which gives us an actual coverage of a negative 14 here. And if you come down even a little bit further, now we have our expected available to sell for these weeks, so we're still expecting to get some additional demand in and again, we don't get caught up really until a few weeks from now. So assuming that today was week 43, really our first full recovery is not until week 51, and so this would be a planning situation that we can then go in and start to work. Now if you have dynamic safety stock or coverage profile in place, your view here will look different. You'll have some additional columns because you're trying to react and respond to that safety stock. In our case here, we do have a safety stock in place and I'll show you that in just a moment, I'll just flip over real quick here to seeing that accumulation by month, so you can see what your end of period balances should look like as you go through and out across the different months. And if you're ever not sure about what something means, you can come in here and you can hit your F1 key and it will bring up the definitions for you so that you can see very specifically what is going on here. So your actual range of coverage in this case is in days versus the other pieces of information that we are looking at are in units, and then you can read a little bit more to understand exactly how the system is calculating that for you. So again, that is going to be the F1 key on your keyboard. So the difference here is ATP quantity versus your days of coverage. Now to go back to what we're normally looking at here, all I have to do is click on the puzzle pieces, I'm going to switch to our individual lines and here again is that safety stock, so the 24 pieces that's netting out our current inventory on hand. So we are reliant on this additional production order for us to be able to supply and you'll see we also have some exception messages here that we need to take care of. But sometimes it's very helpful, especially if you have a very active product, to be able to quickly go in and do that roll up and look at it either accumulated at the day, week, or month level, and really depending on how your forecast split is happening that weekly or monthly can be very, very helpful in terms of seeing what your remaining balance available to sell is. It's also a good way if you're working with some of your counterparts, maybe in customer service or sales support, to be able to give them an idea of what that recovery period looks like and that also is accounting for your lead times. Okay everyone, now we're up to speed on this little piece of functionality that can be so helpful at getting a quick look at how supply is serving demand. We're all on the same page with where to find the periodic totals. What the options are for totaling the requirements, and receipts by period, and the expected available to promise for that period. We also chatted through some context around this information and when it can be the most useful. The hope is that this gives you enough information to start thinking through how we might use this piece of functionality in your day to day life. Back over to you Martin. Awesome, Kristie. I can see how periodic totals can be of help. An actual matter of fact, we probably have to take a step back every now and then and just kind of rise above the chaos of the day and kind of assess our problem to see if it's a persistent one. This in combination with forward looking green graphs can be actually very powerful. So once again, thank you and good stuff. So folks, if you want to know more about this and maybe even about the green graph I just mentioned, please check out our other videos and of course if you have a particular question please submit it below.

Picking Areas

Review of picking areas, use cases, and master data locations

4 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
MM02; LX04
Hey folks, welcome to the video service that reveals and unlocks the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, Martin here. In this video, we're going to cover picking areas in warehouse and discuss how this feature can be used to strategically group or batch materials needed to be picked. Steve, I'm already thinking of the potential ways this might be helpful, but I'm sure you're going to show us a lot more. Take it away. Sure thing Martin. Think of picking areas as the twin to storage sections, but instead of being used to group materials for put away, picking areas are used to group materials for stock removal. The beauty of this feature is that it can be used in a variety of ways to improve efficiency, prevent injuries, and materials from being damaged. I'm personally a huge fan of picking areas and will touch on a few success stories in the demo and how I utilize them and the benefits that we received in our warehouse. I know the anticipation is probably killing you. So let's jump right into SAP where I'll demonstrate. How this works. Propose a few ideas on how you may use these in your environment. Picking areas are a special field, similar to a fixed bin status. So you would have to go into the material master, in this case, we'll just go to MM03. We'll go for a material 100-600 here. We're going to go to our two favorite WM tabs, WM1, WM2, and why I mean, it's similar to a fixed bin storage type is you have to enter the storage type here in order for that pick area field to be populated on the WM2 tab. So we'll go ahead and enter 001, and we'll go and enter D02 for this material. Okay it defaulted to my WM1 tab. The pick area for this part is actually going to live here, so because we entered storage type D02, here's our picking area field. So in this case this material is looking for a pick area, so a separate release by the storage type of D02. So that way we can queue it with anything to be picked for any specific reason, whether it's a heavy material, velocity, so on and so forth. Then on the actual bins, it's going to look for any of those materials that are eligible. So you could easily search for any pick areas, we'll go to LX02, we'll run LX02 wide open and a field that you're gonna have to bring in that you could see all the, it's actually towards the bottom here, you have your picking area, bring that over to our basic LX02 list, now it's going to be over to the right and you can see our last field here is by picking area, so you can do a sort of all the bins that are eligible by pick area. So in this case, there's 3 bins assigned to this pick area. So if these orders were picked, it will then queue these, this material 100-300, and it's going to release these separately based on this D02 picking area. So again, the best case is going to be if you have multiples of these or many parts in there that you want grouped separately. But the way to do it is going to be to identify those in a storage type, enter your storage type in your material master in the WM2 tab, and then that way those parts will be released and treated differently from a pick area perspective. Welcome back. In this demo. We've covered how picking areas work. And discussed a few different ways they can be used. I challenge you to utilize this functionality in some of the ways that I did, because the outcome and benefits are absolutely tremendous. Man, you've made me a fan too, Steve, thank you. What an excellent feature and great examples you covered in explaining how these work, and specifically how it worked for you in your warehouse. So folks, if you want to learn more about warehouse management or other features that SAP can provide for you to help you, please feel free to check out our other videos, and of course if you have a particular question or even a recommendation, please submit it below.

Planned Order Material Availability Check

Check availability at the planned order stage for smooth operations

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
Scheduling & Shop Floor
PP; PTM
MDVP
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin and in this video we will focus on how to take advantage of SAP's material availability checking for planned orders. When used correctly planned order material availability check help organizations do real-time checks on the availability of materials at the planned order level. From a production perspective this is the first time to really see if the materials you may need are available for future production runs. Eacliffe, why don't you tell us a little bit more about this availability checking for planned orders? Sure Martin. Planned orders ATP Check is a powerful feature when used correctly to determine if the preliminary schedule, let's say two to three weeks out into the future, has any component challenges. In this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things. Why perform planned order ATP check. The scope of check, which demand and supply elements we are taking into consideration when we do the ATP check for the planned orders. And how to perform the ATP check itself for each planned order. The intent here is to use transaction code MDVP to do a collective component ATP check to determine if you have sufficient components to fulfill the latest production schedule. The goal here is to allow only those planned orders with allocated components to be converted into production orders and eventually get released. You decide how far into the future you want to run this transaction for but I would expect it to occur at least days, if not weeks ahead of when you will be releasing or converting that planned order into a production order. So in this particular case, I'm going to run it for Plant 1000 for this material. Typically you would run this from a MRP controller, recognizing that when you are running ATP for the planned orders, you want to do it for all the materials you're responsible for rather than a specific material like I have here and the other key point is down here is where you can then control how far into the future you run this transaction for. So you can specify the date range and that's how you control how far you actually allocate components to the various planned orders you are responsible for. I'm going to run it wide open since I have a small subset of data. So let's execute and here we can see what we are seeing here is the results of running ATP before we can always come here and do a select all and run the ATP check and it will do everything in mass. This is exactly what I did before. What you can see is that the first order is confirmed at 100%. So the goal is to produce 5,000 and 5,000 we are able to do, versus if you come to the second row the intent is to do 12,000, we could do 11,393 which is 95% of the order and you can also see a status here in terms of where the tree represents ATP check was done and it was fully confirmed versus the two means. Yes, it was also done for the second row, but only a partial confirmation was achieved and then the remaining ATP check did run but none of them confirmed because of one or more missing components. Okay, so a couple of things, so what I'm going to do is come in here this planned order, I'm going to click and change order you could also do an ATP check from within a planned order, so instead of doing it a collective processing you could also do individual just in case you made a change to the date and or the timing. You can come in here and run this to see what the revised results are but the one thing I want you to see in here is that for each material there's something called a scope of check. So if I click on this icon, you could see that this check is zero one, this value is derived from the material master of the component. So in this case, here is the component raw material and it has this value assigned to it. So that's how it knows which option to pick and then it says checking rule PP, which in this case applies to the planned order, it says look, when I do an ATP check, for the planned order this is the rule to employ. This combination then derives this information in terms of, hey, which stock to take into consideration. You know, do I want to include safety stock? Typically that would be yes for raw material. So maybe we should have a different setting, for example that also includes safety stock. We may want to include quality stock, in other words, we receive the inventory, but it's still going through quality inspections so why not include that, and then we have these other objects over here, which is, hey, should I be looking at a purchase requisition? I mean, since it's a planned order that we are evaluating it typically it makes sense to include a requisition. But if this was a production order, for example, be it create or release, we would have a different check-in rule and that other check-in rule would exclude a requisition, it would pay more attention to like a firm object like a purchase order. So this is how we then start tightening up the rule as we progress from a planned order to a created production order, to a released production order. Let's come back and take a look at this particular planned order, so I'm going to select this, I'm going to display this order and here we can see one of the things I want to call out is the fact that we have a committed quantity of 5,000. So again this is another level of visibility when we run ATP check, yes, we can see it in that overview that we initially came from, but we can also come within the individual planned order and see how much are we committed for? If I take a look at the component list the required quantity is also listed here, but you can also see the commitment of the components so this is how much inventory has been allocated to this planned order. Okay versus if I came back to this other one here, this other order, and again, I take a look at this and I come to the component overview and here what we can see is, this is what we required this 7,320 this 6,120 but because of limited availability we could only produce the 11,343 and this is how much inventory is needed. So again once you get the proper rules in terms of the scope of check, if you employ that properly and you employ this process properly, doing this type of check in advance to creating a production order, it allows you to have those critical conversations to determine, do I truly need to move that production out or is there a way to expedite some of these components? And you could do this weeks in advance so that there is reduced number of changes to your revised production schedule. So in summary we have covered how planned order ATP Chart allows you to. Understand why we are performing an ATP check on planned orders. Understand the scope of check for the planned orders, basically, which inventory, supply and demand elements are we taking into consideration to perform the check. And how to actually perform the ATP check for planned orders. Thanks Eacliffe. Using this feature effectively can help tremendously in providing the planners with visibility into availability of materials for future production runs. If you want to learn more about ATP or material availability checking, or even other SAP features and functions please check out our video catalog and of course if you have a specific question feel free to submit it below.

Planning Strategies

Mastering planning strategies: An essential overview

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; IBP
MD04; MM03
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin, and in this video we're going to focus on something really important, and that is SAP's planning strategies capability. When used correctly, planning strategies can help organization optimize their production planning processes resulting in improved planning, accuracy, and reduced lead times. Kristie, a big topic for sure. How about you take it away? Guess what Martin? Planning strategies represent a powerful feature that will dictate how we will recognize and respond to demand and when used correctly truly help organizations properly balance the investment and capacity, resources, and materials to the demand, and in this demonstration I'm going to focus on three key things. First of all, what are our options for planning strategies and how does that selection look. Where can we find the planning strategy in SAP? And lastly, just a few tips for selecting the planning strategy that meets the needs of your business and the customer. So now what we want to do is go in and actually take a look at the list of planning strategies that are available to us. So where we're going to find this is in the material master. So you can see that I am in here, I'm under MM03 because I just intend to display and I've made my way over to the MRP 3 tab and then you can see that I'm going to come down here to this particular field. This tab is where most of the information around how we are going to respond to demand is going to live and one of the places where we're going to do that is through our planning strategy or our strategy group. So we need to go through for all of our materials and make a determination on whether we are make to stock, meaning we are stocking inventory in advance of receiving a sales order, whether we are make to order, which we're making our inventory and direct response to that particular sales order, or if we are an assemble or finished order means we're stocking at some level of the BOM but we are able to convert within the customer tolerance time. So you can see here that there is quite an extensive list of different planning strategies. In fact, it's difficult to believe that there would be a manufacturing scenario out there where we didn't have a planning strategy that could help us to get us to where we need to be. But as you're thinking about your demand program and how you're flowing information into the system, this is your point of control, so how am I going to react and respond to that demand? How do I remove risk from the demand signal that I'm experiencing and where can I count on that demand and produce even to something like our forecast or to an overall plan. So let's say for example, you were wanting to be in a position to only make to customer order. You might choose something like one of the planning strategies that say make to order production, so something like a 20. Perhaps you are more of a traditional make to stock environment, you might be using something like a strategy 40. If you were an assembled or finished to order, you might be working with a planning strategy 52, where you're stocking at one level of the BOM and then using your forecast in order to be in a position to quickly convert from those raw or semi-finished goods into the finished good all within customer lead time. Maybe you have a particular planning material and you're able to provide a forecast for that particular group but not for the individual and finished goods, you could tie them all together using a planning strategy 63 and even control which planning plan or production plan you're going to be using to divide that demand signal out. These strategy groups are so important, it's one of the two key master data fields that help us to get our plans in place for the material so that we know how we're going to react and respond. It's one of the key points of control and one of our best opportunities to ensure that our manufacturing strategy is in alignment with our customer needs. So as we think also about moving from a push to a pole model this is another area or lever we could focus in and try to make those improvements. But very long list here, you've got 79 options in this case. I'm sure a few less than that, just coming straight out of the box but there is a strategy group for just about any manufacturing scenario for how we want to react and respond to that demand. Definitely an area to explore and a lot of opportunities to work through these and know that it's not a selection just for your overall organization, but this is something that can be evaluated by product, family, or by other levels of the hierarchy and it's tied directly in to your go-to-market strategy. So typically underappreciated, usually folks are using only one or two. So really a lot of opportunity here to diversify your strategy and make sure that you're planning in the right way to meet your customer needs. So in summary we have covered how planning strategies will allow you to be able to. Strategically react and respond to demand. Control your response time to the customer. And empower MRP with the correct information on whether that material should be planned or replenished as make to stock, make to order or assemble or finish to order. Thanks Kristie, that's a big topic for sure. Using this feature allows for an improved picture of and response to demand forecasts, better production planning, and of course increased customer satisfaction. So if you want to learn more about planning strategies and other features in SAP please check our video catalog and if you can find what you're looking for feel free to submit a suggestion below.

Planning With Infinite Capacity

Leverage the graphical planning board for infinite capacity planning

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
Scheduling & Shop Floor
PP; PTM
CM01; CM05; CM21; CM25
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, I am Martin, and in this video we will focus on how to take advantage of SAP's planning with infinite capacity capability. When used correctly planning with infinite capacity can help organizations by providing real time information about the capacity and utilization of production resource. Eacliffe how about you tell us a little bit more about infinite capacity planning? Sure Martin. Planning with infinite capacity is a powerful feature when used correctly to identify when manufactured inventory is truly needed. In this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things. One, acknowledge that MRP only takes inventory consideration into consideration and not capacity. Two, highlight the need to evaluate capacity and address any capacity overload situation. And three, understand the implications to component requirement timing when addressing overload situation. The intent here is to review the results from MRP to show that the results works on the premise of working with infinite capacity. So first we're looking at transaction MD04 the stock requirement list. Right now there's one supply element, this plan order, along with some demand elements. Basically we can see the projected inventory level is negative, so when I run MRP it will generate more planned orders. I intentionally kept this planned order here so that we can quickly drill into it, so I'm going to display this plan order, come to the detailed scheduling tab and here we can see work centers, CHEM_PK1 and CHEM_PK2. These are the two work centers the new planned orders will also work with and put capacity requirements against. We could see we have two capacity category 001 machine and ZLB. This one is also sharing 002 so two different type of labor, but from a finite scheduling perspective the emphasis is placed on 001. So with that said, let's take a quick look at, and just to show that there's nothing behind the scene I'm going to do a quick refresh, nothing has changed, so I'm going to go to CM01. So here we have capacity information, again this is the two work centers CHEM_PK1 and if I page down we will then see CHEM_PK2. So let's go back up to CHEM_PK1, we do see some capacity requirements, the point is that it's related to this one planned order and that planned order is the one that I showed on the previous screen, so 75464, if I come here you can see 75464. So that's where that capacity information is coming from. The other thing I want to show is if I go back to CM 01 capacity planning, so let's arrow back, I'm going to double click on this work center, we'll branch us to display mode of the work center, we are going to go to the capacity tab, capacity category 001, which is machine, double click on that and it's taking us to this field here, which says that we are allowed to do finite scheduling on this particular work center. The same holds true for CHEM_PK2again. Again come here, double click on the work center, go to the capacity tab, click on the 001 machine capacity and again we can see it's relevant for finite scheduling. Okay, so with that said, what we are going to do is I'm going to go back to this transaction, the stock requirement list, I have this option here to do single item multi-level, so let's schedule it, we want to make sure we are doing late time scheduling so recognizing that, hit enter. Okay, MRP ran for this finished good, I'm going to do a refresh here and now we see we have planned orders fulfilling the independent requirement. So let's come to the first forecast. Basically what happens is the forecast is for 8,000, 5,000 there was already a planned order, so within net difference is 3,000 so you can see the projected inventory is 0 after it gets consumed by the forecast. Likewise, we could then see there's a planned order for 12,000 to meet the requirement, but I also want you to pay attention to the timing. So here we can see the forecast is dated 3/13 so the supply is on 3/13. The demand here is for 3/20 so the supplier is on 3/20. In other words what has happened is the system or MRP did not take capacity in consideration, its primary and only focus is on meeting the timing of when is that inventory needed. So going back to the capacity planning, what I'm going to do here is I'm going to do a refresh, and by doing the refresh, we can now see from machine capacity we need a lot of additional machine time to meet the requirements of those planned orders. So here we can see look, current week there's only 32 hours left, and then 40, 40 versus 247, 227 . So that's for machine but we also see a similar situation with labor, we need not only a lot of machine time but a lot of labor. So even though we have the indicator set, and again, the focus is on capacity category 001, and it's set for finite scheduling at this point, when we run MRP it does not take capacity into consideration. It instead says, there's infinite capacity and then it leaves it up to the production planner to determine how this gets resolved. Does it get resolved by moving some of the production to another set of work centers or do we source it from another plant or do we go to a vendor? And if I drill down, we can see all the planned orders, so here's the original one 75464 and everything else is new planned orders generated by MRP, saying look, this is when we need to supply the inventory. How you go about achieving that, that's left up to the production planner. Okay, so this results, we would then move it to the next stage of production planning, which most likely involves a graphical planning board because it's there, we can do things like finite scheduling considering this is the current week, next week, and the week after. The only way that this can be achieved is by moving this into the future, which means we then miss the timing of fulfilling that independent requirement. So in summary we have covered how planning with infinite capacity allows you to. Decide when you want to manufacture inventory to fulfill inventory requirement rather than having an automated decision. Evaluate capacity and decide how to address each capacity overload situation. And to understand the implications to component requirement timing when addressing overload situation. Thanks Eacliffe. Using this feature enables more informed decisions about production planning to avoid potential disruptions for sure. So if you'd like to know more about this feature and other features in SAP please feel free to check out our other videos and if you have a question or a suggestion please feel free to submit it below.

Planning With a Planning Material

Enhance planning with effective use of planning materials

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; PTM
MD04; MM03
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi Martin here, and in this video we will focus on how to take advantage of SAP's planning with a planning material capability. When used correctly planning with a planning material can help organizations evaluate the quality of signal and plan at a right level to drive results. Kristie, I know that means a lot, how about you tell us a little bit more? Let me break it down for you Martin. Planning with a planning material is a powerful strategy when used correctly. What it allows us to do is group materials that share a demand stream together and allow the demand for that material to consume the forecasted requirements for the family. In this demonstration I am going to focus on three key things. First of all, where we maintain the master data that supports planning strategy 63 or planning with a planning material. Second, what a material that utilizes planning strategy 63 would look like. And lastly, how the materials that are set up to reference a planning material might be related to one another, or essentially the use case for planning strategy 60. Okay, before I show you this one in the system, I think it's important that I give you a little visual in the definition. So, planning with a planning material and without make to order planning strategy 63, you have to think about this one as a one to many relationship. So it allows you to be in a position to produce many different finished goods. Think about it, if you had a whole family of products that were related to one another, and you needed to tie it back to a single material where you were able to get enough signal to forecast. You may be forecasting that planning material to be in a position to produce a variety of different end items. So if you saw our previous video where we talked a little bit about assemble order, and we were walking through the different levels of BOM's that you could stock at, this is using those same principles, but in addition to that, you have one material where you're placing that signal and many different end items that you may be producing as a result that has some variance in the way that it's finally built out to the customer. Okay, and you get to choose the level of the bill of material, so it's got a common BOM. That level of bill of material that you want to stock at, so you're sending that demand signal through appropriately. This is very, very helpful when you have a lot of variants in terms of the end items, but you have some consistency in terms of the non-variable components that can be in there and consumed by those different end items. So let's do this now, let's go ahead and actually look in SAP and I'll show you where this is maintained. So this is our example here, and again, this is a planning material so customer orders will never come in against this item. It's just getting us set up to drive requirements to the materials that are associated with it. So this is 2087 aptly named planning material, and this is where we're controlling that flow. So we're entering our forecast here and it is generating a planned order, which is going to get transitioned over to the related materials. We're going to go to 2088, which is one of the end items that is related to this planning material, so you can see the dependent requirement, it's handing that demand over here. But nothing is going to happen until we actually have a customer order come in and then that is going to be what will actually drive this. So let me display for you, unless we are choosing to stock at the finished good level, but we can control the level at which we want to stock, let me display for you where these settings are made. And this is going to be on your MRP three view of the material master. And you'll see here we've got the planning strategy is set to 63. Our planning material is 2087 and our planning plant is 3000. So you can even use this across network if you need to, to be able to consolidate, but it's much easier to see the demand and supply generally in the same plant, so easier to plan with when you're first getting started, but as you go, you could start to make this very sophisticated. But then as we think through the bill of material that's related for the non-variable components, we're going to be driving from that in order to be able to convert this into the appropriate end item within that customer's tolerance time. So everything that is related to the replenishment with all the non-variable components is driven by that forecast on the planning material and we control the level of the BOM that we want to stock at and then this finished good as the customer orders are coming in, we'll start to see this tick away and we'll get those planned orders converted into production orders, and then everything made and produced and ready for that customer requirement. Okay, so very, very useful technique to help us to be able to get the demand signal at the right level and maintain flexibility as well as assurance of supply as we're passing those requirements down. So in summary, we have covered how planning with the planning material will allow you to. Think about how your materials are related and if we get a stronger signal when grouped together using a planning material. Maintain a forecast at the planning material level to support several different end items. And support cross location planning, referencing a planning plant. This planning strategy is very specific and may be a little hard to understand, but hopefully this helps to generate some interest and conversation around this helpful planning strategy. Thanks Kristie. This sounds like an excellent way to improve demand forecasting accuracy, signal better production plans and increase our customer satisfaction. So if you want to learn more about planning strategies and your SAP system please feel free to check out our other videos and of course if you have a burning question feel free to submit it below.

Plant Specific Material Status

Explore how plant-specific material status interacts with various PLM statuses

7 min
New
SAP S/4HANA®
Demand & Supply Planning
P2P; PTM; DM
MD04; MM03
Hey everyone, Martin here. And if you're all about maximizing the ROI in your SAP system, you've come to the right place. In this video, we're going to delve into how we can use the plant specific material status field in the Material Master to align the activities and materials eligible for to through its stages of the product lifecycle. This helps with everything from compliance to making sure that we have the opportunity to run the inventory down at the end. So Sean, I'd love for you to dive into this and tell us more about it. What are some of the key things we should know about the plant specific material status? This is a great topic, Martin, thank you very much. Now folks, the plant specific material status is highly configurable to your organizations needs. It's meant to associate what activities a material is eligible for and where it is in the product life cycle. And it creates for us a high level of visibility if you take time to think through the descriptions. This is how we can know if a material is cleared for takeoff. Or on restriction for planning, for replenishment, or for procurement. And most importantly, know that SAP follows rules and alerts, and if you're trying to perform that activity that a material is not eligible for, it's going to let you know. So let's go in and take a look. Today we're talking about plant specific material status. Now this will be a high level demo, but in doing so, a reminder that material statuses are configurable to the needs of the organization. And what they do is they tell us whether a material is subject to restrictions and what those restrictions are. So let's say there's a material under development or one that's about to be discontinued, we will more than likely need a way to restrict that material, which could be blocked for use in certain business activities by assigning statuses that direct how that's going to happen. So we're going to look inside of SAP as to how this takes place and we will take a look specifically at the material master MRP options . So let's get started and let's take a look at what it looks like in SAP. So here I have a material, what I'm going to do is I'm going to go to the material master and take a look, and you'll notice in this view, this is the MRP1 view, that there's a field here called material status. And so if I open that up, what I see are the restrictions that which have been applied from a material status point of view, and in this case, there are six of them. We see design, we see design and plan, use, phase out, obsolete, and then there's one to block our BOM header items as well. So those are the restrictions that are currently in place. Now, looking inside of that, just to get a view for setting the rules as we go, what we do is get a view behind the scenes as to what's happening inside of the configuration. So here's our material master, and I'm going to again take a look at what that looks like. And now I get the same six areas in terms of these descriptions that I see on the right hand side. This was the drop down, remember, from the material status piece that we saw in MRP 1. And if I wanted to look at what happens here, I can look under design. What are the details behind that? And this is an interesting piece because we spoke about blocking certain things or not allowing certain things to happen. So from a purchasing management point of view, what's the messaging we're going to get if we want to buy something or purchase something while it's in the design phase? And you'll notice there's a B, and if I just bring those dropdowns for you, there were three options. If it was blank, there'd be no message at all. It'd be go ahead, do as you need to. If it was an A, it would give me a message, a warning that would say, look this is still in the design phase, so here's a warning, you may not want to do this. Or as is currently the case, it's a B and that B says it's going to give me an error and it will not allow me to do any purchasing based on something that's still in the design phase. The same can be said for manufacturing. So if I come down to this piece of the puzzle under production, I'll notice here that I also have a B. So it's also going to block me, it's not going to allow me to do anything from a production point of view, it's going to hold back as far as that's concerned. And so these are really interesting and important pieces that this is where we set the rules that is going to help us guide. If I went into the use phase, if I look in the use, what I'm going to see is that it's all open. Once this material is in use, it's free, we can purchase, we can put out RFPs, we can do production, etc. So that's how the rule set works. By contrast, if we got down to an obsolete place and we look at what does the obsolete look like, I'm now going to just see that I've got this B everywhere. So whether it's purchasing, whether it's bills and materials, whether it's routings, whether it is the material requirements, whether it's production, the B is indicating to me, as I showed you earlier on, that it is going to give us an error message. In other words, it's going to block us from actually going down and continuing with that. So this is where the power of the material status comes into play in terms of creating restrictions and not allowing us to continue in that space because we've set up the rules, and we can see as we track back here through the configuration process, we're setting up the rules to say, please make sure that we actually block things at this stage of the puzzle, and we don't want to make it go forward as far as these are concerned. So that's the first area where we're able to put those restrictions in place. It's in terms of the material master inside of MRP. Okay folks, let's review the so what of this powerful field found in the MRP 1 tab of the material master. First of all, well constructed statuses show a clear progression that matches how a material might move through its lifecycle with some accommodation for things that could come up and that would require temporary restriction. The fields we're discussing today is at plant level, which can be helpful if status change and may need to be done differently by either plant or by country. Now most importantly, while this field is great to support reporting, it is an operational field that's meant to have teeth and assist the MRP controller in their planning and replenishment processes. And then the warehouse team in moving the inventory through the process. Thank you, Sean. This of course sounds super valuable and an opportunity that one of many organizations should spend time thinking through and getting right. So folks, as always, please check out our video catalog and if you have a specific comment, please submit it below.

Predictable or Unpredictable: What's the Story

Using history to illuminate predictability vs. unpredictability

10 min
New
SAP S/4HANA®
Demand & Supply Planning
P2P; PTM; DM
MC.9
Welcome to the ultimate guide to maximizing your SAP system. I'm Martin and today's video, we're going to help you unlock some of the functionalities you didn't even know existed. So shall we? Okay. In this video, we're going to take a look at some of the red line graphs and see what they can tell us about a material's history. I'm very pleased to say that we have a special treat today, none other than Sean Elliffe. He is a man that knows how to tell a story, so I cannot wait to hear him articulate some of the examples for us. Sean, take it away. Well Martin, we have action, we have adventure, we have surprises at every twist and turn and we are going to go in and see if these materials are predictable or if they're unpredictable. You know what the biggest surprise is? When we feel like an item is completely out of control and then we take a real look and find the consumption is actually pretty steady. So let's get in and take a look, see what the story is. I'll also highlight what we can and cannot determine from the visual that we're looking at. It's fun to imagine what the story may be, but we do not want to assume facts that are not actually evident. So let's go in and take a look. Welcome to the demo on predictability and unpredictability. Now, I ran my inventory report and found a few materials worth considering. I chose raw material and two finished goods and I based that on an analysis of key figures, such as the number of times that we've been issuing these materials over the period, against the average inventory value over the same period. Let's take a look graphically at these materials. So the first is then the raw material, let's start there and we're going to go and take a look at what does this look like graphically. And surprise! Look at that, wow! It really is a nice looking graph. You know what I'm going to do? I'm just going to change up the size of those lines a little bit so it is even clearer and we can what a wonderful looking graph, but what does this tell us? First, it looks like the activity is contained in a pretty consistent band. From the top to the bottom. If we look at all of these top to bottom, pretty consistent band, and we call that process deviation, and that consistency is the first good sign of predictability. The next thing we look at is what we call the consumption lines. Now, if you take these lines, the downward lines, all of these downward lines are consumption, where we are using material, consuming it, and looking at those, they actually look to be fairly parallel, pretty much parallel to one another, that's what they look like. And that parallel line between them gives us a second indication that we have a predictable material. Now there's some other indications in here, let's call them facts without evidence. We could call on what is our average inventory and it looks to be somewhere running through there close enough to about 30,000 kilograms. And what is the lowest point? So the lowest point over the period is this here, and that is known as our dead stock. And our dead stock here running around about. 13,000 kilos. Now, these are important pointers for inventory analysis and they're going to be covered in other videos. But let's look then at what is the final sign of predictability, and so for that let me come out of here and what I'm going to do now is I'm going to go to what's known as my receipts and issues diagram. Oh voila! Look at that. And what this is telling me is if I take a look at the receipts against the issues, and we'll open up the legend so we can see what that looks like. The green line are the accumulated issues and the blue line there are the accumulated receipts over time. And we're seeing two things here. One, they're tracking pretty close to one another. And that's a good sign where receipts and issues are very close and almost equal to one another. The second sign we see is that the line that they are tapering upwards is around about 45 degrees, and those two key pointers indicate predictability. So as a result, I would argue that this particular material has a high level of predictability and is really one that could go into an automation process quite easily, but a high level of predictability from that. Okay, let's take a look then at our second material, which is a finished good, and once again, we're going to go and take a look at the stock level and say, Oh, this looks a little different. And we'll do that same little trick that we looked at early on and change the width of those lines. All right, that gives us a much better picture. And so as we look at this and change that scale, the result is that we can see from the analysis, there's a large range and if I just give it to you off the top in terms of dollars this time instead of kilos, this high point here down to this low point here is a range of about $300,000 here to about $10,000 here at the low end and that is a significant process deviation from top to bottom and so at first glance that might look as being an unpredictable material because of this huge process deviation that we have. But it also raises some questions that require further evidence. Are we producing to plan? Are we changing constantly as we go ? Let's look at our lowest inventory point of the analysis, which is this one down here. It in fact, gives us a false sense of the read on deadstock, which as we go forward is actually climbing because as our averages go up and this space below, it's starting to show that deadstock is rising as we go. So we get these other nuances that we can start to look at. But looking at those instances, we also see lot sizes that are produced and if we look in this space here, we can see these lot sizes were pretty much consistent. There was another space there. Here's another space. And here's a third place where we're looking like they were running pretty consistently. And those consumption lines by the same token from our earlier conversation are showing some form of consistencies and there are some parallel dynamics against it. So once again, we want to go and say, okay I'm still not a hundred percent sure Let's go and do our final check then as to what that might look like and we're going to look again at our receipts and our issues diagram and what does that look like? Oh, well, look at that. So now if we put our legend in again, we start to see the green line is accumulated issues and the blue line is accumulated receipts. Now, we do start to see semblances of that 45 degree angle of the lines, which talks about predictability. But what we are seeing here is that once we look a bit further into it, we see that the gap between the two is getting wider. And that gap suggests that we are, in this case, bringing in way more than we are actually using. So our receipts are outstripping our issues. In and around that, we still have a good argument that there is predictability here that we can work with. And if we can take that predictability and optimize this material, I think we'd be in a good position. But I would argue in this case here that there is still a good semblance of predictability that we can see on this particular material. Okay, so with that said, let's go back and let's take a look at the final example that we have. And we'll follow the same process. Let's go down and take a look at what we have. Oh, this looks a bit higgledy piggledy, it looks like it's all over the show, right? So let's again, adjust that width so that we can see those lines a little bit more clearer. And what we also noticed is that we did have a stock out at a point here, but it's pretty difficult to start to see whether the downward lines are parallel with one another. And we start to get a sense that this is probably less predictable than we would otherwise think. We're also seeing that the process deviation from top to bottom is fairly wide, it's quite large, and so that noise suggests again that maybe not so good. Maybe it's not quite as predictable as we would imagine. And just looking at this particular graph, I would err on the side of saying, there's less predictability here than would otherwise be the case. So if we follow what we've done thus far, and we go back and we take a look at our receipts and our issues, once again, we get that issue. from a consumption point of view on the issues, that's the green line. There is a little bit of consistency. We can see some predictability with this material. The receipts seem to be all over the show and creating gaps between the two and therefore we're bringing in way more than we need but from a consumption point of view, it looks like that consumption is a lot more consistent. And so for us, the challenge is inconsistency on the supply side, which is the receipts but that needs to be tightened up for us to get to an optimized space at the end of the day. And so folks getting to grips with visibility on what is predictable and what is not will position us to better optimize our inventory and help our organizations as they go on the quest to free up working capital. What a fun demo. There's no doubt that a picture is worth a thousand words and being able to rally around a visual is immensely helpful to critical thinking and to problem solving. These graphs offer us an opportunity to be curious and investigate further to truly understand the story. And then when we're well armed, and particularly if we've had a surprise twist, and the material does have predictable consumption, We can focus on taking control and smoothing out the supply. Knowledge is power after all. So let's take the time to explore and understand. Thanks, Sean. Whenever someone says story, I always hope you're one of them to tell it. Thank you for helping us understand the opportunity in this feature and function. All right, folks, if you want to know more about this and hear more stories from Sean, please come back and check out our video catalog and of course, if you have a specific question feel free to submit it below.

Price Breaks

Expert strategies for evaluating good deals and managing risks

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Procurement & MRP
MM
ME12; ME32K
Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, Martin here, and in this video we're going to focus on how to determine if that price break is really a good deal, using standard information for decision making directly in SAP. How do we know if we're really getting a good deal? As we know, the best way to learn is by doing so Kristie tell us how we're going to analyze the quality of that data in SAP to determine if that's a good deal or not. Oh boy, this is a great one. I had a friend in college who always bought a lot of what was on sale because he was actually always "saving money". Whether he needed that great deal item or not. Let me tell you, even canned goods eventually expire. Sometimes volume discounts make a ton of sense, and other times that seemingly good deal, well, it just really isn't a good deal. Now in terms of total cost, in today's demo. I am going to highlight a few key stats easily available in SAP to help evaluate the quality of that price break. How that price break should be maintained. And some options for potential negotiations to make that break work for you. So what happens when you get a quote back from your supplier and they are offering you some price breaks based on volume discounts? Well, we want to make sure that we have the opportunity to capitalize on that and at the same time we don't want to over purchase because what that can result in is dead stock, so inventory that is sitting there, not turning, not being used well in our process and sometimes even what we call slow moving or even excess or obsolete stock within your own organization based on your definitions. We don't want that. We do want to make sure though that we are taking full advantage of the pricing. So here's a couple of different options for you. First of all, I'm going to talk a little bit about what not to do. So oftentimes when we get price breaks back, the temptation is to do one of two things. It's to come in here and it's to set this minimum order quantity based on what you think that the best price is from your supplier. So let's say the supplier said, hey at 500 units you now get a lower price. You come in here and you go, okay, I think that you know $2.22 is really the most I would want to pay for this particular item. So I'm going to go ahead and set the minimum order quantity here. So what I do like about that is that you're providing a specific quantity. Never cover your lot sizes or your minimums that you're going for with periodic lot sizes. Meaning, if you think that your average usage per month is 1,200 units, don't set your lot size key to be a 4 week lot size because what if your demand changes? Then you're not getting, you're not necessarily achieving what it is that you were trying to from a discount perspective, and it's really hard to see and understand what that quantity is. So, make sure your minimums are your minimums. So, what is the smallest lot size that you would purchase from that supplier? And then also consider your rounding value, and then consider how frequently you have the opportunity to place orders and receive shipments from that supplier, and sometimes you may even have something like a fixed lot size that you're adhering to, or you could have a maximum lot size that you are adhering to. So make sure that we set this up properly. This section, this lot size data section is frequently underutilized, so make sure that you take advantage of that. The other thing is, if you are able to negotiate with your supplier so that you can get your volume discounts over time, another great alternative is an outline agreement. So something like a scheduling agreement or even a contract. So you can see here this is the same item, this flywheel and we have a contract that has been set up. What you'll note is as I select this item and I go into our item conditions, we have some conditions out here and you'll see here there's a little tick box that says scales. What this means is that there are price scales for this item. So there is a price per 1, but then there are also additional prices as we increase the quantities that we are procuring. And when we set this up, you can see here if I buy 1 I pay $45, if I buy 40 I pay $40, and if I buy 80 or more, then I'm getting $35. So I can go in here and manage this and you'll notice that the validity period here goes out quite a ways, but the contract has a validity period that goes through February 25th of 2023, so it's going to be governed by that overall document. What we want to make sure of is that then we are referencing this contract in our source list and every time we buy, it is looking here to see what those price breaks are so we're able to accumulate across time. Same thing with our scheduling agreements. We can also make sure that we are getting our price breaks there, and this allows us to bring in material at the rate that we need it and still accumulate our volumes so that we are able to get those price breaks where appropriate. So, as you're placing your orders, ensuring that you don't have to go and manually remember or key in, oh, this order is for 40, so it should be $40, or this order is for 120 and it should be $35. It will automatically reference the scales that are associated with the contract and every time you go in and you place that purchase order, it will read the correct value for you. So, this allows you to have multiple price breaks and be able to reference them accordingly as you are calling off those documents. And, there are a ton of different scale types that will allow you to model the price strategy that you're experiencing with your supplier, so you can get more creative with your negotiations so that you're able to go in and make that happen. So, really awesome ways to do this without just saying, I want to go for this economic order quantity and not be able to adjust that based on changes in your demand. If you are going to do something like that and enter an economic lot size in, you must review it regularly to ensure that that value still make sense, and the best way to do that is to look at what your consumption history has been through MC42 or look at your requirements going forward through MC43 and we cover those transactions in a variety of other videos. So, make sure it's a good deal, don't overpurchase and use outline agreements to help you to make sure that you're getting the right price based on those purchase orders each time you place an order with that supplier. So in summary, we have covered how to. Quality check the value of that volume discount. Properly planned for the discount. And some options or alternatives for how you might set the rules in place to capitalize on that quality buy without unplanned purchases or relying on manual intervention. Thank you, Kristie. No one wants to be your friend from university who took advantage of what turned out to be not such a good buy. But however, this is a serious concern. We want to negotiate great deals but we also want to make sure these deals work for us. Allowing SAP help to analyze and then apply the rules for those purchases is a huge help in making the right decisions in consideration of the total cost of ownership. So if you'd like to know more about this particular topic or any other topics in SAP about how to utilize SAP better, please feel free to check out the video library.

Purchase Order Management

Easily locate and manage overdue purchase orders

11 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Procurement & MRP
P2P
ME2M; ME22N
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin and in this video we're going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's purchase order management capability. When used correctly, purchase order management can help an organization stay current on the status of open orders. This is critical for success when making promises to customers and of course to the manufacturing floor. Kristie, share with us some knowledge about that. Sure Martin. Purchase order management for overdue purchase orders is a powerful feature when used correctly and in this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things. First, how do we find overdue purchase orders? Second, what should we consider in how we should resolve these overdue purchase orders? And lastly, what is the value and impact to MRP when we are able to keep our dates up to date and what happens when we don't keep them up to date? Erosion of the quality of our planning. All right, let's go into the system and talk through some PO management. So in a couple of our other videos we've gone through how to find overdue MRP elements. So in this case, purchase orders through using the exception monitoring tools, so things like MD07 or MD06. In this case, we're actually going to go into a list display to identify purchase orders that are past due, and then we'll talk a little bit about some of the date maintenance that can go on in order to be able to help you to manage those purchase orders successfully. And it's really important to maintain your purchase orders with the correct dates because not only does MRP rely on that in order to balance supply and demand but so does ATP or available to promise both to the manufacturing floor, to your affiliate facilities and to your customer. And this is essential that we have the dates in the most correct or accurate fashion possible because without that, the system assumes, SAP will assume that it is coming in any day now it's very hopeful, it lives in a somewhat naive world so it believes any moment that's going to arrive. So our list displays for purchase orders are going to be found under the logistics, materials management, purchasing, purchase order, and then list display. And we may use a wide variety of options here, we could be using everything from an ME80FN to something like an ME2L, or ME2M, or ME2N. Okay and we're just going to go ahead and go in by material for the moment, and for the purposes of our evaluation today, I'm going to choose any purchase orders that have a material number on them, so not equal to blank, and our part of Plant 1000. I could then specify my purchasing group or my purchasing organization, or even a subset of documents here if I wanted to. But the most important selection here for us is really in the selection parameters. So if you look WE101, these are the items that are still open for goods receipt and it's notable that a purchase order can remain open for a variety of reasons even if it's not still eligible for delivery. But within the context of worrying about MRP and ensuring that we're in a good position there to be calculating the correct requirements plan and ATP to be able to promise accurately, we're looking specifically for items or purchase orders that still have open goods receipts, so that's going to be the WE101. Okay but these statuses in general are really helpful as you're going through and you're trying to evaluate different conditions of your purchase orders and making sure that we're taking good care of them and closing out the cycle. The other thing I'm going to do is I'm going to say, hey, I want to look at my purchase orders that are passed due by more than a week. So I'm going to go ahead and drop a date in here of 4/6 and then I'm going to go ahead and run this. And what this is doing is it's going out and it's identifying any purchase orders that have materials on them, so not free text POs, and anything where the dates are at least 7 days or more in the past. Okay, and this is going to bring me in at the line item level, I can then go into the delivery schedule and this is going to show me for every single line on the PO. Now for the purposes of this conversation, I'm going to turn some of this subtotaling off, so I'm going to go ahead and pull that out, and then I'm going to read you my sort sequence here once that comes up. Okay, so now you can see that I'm starting to get some date information so I can really see what's going on. So I've got my document date, I have the quantities that I'm dealing with here, and then I have also my delivery date and my statistical delivery date. Okay, these are very important, it's important to pay close attention to the difference. I'm going to actually sort this into sending order by document date, and I'm going to go ahead and just bring this out a little bit more and see if we can find a good example that we can go in and take a look at. And what I'm looking for here are some purchase orders that maybe need a little love and attention because they are still sitting out there open. You can see that in this case I've got a wide variety of document types. I have scheduling agreements, I have standard purchase orders, and I have stock transfers. You can see that in the type category, and what I want to do is just go ahead and go in and take a look at one of these just so we can see what's going on. So I'm going to select that line item, and I'm going to go up to go to, and I'll say purchasing document details and that's going to bridge me right into that purchase order. Okay and this is taking me directly to the delivery schedule tab, which is perfect, that's where we should start our conversation today. So my document date is the 22nd of February and my delivery date is the 3rd of March, and so is my statistical delivery date. Okay, so if I had a more accurate date from my supplier, then what I would want to do is go in and update my delivery date to reflect that, okay? That's the date that's going to be relevant for MRP and for ATP. So we are able to get a more accurate read, and that's going to allow manufacturing or the customer to be getting the correct dates as they're going through their planning process. The statistical delivery date is the one that we would use for evaluating performance. So all of our performance metrics would be here. So only in the case that we ask the supplier to move that date out for our own benefit, would we want to change that statistical date. Otherwise, that date should stay the same, and it's the delivery date that moves as we run into issues in the supply chain. As soon as we output the purchase order, that's when that statistical delivery date locks in. Otherwise, if we haven't sent it to the supplier, that's how SAP tries to be fair lets us know if we've actually sent it out to the supplier or not. If we have not output it, then it will continue to recalculate that statistical date based on the planned delivery time. Okay, so if you know your purchase order is going to be past due and you have a better date, or you are currently past due, and you need to give it your next best guess on when it's coming in, while you're working on confirming with the supplier, this is the field you'd want to enter is the delivery date. That's the one you want to update, and the statistical delivery date would stay the same. Now if something has happened and you are no longer expecting to receive more on this purchase order, it's closing out short, then you would want to make sure that you tick this delivery complete tick box. Okay, that's going to be very important. You would tick that and that lets us know we're not expecting to receive any more against this line. The last thing I wanted to show to you here though, is the confirmation. So if you're not currently using confirmations, this is another awesome opportunity. So a couple of things here. When the supplier receives the purchase order, they can acknowledge it and send that confirmation back. Okay, that can be received into SAP in a wide variety of ways. You can even be manually entered if your volume is low enough but there's a wide variety of ways for us to accept that information back in. When we have that, we can choose to make that confirmation relevant for MRP or not but we want to make sure that if that is the better quality information and it's the more accurate date and it's being tended to, well then we want to be able to use that so they can acknowledge it and that means that it's now on their books and they've acknowledged a date back for when they can facilitate delivery of goods. The other option is to allow them to also make changes so that acknowledgement would move based on as they're moving closer and closer to the date, if there are differences in when that delivery date is going to be. And then the third thing that we can do is we can actually have it move from the acknowledgement type AB for order confirmation to actual shipment notification, so an inbound delivery or an advanced shipment notification can be posted and then we'll see that actually change to an LA which lets us know that this is inbound. Now, what's really great about both of these is that we can actually expose that field also in MD04 so we're able to see the confirmation types progress as we move through the cycle of that purchase order. So a couple of different options there. So again, statistical delivery date stays static based on the planned delivery time unless you have asked the supplier to move that date out. The delivery date is relevant for MRP, and so you would modify that as you're getting new information from your supplier in order to be able to keep your planning current. Once you get to a point where you're mature enough to receive information back from your supplier, then instead of you modifying that delivery date, we start to use the confirmations both for order acknowledgement for changes or updates, and then also ultimately for that as a inbound delivery, which also helps us to reduce errors on the delivery processing at the dock and then if we know that we're receiving that purchase order short, we received all that we were going to receive, then we're going to go to that delivery tab and we're going to go ahead and close it out by clicking on the delivery complete indicator, rather than doing anything like deleting the line off of the purchase order because we want to make sure that we have the integrity of that document staying intact. So it's a little information for you on how to update your purchase orders and PO management and being able to use the list displays to get there. In addition to how we would use that for housekeeping through the exception monitor, if you check out the video how to clean up overdue purchase orders. So in summary, we have covered how purchase order management allows you to. Keep the transactional integrity of the system intact. Support quality replenishment, proposals, exception messages, and ATP checks so important for our customers. And lastly, stay in sync with our suppliers and suss out any problems sooner rather than later. Thanks Kristie. Staying in sync with when our suppliers will be delivering goods is critical to our success. Nothing is worse than finding that the supplier is missing an order or we've expedited an order to the manufacturing floor but are missing a key component. If you'd like to learn more about how to get the most of your SAP system please check out our other videos and if you can find the video you're looking for please submit a suggestion.

Quota Arrangements Managing Transitions

Transition sourcing for superior buying and inventory tactics

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
MM; PP
MD04; MEQ1
Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, Martin here and in this video we're going to focus on how we can use SAP's quota arrangement rules to manage transitions. I know this is a pain point for a lot of companies when they are getting started with quota arrangements. This feature in SAP allows a material planner or a buyer to introduce or retire sources, manage changes in volumes and commitments and support all those important transitions. So we know the best way to learn is by doing so Kristie tell us more about how to use SAP quota arrangements for transitions. Absolutely. I agree that this is a pain point that comes up again and again. Let's dive in and see if we can help make this functionality a little bit clearer. In today's demo, we will. Review active quota arrangements. Introduce a new source of supply. And adjust the rules. I'll also highlight a key field in the quota arrangement called quota base quantity that is oftentimes overlooked, and a key indicator that will help us to identify if we are experiencing a problem. It's all about getting to the right starting point. Okay, let's talk about how we can use SAP's quota arrangements to help us manage transitions from one supplier to another. You can see here we are in the MD04, the stock requirements list, and if we look at our planning situation we have a couple of different sources of supply that are out there where we are alternating back and forth between multiple sources. And you'll see here SAP is giving us recommendations on the quantity for each of these replenishment proposals as well as the dates that we need to start working on getting this information over to our suppliers. So our start or release date for when we need to actually be working through getting those schedule lines over if it's on a scheduling agreement or getting a purchase requisition turn into a purchase order. These are outside of our opening date so we're not late enough as of tomorrow this will actually turn into either a schedule line or into a purchase requisition depending on what we have out there. So what we want to do here is actually go in and we're going to introduce another supplier into our quota arrangement and you'll see because this item does have a quota arrangement it is up here as an option at the top of my screen. As soon as this has a quota arrangement available for it you will see that button appear. We're going to go ahead and click on this, it takes us through to our quota arrangement and I can double click on this line. Okay. And here you can see we have two different suppliers and we have a 50:50 split, so 11,000 going to the first supplier, and a little over 11,000 going to the second supplier. As soon as there's another demand element, it'll go to the first supplier, and it'll continue alternating back and forth, trying to keep that as in balance as possible, since we're using simplest rule in a quota arrangement which is just a percentage split. In our quota arrangements we can have a variety of sources, it could be a production line, it could be a specific production version, so a combination of that BOM and routing. It could also be a mixture of both internally sourced and externally sourced items or sources, and it could also be transferring from another location. So, one of the most confusing things about the way the quota arrangements work is that when you are transitioning or introducing a new supplier into the mix, a lot of times folks will add that and add the percentage split and then all of a sudden all of that volume is going to your new source of supply, and I'm going to show you today how to prevent that from happening. So first of all, if you're transitioning, if you're proving in a new supplier or you're starting to ramp one down, remember that you can use your fair share rules to help you with that. So you can put in whatever split you would like here in order to manage slowly across time that introduction or exit from the supplier. Remember as well that you have validity dates on your quota arrangement, so you can control that split over time, maybe you want to do a slow ramp down over a couple of months or a couple of quarters. You can go ahead and control that with the quota arrangement validity periods. When you're at a point, though, where you want to introduce a new supplier to the mix or start to remove an old supplier, the way that you would do that is actually to pay really close attention to this thing called the quota base quantity. That is where the calculation starts in terms of awarding business to the next source of supply. And so what we're going to do here is we're actually going to introduce a third source. We're going to start to dampen our, valuation on 5595, we're going to take them down to 25%, and we're going to introduce a third supplier into the mix for the last 25%. So I'm going to go to Quota Arrangement at the top and I can switch into Maintain from my view, and I only want to do that when I'm actually ready to make a change. It's really important SAP that you don't go in and just go in to change for change's sake, you want to make sure that that's really, a good reason. And I'm going to go ahead and put in my new supplier, which I think is 1472, and then I'm going to adjust my percentages, I'm going to go to 25 here, 1000 is going to stay at 50 and my first supplier is going to go down to 25 as well. I'll hit enter and I'm going to go ahead and click on the save button. Now I have the option also to simulate right from there, but for the purposes of today's demonstration, I'm going to go ahead and just run it through MRP. And we're going to keep a look at this time horizon, we know this is about where our lead time hits, so kind of from that July 31st and onward standpoint. So I'm going to go ahead and run and it's going to say, are you sure? Are you sure? Are you really, really sure? I am indeed sure. And you'll see we had some changes here, so there were some plan orders that were changed and then some schedule lines that were adjusted for our scheduling agreement. I'll come back here and remember that your stock requirements is live as of the time that you enter the transaction, so because we just ran MRP, we do need to hit refresh. So keep an eye right now on our vendors over here. I'll go ahead and click the refresh button and you'll see now we have introduced 1472 into the mix. What I want to do is go back to the quota arrangement and show you the results and so you'll see here we've had an adjustment. So we've got 6,000, 6,000, and just about 11,000. Now I can control where we start that math from by adjusting the quota base quantity, and sometimes that might be necessary. So if I was removing the first supplier altogether and I was just adding the third, I might need to adjust where we were counting from. So I might come in here and just even these out and say I want to start the new supplier from 10,000 and the old supplier from 10,000 and then have it award from there. So make sure you pay attention to this, if your numbers look off after your MRP run, this is where you want to want to make that adjustment because it's controlling where the start of that calculation is from. So if you have had that quota arrangement in place, you have activity against it, you definitely want to make sure that you adjust that quota base quantity and that will start to level things out. In this case, because we haven't had a whole lot of activity against this quota arrangement yet it's okay for us to start from zero. But if you've had activity against it, the quota base quantity is your key to being able to get your suppliers balanced and get the correct ratios. Just look at that allocated quantity, bring it over, use that as your base quantity to start from. So if you're taking it from 50% down to 25%, start your allocation quantity for the supplier you want to bring down to that 25% of the total volume. Start your 50% guy from 50% and then your newest entry is going to come in and it will start to pick up based on that quantity you started also at the 25 percent in order to be able to make sure that that is working for you. Okay, so a couple tips and tricks there to help you get started, but that's how you introduce a new supplier into quota arrangement and help to manage transitions. So in summary, we've discussed how. Care and feeding requirements for managing transitions from source to source can be clear in SAP. How we might adjust our volumes to ramp up or ramp down. And one of the most common pitfalls that comes up and commonly erodes the faith in the quality of planning. And how we can overcome this and be confident going forward. Thank you Kristie. Managing such a key component of the company's sourcing strategy is risky business, and since the purpose of source diversification is to reduce risk, we definitely want to do what we can to get those activities back into the system so SAP can do the heavy lifting for us. So once again folks if you want to know more about quota arrangements or any other features and functions in SAP please check out our videos and if you have a question please submit it below.

Released Order Material Availability Check

Ensure material availability when releasing production/process orders

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Scheduling & Shop Floor
PP; PTM
COHV
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin, in this video we will focus on how to take advantage of SAP released order material availability check. When used correctly the released order material availability helps organizations by ensuring that we are making the right pre-flight checks to ensure that we are positioned for success on the manufacturing floor. So Eacliffe, how about you tell us a little bit more about this whole process around released order material availability checking. Sure Martin. Released order ATP check is a powerful feature when used correctly to validate that the manufacturing can proceed with executing a production schedule. In this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things. One, why perform another ATP check when releasing a production order? Two, the scope of check, which demand and supply elements are taken into consideration. And three, how to perform an ATP check for released production orders. The intent here is to use transaction COMAC to perform an ATP check an availability check of all components needed for production orders in a release status. The goal is to determine which orders can retain its current schedule dates versus identifying which ones need to be rescheduled out into the future due to one or more missing components. So let me go ahead and execute this transaction. And what we can see here is the production schedule where we have a couple of released production orders, which are currently active and then into the future there is a few production orders in a created status and further out into the future we have these planned orders. We can see that we have these statuses, so MANC status basically is telling us that for these production orders, an availability check has not been performed as yet. You could also bring up additional columns here to show how much been confirmed in terms of what you can make which will get populated once we do an ATP check. So I'm going to actually run the ATP check for everything here right now recognizing that we have a released orders, created orders and planned orders. Again, the rules in terms of how the ATP check is done will differ between released versus created versus planned orders due to configuration that was done ahead of time. So let me go ahead and I'm going to do mass processing. I'm going to execute and the ATP was carried out. I'm going to do refresh and we can see that the status did change to MACM, and this is telling me that confirmation has taken place. Okay, and we can see that these orders have been a 100% confirmed. So let's take one of these released orders and dive into it, and we are going to come to the component overview and the goal is that we can see that we have requirements, quantity, this is what we need for each one of the components, and the question is we can see the committed quantity, so the inventory for these components has now been reserved. What I also want to show you is, I'm going to come to this particular component and I'm actually going to, in fact let me come back I need to come in change mode, so I'm going to come back in this order in change mode, I'm going to come to, the first thing I want to call out is that look you can actually trigger an availability check, it says up here check material availability. So this is one area you can run it within the order. The other option is you can actually come to the component overview and here it's called component availability. It's unfortunate that SAP has used different labels depending on where you are within the transaction, but they are both performing the same task. So I'm going to select this item, I'm going to run the component check and the reason I want to do that is to show how the rules are applied depending on the status of the production order. So because it's a released production order, it's important to observe that the check-in rule, which is what we configured Y2 and the focus is that for when we are dealing with a released order, we literally just want to take the physical inventory into consideration. Things like purchase orders and planned orders we do not want to take these things into consideration. So if you can imagine how you would physically do this type of check. If somebody says, hey, go check and see if you have sufficient components by inspecting the warehouse, how you would perform that task should align with the rules that's defined within the check-in rule. And in this case, the goal is say, look because it's released, the inventory should physically be in the building hence only take a look at that. Okay, so I'm going to close this and again, you can see that the inventory is being confirmed just based on that inventory. So we are going to do continue and we will do a save. So in summary we have covered how released order ATP check allows you to. Understand which demand and supply elements are taken into consideration when the ATP check is performed. How to perform the ATP check for that released production order. And the fact that you can trust the ATP results your system provides for the released production order. Thanks Eacliffe. This seems like a critical step in the process to help support a successful run of the schedule. So if you'd like to know more about production runs, the material availability checking, or any other SAP feature and function please check out our video catalog and of course if you have a particular question please submit it below.

Reorder Point Basics

Master the art of utilizing reorder points effectively

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Procurement & MRP
P2P; PTM
MD04; MM02
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin, and in this video we're going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's reorder point planning. Now, reorder point planning is often considered kind of an old planning technique, but when properly deployed can really help automate the replenishment process for consistent low value, high turn items. Kristie, I know this is a near and dear topic to your heart, tell us more. I'd love to Martin. Reorder point planning is a powerful feature when you use correctly, this is one of the coupling strategies available in SAP and in this demonstration I'm going to focus on three key things. The first is the master data decisions required to support the reorder point planning process. The second is how MRP recognizes and responds to the plan for a material that is on reorder point. And lastly, how reorder point and safety stock differ and yet work together to provide an early warning system when our reorder points are at risk, this is especially important because it's very different from how we traditionally think of the role of safety stock. Alright, let's talk some basics of reorder point planning. So first and foremost, reorder point and safety stock are two totally different features of SAP and we're going to go ahead and show you how safety stock comes into play with reorder point but please note that they are different features with different purposes. We've got some videos out there that explain safety stock. We're going to talk about reorder point planning today, which is all about replenishing when you hit a certain stock level. And there are a couple of different kinds of reorder point planning techniques that are available to you in SAP. So this particular material, you'll notice that the stock requirements list looks really empty, and that is because this is on a manual reorder point. So I can see here, based on the MRP type, it's VB and that means that I'm running purely off of hitting a particular inventory level, like physically hitting that is what's going to trigger it. As soon as the system is showing that I've hit a particular level, then it will trigger replenishment and so you can see here there's a lot of different choices for reorder point planning. You're going to look in this when you get into the V's here, these are all your consumption based planning techniques and you have some that are based off of just hitting a particular stock level and others that are based off of projections in terms of external requirements. So something like an order reservation from production may also come into the reorder point calculation and the system is able also to calculate reorder points for you and adjust them. So those are also options as you get more advanced but this is the most basic, so this is just a manual reorder and I can see my settings here, I just click on this little button and what this is going to do is it's going to show me some of those key planning scenarios. So you can see here I've got a reorder point of 40, so as soon as that available quantity hits 40, it's going to trigger me to replenish. I'm using a lot sized technique of HB, so I'm replenishing to a maximum sock level. So when I hit that 40, I'm going to go ahead and place an order that will take me up to 160 and then I'll work my way back down and as soon as I hit 40, it's going to replenish again. So because I have 52 pieces in stock and to be able to show you some things here, I'm going to go ahead and start making some adjustments. I'm going to adjust my reorder point now from 40 up to 80. So I'll go into environment and I'm going to change material and to calculate my reorder point, I'm going to look at a variety of different factors, including how I've been consuming the material, what my lead time is, what my cadence of placing orders is with the supplier, all of those kinds of good things are going to help me come up with that correct reorder point. But let's say I've reevaluated and it should be 80, I'm going to go ahead and save this, and then right from here, I'm going to go ahead and run MRP. So note that I don't have any requirements right now. It's going to ask me if I'm sure I'm going to say yes, and you'll see I have a purchase requisition created. Now, for those of us who are buyers and planners, we're used to seeing like a full horizon of planning or requirements, and that's just not what you get with reorder point planning. So first it can be really, really scary, but this is a great technique to use when you have materials that are relatively low cost, have fairly consistent usage, and are relatively low lead time, like 21 days or less. I'm going to refresh this here and you'll see I now have a purchase requisition and that purchase requisition, because my lot size is replenished to the max stock level or an HB, it's taking me up to 160 pieces, so it's calculating the difference between my current available quantity, which is less than 80 and my replenished to stock level, which is 160, and that is driving how much it's proposing to purchase. Now you may also find you have reasons to use a fixed lot size or a lot for lot with a minimum order quantity or rounding value, but you definitely want to make sure that you have a value in there so that it's taking you up to the appropriate stock level. Now let me show you this other piece, this is the part that's always confusing and that is safety stock. I'm going to add a safety stock to this material and I'm just going to go with the static safety stock here because there's nothing for me to calculate dynamic off of in terms of forward consumption and my reorder point is 80, so I'm going to set my safety stock for 60 pieces. And if this was a material that was on deterministic planning or planning to the demand, that safety stock would drive additional replenishment would make that purchase requisition increase. Watch here though, it's not going to make any difference. You'll notice I now have an exception message. It's my early warning system that says, hey, not only are you below your reorder point, but you're below that number that you said, let me know because if I get below this number, I'm worried I'm not going to get my replenishment in time and I could be at risk of stock out. The safety stock becomes your early warning system, but it does not add to the quantity that you need. So I'm going to go ahead and run MD02 you'll see that there's no change in my procurement proposals as a result of that safety stock and that safety stock could be any value and it's not going to trigger anything additional on this manual reorder point planning without consideration of external requirements. So you'll see that adjustment here, there's nothing that has changed, it has not adjusted in any way based on the safety stock, it is simply giving me the exception message, but very effective to have that exception message as your early warning and help you make you feel much more comfortable in your reorder point calculation. If you're starting to see that a lot, you may need to revisit the reorder point number and then make sure that that item is being replenished on a regular basis and your lead time information is all correct. So that's how the basics of reorder point planning and reorder point planning with the safety stock work. So in summary, we have covered how reorder point planning will allow you to be able to. Decouple and protect materials to position for pull. Focus on materials with shorter lead times, lower dollar values, and a reliable and responsive supplier. And facilitate storage constraints via fill to max strategies. I've used this feature a lot for light replication or proving in a kanban work or managing constrained storage, like tanks or silos. It can be very, very helpful. Thanks Kristie. We consistently find that reorder point planning is underutilized, but it's such an awesome opportunity to let MRP do some of the heavy non-value added work for you. We want to reduce most of our human struggle hours, that's primarily our goal. So if you'd like to know more about other SAP features and functions please check out our video catalog and of course please submit any suggestions or comments below.

Reorder Point and Safety Stock Differences

Learn how Safety Stock and Reorder Point planning work together effectively

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
P2P; DM
MD04; MM02; MD02
Hello supply chain aficionados, Martin here and today, we're on a quest to unlock the hidden treasures within your SAP system. Ready to reveal its full potential? Let's jump right in. In this video, we want to take a deeper dive into the key differences between reorder point and safety stock. Many organizations struggle with where to use each one of these distinct techniques. Today, we strive to bring clarity to the definition and purpose of each. So Monique, what do we need to know about the difference between reorder point and safety stock? Definitely, Martin. Here's the good news. We have two really great techniques in our arsenal. And they can quite happily coexist. In today's demo. We're going to review the definition and application of both techniques. We'll talk a little bit about determining the value because that's one of the key differentiators in how we might think about each. And lastly, we'll highlight the types of exceptions an MRP controller should expect to get when using either or both options. So let's go in and take a look. Okay, so here we are friends. And I'm sure by now if you have watched many other episodes of Reveal TV, you know we're jumping right into SAP to get the party started. This is the stock requirements list. This is where an MRP controller lives. It is our news feed so we have what we need to manage the day. And as we can see here, what we need is to replenish our safety stock. We have a number of videos that speak to safety stock, but what we are discussing today is the difference between a safety stock and a reorder point. A safety stock is meant to protect against variability and volatility in demand. It needs to be reasonable to the volume we're expecting to sell and protect us against normal fluctuations. It is not meant to cover the outliers that happen once in a blue moon and we should only be dipping into it every now and again. A good safety stock is regularly reviewed and is not chosen in isolation. It needs to be a conversation with your counterparts and woven into your overall inventory plan and demand program. It's about how much additional coverage you want and over what period of time that needs to be covered and it can be static or dynamic. In this example, we're looking at static safety stock. Now let's go to the material with the reorder point attached to it. This material is now on a reorder point type that is manual with external requirements. If that's Greek to you, don't worry, we've got you and we'll explore that detail in another video. The purpose of a reorder point is that it becomes the mechanism for reordering. When I hit this number here, MRP is going to trigger replenishment. The makeup of the reorder point is based on the lead time of the product, includes any safety buffer, and either does or does not include external requirements. You may not have known you have options here. A lot of folk avoid reorder point planning because of the limited visibility, but know you truly have options. My friend Sean will tell you about that in another video. Now, the quantity for replenishment will be influenced by the lot size key and any other lot size information that influences quantity. Reorder point items are generally lower value items with shorter lead times and are sometimes space constrained as well. So here's what I want to do next. I want to add a safety stock back to this item so you can see how reorder points and safety stocks can work together. That's right, they are distinctly techniques that work together. But here's the thing, the safety stock is there as an alert only. It is a warning to us. Danger, Will Robinson. You are depleting that inventory faster than expected. You may need to expedite. And oh, by the way, if that's happening a lot, it's time to understand why and then come up with a plan to address any performance issues and logistics or at the supplier, confirmed orders are going out the door as expected, and there is not a process hiccup in planning. And where necessary, adjust the reorder point. They do require regular care and feeding. There is no set it and forget it here. And the good news is that SAP will not allow it, it's going to let us know, just like setting the safety stock, the reorder point is something that directly impacts your inventory plan. Okay, so now that the safety stock is set, let's run MRP. Here's the result page and you'll see nothing has changed. Now let's go back to the stock requirements list. See our safety stock? While it is driving an exception message, it's not driving replenishment. In reorder point planning, the safety stock is a warning system. It is always lower than the reorder point and is there to alert us when we need to hustle, intervene, review, or correct. Alrighty, everyone. Let me just highlight a few things before we end our conversation today. First, it's important to appreciate the distinction in definition and use case between the two techniques so we can deploy the techniques in the most effective way. This is important because they are both valuable and have a place in the toolkit. Lastly, I want to leave you with this. As I've explored new tools over the years, I've found that shifting from the theoretical to the practical speeds the journey along. So give it a try, and refine as you check your planning results. You are in control and that in itself is empowering. Thank you, Monique. I think it's a great call out, though, that when we're trying to solve big problems like this and try to help understand the differences between certain topics, it's good that we get together like this and actually share ideas and experiences with each other. That way, we get to the best solution. So, folks, if you want to know more about this topic or other related videos, please check out our catalog, and of course, if you have some suggestions for specific topics related to these or any others, feel free to submit it below.

Reorganizing That Forecast

Discover essential tools and tips to keep your forecast organized and precise

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; PTM; P2P
MD04; MD62; MD74; MD73
Hi there folks, Martin here and welcome to the only video series where you get to unlock the secrets and reveal the hidden magic behind your SAP system. Intrigued? Okay, let's stick around. Let's get into this. We're going to talk about a very important maintenance step that is part of the care and feeding that supports a healthy demand management program in SAP. The step is called reorganizing the forecast and this activity helps to keep the demand signal clean, clear, and under control. Steven, reorganizing a forecast is a really tough subject. Take it away and tell us more about it. I certainly can. We can all appreciate how challenging it can be to produce a reliable forecast. Particularly, to be the humans who manage that process. The forecast can be off in two ways, time and or quantity. There are a variety of tools in the toolkit to help manage this. One of them is by reorganizing the forecast on a regular cadence. It helps to address when we want to drop, keep, or roll forward the remaining forecast to sell into a future period. Reorganizing the forecast addresses the former, and today we'll look at some options. It's important to synchronize the watches, make sure this cleanup activity aligns well with your S&OP calendar. Let's venture in and take a look. To keep or not to keep? This is the question. Let's dive right in and take a look at this material in our stock requirements list. We can see here that we have an ongoing forecast that goes out in weekly buckets for the next three periods, and we can observe that the forecast goes back to the beginning of the month of April. We're midway through the month and then in monthly buckets for, let's scroll, 15 months after that. This allows for a total visibility horizon of 18 months. Now some of you may see your planned independent requirements. The MRP element that represents the consensus demand plan or the forecast that's been released for execution. Those PIRs might be neither weekly or monthly buckets and stay at that level for the full horizon. SAP is happy to take daily, weekly, or monthly buckets and is fine with mixing horizons. So you can differentiate where it matters most. Let's say, for example, you were managing a specific promotion, event, or planogram. You might enter a forecast for a very specific period of time and also give it its own requirement plan number. You'd watch that very carefully, and then as the orders came in, check to make sure the orders match the expected quantity. When the orders are all in, you might then go in and remove any unused balance because you know that temporary specific need demand was now fully received. How do you maintain that? Well, you may have an advanced planning solution where the reconciliation will happen and the reduced values will be loaded into SAP as a change. Or, you might maintain it manually, like we're showing here. Double clicking on the forecast line to be cleaned up. Then going into MD62 to lower the quantity to what has been received. But what happens if you have a lot to work through? Well, you might want to put SAP to work and reorganize that forecast. Let's head there now. We can see here that we have some nice, healthy selection criteria. We can choose a plant or multiple plants, material or multiple materials, and then get far more specific. In this case, we're going to specify the requirement plan number, and I'll go ahead and specify the key date. Please note the text here on the screen around for plants without a reorganization period. Because this is key for regular maintenance. And we'll revisit that option here in a moment. Now one of the things I really enjoy about this activity is we can run it in test mode. Let's do that so we can see the results. We can see here that we have some allocated quantities. These are the quantities that are soft pegged to the forecast as pending consumption. We will have SAP net to those quantities and not below so we can keep the demand pegged to the period it was planned for. When we take off test mode, it's going to go ahead and clean these up. So back to our original question, to keep or not to keep? As a part of our monthly S&OP cycle, we need to evaluate what we want to keep, leave open, or roll over, and in this consideration, we also need to think about our consumption modes and the number of days for both forward or backwards. We also don't want to have outdated forecasts hanging out getting old and moldy. Here are a few things to consider. First, set your conversation around drop or roll forward to occur as you go into the third week of the month. If we're rolling forward, the volume gets added to the next period or the period we expect it to come in if we have new information. Second, consider breaking your forecast down into weekly buckets and running the reorganization as a regularly scheduled batch job, dropping a week at a time instead of an entire month. And again, work this in conjunction with your consumption mode and period. Third, think about the communication and collaboration opportunities when transitioning from S&OP to S&OE to keep everyone aligned and moving in the right direction. We have the tools to make this easier. Fantastic! Now let's review some highlights. Reorganizing your forecast on a set cadence can help relieve that feeling of a monthly reset. It's that sentiment of a big change at the beginning of each month when the forecast drops. When this activity is synced well with the S&OP cycle, the changes become more predictable and can even be taken in bite sized adjustments throughout the month. Lastly, we like to keep the planning clean in SAP, and this particular tool helps to maintain a clean sweep so we know exactly where we are and what we're aiming for. Thanks Steven. Maintenance is very important to a healthy system. No one wants to waste precious time and resources working on an incomplete, overstated and outdated plan where we can help it. Great tips today. Thanks again. Team, if you want to know more about forecasting and other related topics, please check out our catalog. And of course, as always, submit your questions below.

Request Quotes or Proposals

Simplify proposal and quote procurement with RFP and RFQ management

11 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Contract & Supplier Management
P2P; PM
ME39; ME41; ME42
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin, and in this video we are going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's request for quotes or proposals capability. The RFQ process in SAP allows the buyer to solicit bids from multiple suppliers and centralize that data collection right in SAP. It's a widely underutilized feature that when use correctly promotes flow through the procurement process and allows us to make strides in strategically managing our spend. Kristie, tell us more about this underutilized feature called RFQ. I would love to tell you more. Request for quotes or proposals is a powerful feature when used correctly and in this demonstration I'm going to focus on just three things. First, where this highly underutilized feature lives in SAP. Second, the basic structure of the process. And third, the advantages via integration of facilitating this process directly in SAP. All right, let's talk request for quotes in SAP. So a lot of us are not using this functionality, in fact very rarely do we see people going out and doing RFQ's. They may be doing it for some things around large commercial projects, capital buys, services sometimes. But even then, it's really lightly used and almost never do we actually see people using this for things that are actually inventory materials. And so I want to go through today and highlight what this actually looks like and some of the capabilities, and I'll tell you if you're in S/4 and you have Fiori, there's a lot of additional, cool stuff in that they've really reorganized how the data flow works in terms of how it's presented to you and when you try to do things like go in and rank your suppliers and do comparisons, you've got a lot of nice analytical features in the way that that's going to present information to you and how you actually select which supplier you want to award. So you have that to look forward to and we will do a video specifically on that to give you more of the flavor there. But I did want to just mention it because it gets, it gets pretty cool. I'm going to click on materials management here and go into purchasing, so then this is all going to be pretty familiar to us. So we've got our purchase orders information, we've got our purchase requisitions and our outline agreements, all those transaction codes down below that, hopefully we're using all three. Down below that we have our RFQ or quotation information. So I'm going to go ahead and open that up, this is where we do all of the RFQ and quotation work. And you'll see here we have two different folders, so, request for quotation is the actual RFQ and that process flow quotation is actually working through and managing those results as they're coming back in from the suppliers and being able to do that comparison and ranking so that you can make a decision on who you would like to award to. And it's really nice that you can compare multiple suppliers directly in SAP so you can make that determination. But let's go into the request for quota and I'll come in here and I'll show you what the beginning screen looks like for creation but then I'm going to actually go in and show you one that has already been started, so you can get an idea of what it looks like once you've got it going. So first of all, RFQ type it's going to be AN, it's going to be standard for you, language key is EN so if you want to present this in English, or you can set another language key just like you would on a purchase order, so that you're getting that translation if necessary. You've got your RFQ date, so the date that you're actually going to issue the RFQ, and then the quotation deadline. So when they need to have it back. If you have an internal reference for the RFQ number and you've allowed for that in your configuration, you can enter it. Otherwise, the system is just going to generate that document number for you, just like it would for a purchase requisition or purchase order. Mandatory, you're going to need to enter your purchase organization and your purchasing group, and then down below if you'd like to default any information in across all the line items on this request for quotation, you can enter these in and that will go ahead and add them appropriately for you. Now what's most exciting though, and where I really wanted to draw your attention is this. So first of all, if you have something where you are periodically quoting, so you need to send an RFQ out, and then you've got reasons why you need to quote that on a periodic basis, once a quarter, biannually annually, every 24 months, whatever the case may be, you can actually copy a prior RFQ and bring that over all the information so that you can send it out. If you're sending RFQs out to separate suppliers and you want to be able to copy and send a unique document to each supplier, you can do that here. The other thing that you can do is if you have a purchase requisition that's been submitted into your procurement department, and you need to convert that into an RFQ, you can do that and it will inherit all the information that's already been entered into the purchase requisition that's relevant for the quotation process. And then lastly, and I think is very exciting is you're able to actually do this from an outline agreement. So let's say that you have a contract or a scheduling agreement that is up for renewal, it's coming to the end of its validity period, you can go out and quote it by copying in a lot of that information directly into the RFQ. So that's super nice and that really helps that periodic flow and I think also if you're looking for a use case, for me, if I'm thinking about some of the challenges of working through those documents that should have very clear validity periods, this is one of the ways to help accommodate that whenever it is that we need to go out and we want to rebid or want to create a more competitive environment and go across a couple of different suupliers. So let me back out here and what we're going to do is we're actually going to go in now and take a look at one that is in flight and go in here, and I just want to give you a little bit of a better idea of what the bones look like once you're inside. So you'll see it looks very similar to a number of our other purchasing documents. So requisitions or even setting up the header level or item level of your scheduling agreements before you get into the delivery schedule. So you'll maintain a item category of appropriate, your material number if it is a material, and then if not, your free text will go into the short text field, which will be the description for what it is that you're looking for. You'll maintain your quantity and your unit of measure, your anticipated delivery date, and then any other information around material groups, plant storage, locations, or text, so you can maintain and attach different texts and information here to make it easy for your suppliers to understand what it is that they're quoting and actually go through the quotation process. And from here we can actually go in and start to look at a few other things. So you can attach a release strategy, so you want to prepare your quotation, but then you would actually like to have somebody review it before it goes out. You're able to invoke that release strategy here. You can come in here and you can actually set up the details around this item. So you've got your RFQ quantity. If you had different deadlines across the different items on the RFQ, you can set those up here, and then you can also set up any reminders to remind your suppliers of when this is due so that you're sending that information out to them on a regular basis. If your supplier has their own material number, you can maintain that reference here, and then if it's attached to a particular quotation or line item, you can also enter that information. In addition, you also have additional data, and so this is where you can maintain anything that is specific to how this item should be delivered to you. So something like planned delivery time, if you have specifics around weights and dims that might be helpful for the supplier, you can maintain that here as well as anything around any type of incoterms or any other things that you would want to negotiate in terms of how they're going to perceive this. And as you're tracking through your entire process end to end from RFQ all the way through the actual procurement cycle with final procurement document, then you can also maintain other information here that would help with that. So if you're maintaining the same batch number for example, and you want that to flow all the way through and you have a specific batch that's required, you can maintain that information. In addition to that, you can also associate a delivery schedule with your RFQ. So you're able to go in and and set that up across time. Now, generally speaking, you're not going to do that you're more than likely going to let MRP go ahead and provide that but if your supplier needs to see a rough forecast for what those volumes look like across time, in order to be able to produce that quote for you so you can see how the volume is broken down, then you have that capability. Most of the time you're going to be doing something like a validity period with an overall target quantity but in the cases where you have special commodity types or special services rendered where you need to be able to see that information in more detail, you are able to maintain that here. Okay, now lastly, and the one other thing I wanted to show you is just if we come in and we look at the kinds of selection you have in terms of ranking for being able to review your results, you can actually bring in results from several different suppliers and we'll go into the quotation segment here, and you can come in here to do price comparison and that is going to be under ME49, that's going to be the transaction code, and you can see here, you can bring in specific quotation numbers, you can bring in a collective RFQ if you've got multiple out there that you're trying to combine together, and you're able to come in and decide how you would like to see that ranking occur. So you can go through and review the different options so you can come in and take a look at what you want to include. So if you've got discounts or delivery costs, if you need to do any type of price calculation or determination in order to be able to see that landed cost, you're able to do that, and then it will come up with a simple ranking list and you can make your selection to be able to award that to your supplier. So very helpful in terms of being able to search and bring that information in and go through the process and we'll do another video around what it looks like to do that comparison in Fiori so that you can see how this process has continued to evolve and some of the new tools that are available. So, RFQ is very useful and you can see that they can fully integrate into your process if you think about your periodic reviews, trying to create that competitive environment without having to come up with a new document, being able to copy over, being able to reference contracts or outline agreements in order to be able to send those bids out and then be able to compare multiple suppliers to determine how you'd like to place that volume. So in summary, we have covered how requests for quotes or proposals allows you to be able to. Send requests and consolidate responses from suppliers all under one central document. Move from the RFQ stage through purchase and treat this as an integrated function positioned for pull. And lastly, supports reporting that is ripe for evaluation, especially when it comes to monitoring and managing supplier performance and figuring out how we can best set our partners up for success. Thanks Kristie. Using this feature automates and streamlines the procurement process, reducing the time and effort required to manage the process manually. Getting our procurement cycle started on the right foot pays dividends back to the organization over time. If you want to learn more about this feature and other features in SAP please feel free to check out our video log and of course if you have any specific questions or comments, please submit then below.

Rescheduling: Analyzing Results

Guide to analyzing and understanding results

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
Order Fulfillment & ATP
SD
V_V2
The best way to learn is by doing and welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Martin here, and in this video we're going to focus on analyzing the results of SAP's rescheduling tool. This powerful feature in SAP keeps sales order confirmations in alignment with updated availability based on go to market strategies, prioritizations and rules. With great power comes great responsibility. So Kristie, tell us a little bit about how do we actually apply these rescheduling tools and make sure that we can keep our promises. Well, Martin, it's actually pretty neat. When the rescheduling results are in, we can go in and see which orders improved, which ones declined, and which were unaffected. We can also navigate directly into the sales order and review more details there. The best part is that when we run rescheduling like this, interactively and in simulation mode, we gain a deeper understanding of what's happening and why, and we can validate the results. Are our rules working? Let's dive in and check it out. All right, so we're back in here taking a look at rescheduling. And again, this is something that may be running in the background for you. You're not even aware of it and you may or may not have access to it. First things first, I always recommend using this tool carefully and is an exception management tool, meaning you're really in here using this in an interactive fashion using simulations so you can go through and review the results and really making sure that you're fine tuning the way that you're placing your inventory onto your order. So this is really all about making the best match between the inventory that is available or coming available soon and is part of your ATP scope of check. And in marriage with how it is that you want to serve the customer or the market overall. So this is a very strategic tool and it's very tied to the way that you want to represent your products or services. So one of the things that we want to do here is once we've run it is we want to learn how to go in and analyze the results. Now we could spend days on this topic but what I'm going to do is just give you just a little basic orientation, so if this is running in the background, maybe being able to go in and take a look and see how it's prioritizing. I'm going to go ahead and just run it for one material and what this is going to do is this is going to pick all the sales orders that are out there that have this material on it and it's going to bring all the line items back, right? It's going to go through and evaluate the entire sales order. And I'm going to go ahead and I'm going to choose this guy right here, which we've been working on in a bunch of the video series, and I'm going to go ahead and click execute. Now this is running, it's running in simulation mode and you can see here it has brought back some results for me for this particular item. So this is P-110 and it's grabbed the sales orders that currently have unconfirmed quantities on them. Meaning we haven't been able to completely fulfill them, so these are the ones that need love and attention. And you can see here, this is the order quantity, so you're always going to see that first, this is the line item, sales document, line item, here's the quantity, and then this is the old date. You can see this guy is really, really, really old. And this is going to be the date that we have the first schedule line. So the promise date that we were able to give our last committed promise was on the 22nd of December, and we were able to confirm for 12 pieces. Now we have some new dates, we actually are able to improve this a little bit. If the customer is willing to take 2 shipments, we can actually get them 8 pieces on the 11th of December, so that's an improvement, and 4 pieces on the 22nd. Now, that means that this allows partial deliveries, our master data tells the system that that's okay, and so that's what it's proposing. So this is also a good example of needing to make sure that your rules are in a good spot, and we are able to be able to facilitate it. Now, some of you may be very lucky and you may have the ability to present this in an ALV grid, in which case you get some nice color coding that shows you either in pink or green what has improved or deteriorated. You can see that the reason we're able to get this improvement here is actually because we had some inventory that was previously confirmed against this particular sales order, and we have actually taken it away and reapplied it. So now we're actually moving these confirmations out. So these have gotten a little bit worse and they moved out to the 18th of December. So the system's gone through and it's reprioritized all of this information to try to give us some better dates here based on the priority or the rules that we have given it and this may be based on the date that the order was entered or the earliest schedule line date. It could be based on document number. It could be based on delivery priority. So, all other things being equal who has the better delivery priority? Who's supposed to get this first? And that might be based on the customer, or the region, or the tier of the market, or the industry, or any number of things that would help us. But yeah, this is the way you read it, so this is kind of learning to read through the top here. All of these different header rows which correspond to the different line items that you're seeing. And from here I can do a variety of things, I can actually go right into the sales order so I can double click on it. I can go to change documents. I can also navigate to VA05 to take a look and see what the sales order list looks like. And if I want to focus on improvements, I can click this button and it's going to show me just the improvements. And if I want to focus on the deterioration, I can click this and I'll see just the items that were deteriorated. So I've got the ability to come in here and really focus. So I may have a really large list that I'm working through and that will allow me to go in and take a look. Just a couple of other things here in terms of what is available to you up in the menu, because you're really able to go through and take a look. You can come in here and then say, go back to complete. Take you see back to the complete list, under edit, you can see that you can actually go in and take a look at the change document or any errors that were associated with the run, you can then go to environment and it will take you directly into the list of sales orders. So lots of things and places that you can navigate to from here, but really what you want to pay attention to is whether you like the results or not. So in this case I maybe don't like these results, and I'm not satisfied, with what it is that we're seeing here. So I may go back and say, nope, I don't want to apply that, or I want to change my rules, I think that it's not doing what I want it to do. It's not thinking about it the way I would want to think about it. So I want to go in and actually make an adjustment here. And you're able to do that. And again, you can run this for many materials at the same time, or you can run it wide open, just depends on what your rules are. Bear in mind though, if you have a material that is on delivery complete order, that as you go through and you rerun this, it could push the dates for the entire order as you're going through and making that change. So just make sure that you've got eyes on that, and you're really paying attention. But this is a great tool for making sure that your strategy is executed the way that you would like it to, and also for ensuring that as more inventory is available through that ATP scope of check, whether that is inventory that is incoming through scheduled production, or for stock transfer orders, or from procurement, or whether that inventory is restricted purely to what you physically have on hand, or in quality inspection, or your safety stock. As there's more quantity available, this is allowing you to rematch that supply and demand together in order to be able to make the best use of that inventory, okay? And if you don't want it to reschedule, then you're going to set your fixed date and quantity flag. There are some power and responsibility pieces that go with that as well. So if you're interested in that, we have another video around fixed date and quantity. So this is just a little teeny tiny taste of what's available in the rescheduling. If you've ever been wondering what's happening in the background, again, it's all about the strategy. So take a look at the strategy video to walk you through that. Give you a few ideas on how you prioritize, but you can go right back out, rerun this, and reprioritize that strategy to see what the results would be. It might help you to fine tune overall, but really encourage you to run this in interactive mode. Run it with the simulation turned on, see if you like it, and then make decisions based on that information. Really make sure you go through and understand. You know what, Martin? This topic is so deep, we could spend hours on it. Let me summarize what we've just walked through. The rules that govern rescheduling. Please see our other rescheduling content for more on this topic. We need to be very carefully thought through. The purpose of rescheduling is to make the best use of our available supply. So we want to make sure SAP is thinking a little bit more like we do. But we know that we will always need to take a look and refine. So running an interactive simulation lets us verify the results, adjust our rules, and understand the why and what SAP is doing. Pretty cool. Wow, that is actually pretty cool, Kristie. Thank you. I like the notion of spending the time up front to understand and adjust the rules, and continue to refine until satisfied with the results. A lot of times people think of engines like rescheduling as a something of a black box, but spending some time with the results and the interaction with the information takes a lot of the mystery away and builds confidence. So folks, if you want to know more about this topic or other standard SAP functionality please feel free to check out the videos above and if you have a question submit it below.

Rescheduling: It's All About Strategy

Replicating service/Inventory strategies in SAP explained

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
Order Fulfillment & ATP
SD
V_V2
Hey, folks, the best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value. My name is Martin, and I want to focus on this video specifically on SAP's rescheduling tool. This is a great example of a rules based engine that is often underutilized and rarely optimized. It's meant to support the strategy of how we want to prioritize customer accounts, regions, tiers, and other go to market strategies. So Kristie, I know this is a massive topic, feel free to shed some light for us. Well, it's hard to know where to start here. I'm just kidding. We should start with the rules set. This is where we set our strategy in place. Now, the strategy and all the different ways we might think about it is a very deep into the pool situation. But what I'm going to do today is introduce everyone to some of the levers and toggles that can help us to dial in the results. Let's jump in and take a look at a few of the key settings. Okay. Big topic. Let's see if we can just get a little bit of information to get started. So this is rescheduling, it's V as in Victor underscore V as in Victor, 2. Very powerful transaction. Many of you may not have access to it, and oftentimes it's actually running in the background and you may not even be aware of it. But it is one of the most strategically oriented, sales order management tools that we have, and it is immensely powerful because it controls how we apply inventory to the sales order in conjunction with our ATP rules. So how we determine that scope of check and the particular checking rule for that particular stage in the sales order process. Okay, so this is really for sales orders and stock transfer orders, and it could include other documents that are part of your ATP check. You have the option to control it by material, and certainly when you are getting started with availability checking, and you're getting started with how to work through getting inventory onto your sales orders as more inventory becomes available or enters into that ATP check, so whether it's scheduled production or confirmed product in transfer or inventory or quality inspection or safety stock, wherever you are in your ATP journey. Every day as things happen and more inventory becomes available, you need a mechanism to help you to manage through those backorder situations where it wasn't able to confirm immediately, or in cases where you're trying to continuously improve those dates. And so this is the strategic tool for doing that and there is a lot to it. We could talk for days on this topic but let me give you just a brief overview and plant some seeds in terms of the types of things that you would want to think about. So first of all, you can run this by material. That is really important to know. Now when you select it by material, you're working all of the sales orders related to that material. So, all of those sales orders are going to go through, all of the availability situation for those items unless there's a fixed state and quantity flag set, are going to be re evaluated and you're going to work on trying to improve your delivery situation or availability situation for those sales documents as a whole. Now we also have the opportunity to include our stock transfers. So if promising to your sister facilities is very important to you, if you're conducting ATP checks on your stock transfers, which you do want to consider doing that as you start to get more mature with your availability checking process, because otherwise those documents get left behind. And then you have the opportunity to choose whether you're going to look at that at the line item level or at the schedule line level. So depending on if you're taking multiple shipments against those different transfer documents and what the kind of promising is that you're looking to do for them. So prioritizing either at the item level or the schedule line level. And then this next tick box is really important. This is around, do you want to look at Unconfirmed documents only, so basically saying I want to leave the things that are fully confirmed and happy alone and I'm going to look at things that are unconfirmed and bring them through and then lastly am I going to use a simulation so I can interact, which is highly recommended as you're getting started and you're trying to understand what this rule set does. Now, down here is really the big chunk of our rules. So, we want to prioritize how the system is going to bring these results back to us. So, are we going to prioritize the document category? So, what kind of sales document is this? Am I prioritizing sales documents first or stock transfer documents? So, facilitate, maybe you have product that's used in manufacturing and it's used at a sister facility, you've got a vertically oriented supply chain and it's also sold out the door to the customer, then maybe stock transfers become more important. It really just depends on the nature of your business, and these are all very important decisions to make. The next one is, where does delivery priority fit in? So if you have customer tiering, or you have regional priorities, where it's most important that you have good market representation across all the regions that you supply into. There could be any number of strategies for how you set your delivery priority. Maybe that is the most important thing, and then we go on from there. It could be by date, so it might be the date of creation, or it might be the date of the earliest schedule line. So a lot of times folks are doing this exclusively by date of creation, and one of the big conversations we have is around considering the use of the date of earliest schedule line. And it really depends on the overall hygiene of your sales order documents and how you view the promises that you're making to your customer. Then we have some considerations for document number and document item. So these again become kind of the tiebreaker. So assuming your document number, maybe the different number ranges have different meanings to you. Perhaps your document numbers is indicative of your oldest order, you always want to make sure that you are handling that first. Remember that you also have the sort by date of creation. So really, this delivery priority and the date piece, whether it's date of creation or earliest schedule line, oftentimes become the most overlooked and the most important pieces of information that we want to go after. And so it's really important for us to go through and set these priorities in place so that we know how to sort the documents and then that's the sequence in which we would conduct the availability check in order to try to get the best service to the customer. And by the way, this 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 is not necessarily how we would envision setting this up. You really have to go through and have some robust conversations and really think through how you would like to service the customer. It's not as simple as just going and choosing the top radio button and sending it 1 through 5. These are really important conversations around how you want the system to prioritize this. And if this is happening purely for you in the background, if it's happening multiple times a day, remember that when you run this, it's almost like shuffling the deck, right? It's going to go through and reapply all this stuff. So if you're in there and you're interacting with the sales order and you go through and maybe your customer service or your sales support team says , hey, I keep going in and setting this and then it keeps happening and it's shuffled and it's different from what I was expecting. Check to see if rescheduling is running in the background, it may be prioritizing things in a very different way from how you're going about it. And it's really important to go through and have those conversations and set this in place. This is usually a lot of effort to get this right, it's a lot of discussing where you want to go strategically, how you want to represent to the market , to your different customers, and ultimately this is a big question about how you want to serve overall. So in summary, we've reviewed. Some of the key decisions that drive the rules that then drive this rescheduling engine. We've talked about timing and cadence, and perhaps most importantly, that this is not a set it and forget it rule set. As the business changes and as our strategy evolves, we need to continue to revisit the rules and monitor the results to make sure that we're getting the best use of our inventory to meet our strategy. Thanks Kristie. Once again a big topic for sure. So the question that comes to mind is who do we want to be to the marketplace you serve? I think rescheduling really works best when we have clarity around articulating that answer. So again folks, if you want to learn more about this topic and others check out the rest of our video catalog and if you have a burning question please submit it below.

Return Inventory from Outbound Delivery

A step-by-step guide about how to return stock from a picked delivery

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LTOG; VL03N; LS24; LT24; LT21; LL01
The best way to learn is by doing so welcome to the video service that reveals and unlocks the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin and in this video we're going to focus on returning inventory back to the warehouse that was already picked via an outbound delivery. Steve, that sounds a little bit like an oopsie feature. Where can you potentially correct a mistake or still have a chance to save a potential return before materials officially go out the door? Am I correct? It's hard for me to admit, Martin, but you're right. After a transfer order has already been confirmed to an outbound delivery. You still have the ability to reverse it before it gets post goods issued to the customer. This is helpful and can be used for a variety of reasons, such as if a material is damaged, if the customer changed their mind at the last minute, etc. So let's jump into SAP, where I'll demonstrate how to use this tool, which can almost make you go back in time. The first thing we'll do when returning inventory from an outbound delivery, is we'll jump straight into the warehouse activity monitor, we'll just identify a delivery that's out there for an example. So you can see I have one critical delivery, I'll double click, go into that delivery, it's showing that this has exceeded its time parameter. So I'm going to double click to drill in again, we'll take a look at the status overview to really tell us what's going on. What returning or T code LT0G will do is anytime that a delivery has been picked, this WM status represented in this delivery would be a C or a complete. If it's A, there's the picking where the TOs have not been generated, partially means that the TOs could be created, but not confirmed, so that's really the difference here, so for this outbound delivery, what we'll do is we'll go ahead and we'll go and generate the transfer orders. So I'm going to go ahead and just create these TOs in the background for this delivery. You can see the triangle or the status bar then changed to a yellow. So we'll go in there and we will actually confirm those TOs now. We'll go and look at LT24, just to double check, we know that material was a 100-300, I'm going to go and look for only open TOs and you can see here's my one for this outbound delivery in there. So there's a few different ways you can do this, I'm going to go ahead to my Transfer Order tab and I'm going to, we'll just confirm this in the background and boom, that TO has been confirmed. If I go back to my delivery if I back all the way out here, go back in, there shouldn't be anything there and then my status on my delivery should be picked. So if I went back in there and now you could see my Status Overview the WM status has now been changed to C. If I go to my Picking tab in my delivery, I have a picked quantity now that matches my delivery quantity of 15. Okay, so now this delivery has been picked. We're going to go ahead and reverse that pick, which is what this video is all about. So, we will go to transaction LT0G. LT0G then allows you to go back and return that inventory to stock. So, my delivery already populated there, my warehouse populated. I have a delivery view option, which will take and undo all the TOs for a specific delivery or, you can undo individual TO line items if you need to do that. So, in this case, there's only one line item, we'll just leave that one picked. The movement type will actually control what that movement type is to move it back to stock. So essentially, this is going to undo that status in the delivery and give you options to put it back in stock into the warehouse. So we'll go ahead and execute that and simply all you need to do is select this checkbox, which is calls for that delivery, here's my 15 and if you did the put away in the background, it'll simply just follow the rules that you have in the system and put it right back to this storage type and bin using a 999 reference. Probably the easiest way to go, if you want to go step by step, you have the option to do that in the foreground. So in this case, we just have that selected and we're just going to put away in the background. You could see it turned to green, which means that TO confirmed. Should have put that 15 back into this bin. So let's go ahead and do our double check. We'll go into LS 24, 100-300 already populated, we're going to put in our plant 1000 and boom, now the 15 has been added back to bin 01-01-B1 totaling a quantity of 50. As it followed the addition to stock put away strategy. Welcome back. In this demo we've covered. The use of LT0G and returning materials that have already been confirmed to an outbound delivery. This transaction has personally saved myself and our customers a lot of time and money from preventing reverse logistics. So I hope that you reap some of these same benefits and savings that work for me. Okay, thank you Steve, for sure. This is a good one. This is a great demo and I am absolutely in favor of using this tool to prevent costly reverse logistics. So folks, if you want to learn more about how to save money, use SAP better, please feel free to check out our video service and of course if you have a particular question feel free to submit it below.

Safety Stock Basics

Mastering the essentials of safety stock management

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Procurement & MRP
P2P; PTM
MD04; MM02
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi Martin here, and in this video we're going to focus on the basic setup of SAP safety stock capability. When used correctly, setting and managing safety stock can help organizations maintain stock levels to ensure they have the inventory available to meet customer demand and reduce the likelihood of stock outs. Kristie, this is a feature that can really be misplaced and misunderstood and misused. How about you share a little bit with us? Let me see if I can take some of that risk out Martin. We all know what safety stock is, but let's dig into some of the basic principles of safety stock, which provides a powerful capability when used correctly and in this demonstration, we're going to focus on three primary things. First of all, where do we find the safety stock settings in SAP and what are the different flavors of safety stock that we have available? How does MRP react and respond to safety stock in planning? And a few tips for how we might get this right. All right, let's go take a look at some of these safety stock settings. So you can see here I've gone to the material master, I'm in MM03 because I don't plan on making any changes today, so I'm in display mode and I've gone to the MRP 2 view and then I've scrolled down just a little bit until I got to the bottom where we can see the net requirements calculation. This is where our safety stock settings lie and we talked a little bit about the purpose of safety stock to protect us against volatility and variability. Any types of process breakdowns or variants to plan that safety stock is going to provide us with a cushion. And the other thing to know about the safety stock is that if you think about how inventory gets pulled out or accounted for in our planning safety stock comes right off the top. So it is the highest priority because it means if we are dipping into that inventory that something has gone differently than how we plan. So SAP's going to try to get us to a place where we've are going to replenish that as soon as possible. So it's really important that that safety stock value is really meaningful and that we're getting the performance that we're looking for out it. So you can see here there's three different kinds of time or quantity buffers, and I'm just going to walk you through the settings briefly. There'll be some more videos that go into each of these in detail, but the first one is the static safety stock value, and that's probably what you're used to seeing and you're most familiar with. So this is a value that is either set manually, meaning we looked at the material and analyzed it, looked at future forecasted consumption, past history, how our inventory levels have been performing, and you know, really adapting or adjusting for any volatility or variability in the plan. So we put that value in here. Otherwise we might be going through some sort of safety stock modeling or calculation, or we may be having SAP help us to be able to drive this safety stock value. We want to do that, it's a couple of different complimentary settings, but one of them is a service level percentage. So we set our target service level, we have to go in and set some things around MRP type, other master data settings that are complimentary and a little bit of configuration. With that in place, yes, safety stock can be generated by SAP and that's a question we get asked fairly regularly is, is whether SAP can help us to come up with that value and the answer to that is yes. The next kind of safety stock is down here under this coverage profile, so range of coverage or dynamic safety stock and what this does is it allows us to set a target value for how many days on hand we would like to maintain and then it also lets us set a range for what we would like to consider to develop that target value. So we want to come up with an average day's usage, that ADU calculation, and then that allows us to set up a profile that says something like, hey, I'd like to have five days on hand, that's my target. I'd like that to be based on looking out over a horizon of X number of days or weeks, calculate my average daily usage, and then continue to update this. So where our static safety stock values require us to do regular reviews on a cadence to ensure that we've got the correct static values set for that material. The range of coverage or coverage profile is a little bit more forgiving because it's going to move with that demand signal. So as we're using things or we're changing what that forward looking plan looks like, it's going to handle that and move with it. Now, the downside of range of coverage or coverage profiles is that when we do have outliers those big drops or increases in the plan do play out in the way that we're replenishing and so we have to keep an eye on that, and that's going to show up through our exception monitoring to help us understand what's going on there. The last kind of safety stock or flavor of safety stock is a time buffer, and that's called safety time and what this does is, is adjusts when something is needed. So let's say for example, I had 200 pieces that I needed two weeks from now. I could have a safety time in here where it says I want to be covered for an additional week. So instead of that 200 pieces being due in two weeks time, it's actually going to be due in one week's time for the safety time basically gives me an extra week in case something unusual happens. So while safety stock static and range of coverage, or coverage profiles, dynamic, those are for ongoing use. Safety time is really meant to be used for a very specific purpose. So let's say we have a supplier that is struggling, we're working through some transportation issues, you know, ongoing issues at the port, whatever some of those bigger concerns may be in the supply chain, we can use safety time to help offset that. Let's say you had a lead time improvement project with your supplier and they've been struggling to deliver to you, you might have something like my stated lead time is 24 days, that's what I want to have on the purchase order, that's how much time the supplier gets from the date the purchase order is issued until it's received but because that supplier has been underperforming, I'm going to actually have that requirement due in a little bit earlier. So what I actually need in 36 days time, it's going to show the supplier that they have a 24 day lead time, but it's really coming in 12 days early in order to give me that additional buffer. We would want that in there as a temporary measure and we would want to be measuring that and working our way out of it. You also have the option with safety time to consider what you would like to have included in that. So if you look here under your safety time indicator, there are a couple of different options. So it can be for all of your requirements or it can be for just your independent requirements, you're able to set that appropriately in order to be able to buffer serve for some of those constraints. So as we're living in more of a, you know, VUCA world ever increasing, it seems like this is the opportunity for us to help manage through some of that volatility and be in a good position to be able to service the customer. So, three different techniques available to us all located here in your material master under MM02 and we'll start to explore how those impact our planning and some in our future videos. So in summary, we have covered how safety stock will allow you to have. The appropriate shock absorbers in place to weather the storm and protect against variability and volatility. To measure the performance of the inventory and what we're building or holding as it relates to being able to serve our customers, whether they be internal or external. And receive that bat signal when we've dipped below and want to recover before we actually stock out. Thanks Kristie. Using this feature facilitates a supply chain stability and increases our opportunity to deliver on time and in full to our customers without carrying unreasonable amounts of inventory. Very important to review and improve on a regular basis. Okay, so if you'd like to know more about this and other features in the SAP system please feel free to check out our video catalog and of course please submit any questions.

Safety Stock Levels

Determine optimal safety stock levels

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
DM; IBP; P2P; PTM
MC42; MC43; MD04; MM03
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that actually unlocks and reveals a hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin, and in this video we are going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP safety stock level management capability. When used correctly, setting the right safety stock level can help organizations establish more efficient and effective inventory management processes to meet our customer demands, and of course avoid stockouts. This is a foundational feature to manage through volatility and variability. So, Kristie, tell us how we know when you've got the right level of safety. I will do that Martin. Let the healthy debate begin, setting the correct safety stock level has a profound positive impact when set correctly and can cause massive problems when it's not. It must be reviewed regularly and in this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things to help us get it right. First, the options for setting your static safety stock level in SAP. How to evaluate a material safety stock level versus consumption. And how to evaluate whether we are following the signal based on the settings that we have in place. So do we even consider our safety stock as important? So how much safety stock is the right amount? Pretty common question and an ongoing struggle for anyone who is buying or planning to make sure that we have the right amount of inventory to help protect us against variability and volatility while not covering for every possible outlier that could occur. So how do you know if your safety stock is performing or not? So you can see in this case here, I have a material that has 500 pieces in safety stock. Safety stock is priority demand, it's our early warning system, so the moment that we fall below that safety stock level, we are going to get an alert and exception message 96, it's going to tell us that we need to get this resolved as quickly as possible, and it's going to show up as an expedite request in order to be able to get that safety stock back into a good position. So it comes out first. It comes out first before any other demand. So when we place that there, there's a lot of importance that surrounds safety stock. Okay, so we went through principles in another video, but I'll just quickly remind you here where this information sits. So if we double click on the material, it's going to take us into the Material Master and the MRP views. MRP2 is where we're setting that safety stock value. So you can see it sitting right here. So we can either manually calculate this, we can calculate this through any type of third party or offline models and maintain it here. We can have SAP calculate it for us by setting some master data in place around MRP types and enabling the right features in order to be able to generate the safety stock level based on our service level percentage. So there's a lot of different ways for us to get the static value in here, but when we say safety stock, we are talking about a static value. So in this case, the safety stock that has been chosen is 500 pieces. So I'm really curious about how long does 500 pieces last us? And so I'm going to go ahead and just go into period totals here and I'm going to look at kind of, if we look across the month, how much do we use in a month? And you can see here that we use quite a lot, so it's quite variable. So we've got our planned independent requirements and our requirements stacked together represent the total demand for the month. So it looks like we've got between 6 and 7,000 pieces that we are typically moving through and we are setting a safety stock of about 500 pieces. So it's a very tiny safety stock versus what the ongoing requirements are. So that's probably the first thing of note, is that it represents a very small number of days of supply. So the other thing I can look at here is I can look at the historical performance of this, so this is my red line graph, it's looking backwards in time and you can see that we had some stockouts that occurred, right? We don't ever want to see that getting down to zero, but then recently as we came into January there's a significant uptick, right? So we've moved the stock level up and since then, since we did that large goods receipt, we've been sitting at a little bit less than 3,600, that's been our low point so we're way exceeding our safety stock level which should be what we're coming down to and then replenishing above, we're way exceeding that, which is down here in the 500 range. So there's definitely an opportunity to look and see what is going on with the planning situation here. But either way, that 500, if we look at the variability in demand, so if we ignore some of the larger ones and we look at the more normalized variation, we can see that there are swings that are easily three times that amount, that are happening in terms of our demand fall off, so how we're actually issuing inventory out the door. So one other thing that we could do here is we can actually take a look and see what our average daily usage looks like. So let me go ahead and pull us into a transaction that will allow us to see that. And this is already defaulted, so over the last three months how much have we been using? And I'm going to go ahead and pull into this report and it's going to ask me what plant, because I foolishly didn't put it in, so there you go, that's an example of what not to do. Let's put in our plant number here and it's going to be US07, I'm going to go ahead and choose that and then I'm going to go ahead and execute this. And so what this is telling me is it's telling me how much coverage I have right now, so I have 24 days on hand and I'm going to go into double line which is going to give me a little bit more information. And so I can see my average usage per day is 223 pieces, my safety stock is 500, so realistically I'm only holding about two days worth of inventory in that safety stock. So now I should really go through and consider whether that is reasonable and realistic based on the lead time for this product and based on the variability that we're seeing. So not every outlier, but what do those normal deviations look like if we look at the consumption pattern? And then I can also compare this around what we're going to be using in the future so I can run the same report forward looking. So this was MC42. I could also run MC43, and that would tell me my daily usage going forward. That in combination with my lead time would give me a good sanity check to see if that safety stock is doing what we need it to do. And then as I get closer to that safety stock level, as we start to bleed off of some of that excess inventory that we have stocked up now, we can start to evaluate whether that safety stock is performing well for us. So this is a couple of different ways that we can look at that static safety stock value and make sure that we're investing in the right areas and that we have enough on hand to make a meaningful difference because we want to make sure that safety stock is really performing for us. So in summary, we have covered. How setting effective safety stock levels will allow you to have an early warning system when demand pulls ahead of supply. Evaluate on an ongoing basis that safety stock is performing as expected. And to look for opportunities to reduce the investment in our inventory on some materials and increase it in others where we're going to get the most bang for our buck. Thank you, Kristie. I don't think it's possible to overstate the importance of getting this right. Too little and we suffer ongoing misses to our internal and external customers. Too much and we reduce the flexibility by committing unnecessary resources, time, labor, materials, space, and of course working capital, which reduces our flexibility and overall success. Okay, so if you'd like to know more about safety stock, safety stock levels, and other MRP settings and just general SAP features and functions please check out our video catalog and if you have any questions specifically related to any of these please feel free to submit them below.

Scaled Pricing

Effective management of contractual price breaks with suppliers

10 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Procurement & MRP
P2P
MD04; ME22N; ME32K
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi Martin here, and in this video we're going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's scaled pricing capability. When used correctly scaled pricing can help organizations to replicate price breaks from their suppliers into SAP. It improves data quality and flow of information and it reduces the opportunity for errors. Kristie, I know this is a topic you like, tell us more. I would love to Martin. Scaled pricing is a powerful feature when used correctly and in this demonstration I'm going to focus on three primary things. First of all, our options for where we can maintain pricing scales. Second, how they differ from the MOQ rounding values that we are using to drive MRP. And lastly, how the price scales activate in our purchasing document. Scaled pricing is an underutilized feature in SAP and there are a lot more options for how to integrate them into your overall strategy than what a lot of folks might think of right out of the gate. So let's dive in and see what some of those options are. Okay, let's go in and take a look at price scales. So one thing I want to say before we dig into what this looks like in SAP is just to remember, that your price breaks and your lot sizing techniques and your minimum order quantities and your rounding values are related, but they are not the same thing. Oftentimes price scales are not reflected in the system, and that's because we don't think that SAP can handle the logic for how we have our pricing set up, and so what we end up doing is we just say, okay, this is the economic order quantity, I'm going to have all my planning work to this quantity, and the problem is that as your demand changes or business conditions change, what you might perceive as a good price break may not be the best in terms of your total cost of ownership. And so what you really want to do is you want to have price breaks in the system to be able to take advantage of those cost breaks, but have your minimum order quantity be your legitimate minimum order quantity and then think about the lot sizing techniques in the rounding values that work with how you're logistically moving product, how often you're placing your orders, how long you want to cover in terms of days, weeks, or months, with that particular order, and then let your price breaks work independent from that so as you're actually going in and you're creating your purchasing documents, you're grouping materials, or you're grouping quantities together over a period of time and allowing you to take advantage of those different cost breaks. So we can set up scaled pricing in a variety of ways and today I'm going to show you the simplest which is just a quantity scale, and you're able to set this up most commonly in your purchase info record, also in outline agreements, so things like your contracts, which is what we're showing today, or a scheduling agreement as well. And all of our price conditions will have very specific validity periods associated with them, and that's very importnat, and we're going to go in and we're going to actually adjust this guy right here. So I'm going to go ahead and click on this line and then I'm going to go to price conditions and anytime I am adjusting my price conditions I do want to create a new validity period for that. This one is already reflecting today's date, so we are good to go, you don't want to overwrite you always want to create a new one. Okay, and I'm going to go ahead and select this line, now to get to scales you can see I've got a tick box right here that means that there are quantity scales that are out there and available to either add or adjust those, I'm going to click on the scale button, I could also have gone to go to and then added scales in, and I'm going to actually go in and set up my price breaks here. So you can see I've already decided I'm doing a quantity scale and I'm going to come in and make some adjustments. So if I buy one piece, one piece is going to give me a $45 price. Let's say I buy 40 pieces, and that's going to take me down to $40, and let's say I buy 80 pieces, and that is going to take me down to $35. Now most often with our quantity scales, those are going to be related to reducing the amount of setups or changeovers and might be related to some of the logistics costs, like freight is built into our piece price and it's not a separate item. All of those kinds of one time charges that are related to our procurement, that's where we're most commonly going to see the strongest price breaks. Now, sometimes that's also just a function of getting a better deal based on quantity, but a lot of times it's tied into the actual manufacturing process. We want to think through that and use that as a negotiation technique. Now this is a quantity scale, which is the simplest form of scaling, but you can see in here there's a ton of different options, and this is the tip of the iceberg in terms of how we can actually develop our pricing in order to get the right price onto our documents. But you can see we can do quantity or value. We can even do things by weight or size. So as you're thinking through logistics, you can also see that you've got things around periodic, so, days, weeks, those kinds of things, distance, there's a lot of different options here in terms of how we can set that up. And this is, again, tip of the iceberg in terms of how we can actually determine what that price should be. So once I have this in here, I'm going to go ahead and hit save, and then I always, always want to just double check. So I'm going to pop right back in, I'm going to select my line item, I'm going to go back to my price conditions and I'm just going to just triple check and make sure that everything looks the way that I'm expecting it to. Go right back into my scales and I can see here all of my different price techniques. So this is great. Now I know that I've got some conditions set up, and so anytime I am issuing a purchase order that is tied to this contract, I am going to see those price conditions are going to be honored as a part of that process. So let's actually go through and let's try to convert one of our purchase requisitions to a purchase order. So go back to the main menu I'm going to go to MD04, this is the best place for me to see what is happening from a planning perspective, refresh, and I'm going to go ahead and try to convert this purchase requisition into a purchase order and we will see how we are looking. ​ Okay. It's one of my favorite things to do in SAP, I get to go shopping, so I'm going to go ahead and grab this requisition and I'm going to drop it into my shopping cart. Okay, and it knows I'm ordering 60 pieces and I can come over here to my conditions and I can see what is actually happening with my pricing. And I can see if we remember if we ordered one piece then we were going to be paying $45 and then we set up some discounts from there so that we could actually get that price break automatically determined for us on the purchase order, and if I'm ever unsure, I can always click on this analysis button and it's going to tell me exactly how my pricing was determined. So that I can see what is actually happening in that price determination, and it'll tell me everything that has been looked at as it's gone through and flown through that condition record so that I can see exactly what's happening. And so when we say it's robust all of this is what is telling us that these are all the different pieces that can come into play in terms of being able to get that price onto our purchase order. And if there's been an update and it's eligible for this purchasing document based on my update techniques, I can actually come in here as well and I can actually redo my pricing or re carry out my price procedure and it will allow me to go through and see what is actually happening with the pricing and it will re-reference all that information to ensure that we have the correct price on the purchase order. Okay? So very important, very helpful information to have in terms of being able to come in here and see what is going on, but scaled pricing is very easy and we want to make sure that we are getting that set up so that we have good, repeatable, sustainable pricing on our purchase orders without having to manually intervene and adjust. So, in summary we have covered how scaled pricing allows you to. Be able to ensure the correct price is being applied without having to manually intervene. Have a symbiotic relationship with MRP and PO automation. And save time and effort by focusing on the upfront setup of pricing structure rather than managing every transaction every time, this helps our buyers rise above the order and make time to focus on negotiations and other sourcing related activities. Brilliant, thank you Kristie. I can see how this would be helpful. So many buyers find themselves mainly adjusting either lot sizes or pricing on a document by document basis. How incredible would it be to let SAP help us with this? Between our lot size strategy and our scale pricing, there seems to be a great opportunity to let SAP do a lot of the heavy lifting for us once we provide them with the right rules. If you'd like to learn more about this topic and other topics to relate to SAP please feel free to check out our video catalog and of course if you have any concerns or questions submit them below.

Scheduling Agreements

Utilize firm and trade-off zones for optimal supplier coordination

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
MM
ME32L; ME38; MD04
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, Martin here, and in this video we will focus on two key features in SAP schedule agreements, zones and creation profiles. These key features in SAP offer support for common requests from suppliers. The zones help us to manage signals and agree to activities, and creation profiles cover a lot, but more specifically include the ability to aggregate information across time. Kristie, why don't you tell us more about these schedule agreements capabilities? Definitely. As you alluded to, there's a lot going on here, so we're going to hone in on a couple of key points. Firstly, we'll cover off on the zones. The definition of firm and trade off zones offer great signaling capabilities to our suppliers and another level of negotiation for our buyers. Really cool. Then we'll talk about creation profiles and the level of aggregation so that suppliers get the right level of detail at the right time. Think of this as relevant information at relevant time ranges. I'll also show where this information is maintained in the scheduling agreement. Let's go into SAP and check it out. I am so excited to show you this functionality in SAP. Scheduling agreements are a great tool to strategically manage our sources of supply and to be able to provide them with good information and one of the most underappreciated features of scheduling agreements is our ability to differentiate between the different zones. So if you think about firm, slushy, and free zones. It's a similar concept here and what I want to walk you through today is where this information is stored and also the impact that it can have as we're trying to set boundaries with our suppliers for what activities are happening when while endeavoring to share more information with them especially when it comes to our outlook on what we would be expecting to supplier our forecasted quantities. So you'll see here I'm in ME33L and I'm just going to go look at this particular scheduling agreement and when I come in here, you'll see I just have this single material set up and I want to go in and take a look at some of the details. So you'll see here this additional data, this is where a lot of the master data for this particular scheduling agreement is stored, and this particular scheduling agreement is an LPA. So there's three types. There's an LP, an LPA, and an LU, this happens to be an LPA. But you can set these zones on any of the types of scheduling agreements. You'll see here, the first scheduling control piece is called a firm zone. And then you also have something called a trade off zone, and then everything beyond that is the free zone. So think firm, slushy, and free. And what this does is it provides a really amazing opportunity to have an agreement with our suppliers on what specifically each of these zones mean and it allows us to also print this information on our outputs and incorporate that into the actual documents that we're sending to the suppliers when we're allowing them to see our delivery schedule. So for example, firm zone to you may mean okay to ship or okay to produce, depending on what kind of lead times we're dealing with and what kind of commodity we're dealing with. The second one, the trade off zone, this may mean okay to commit capacity, okay to purchase raw materials, or this may be your go ahead for production. Again, depending on what kind of relationship you have with those suppliers, what kinds of goods or services you are procuring from them. And then the last piece is the relationship with MRP. So what is MRP allowed to change? Is it allowed to adjust within the trade off zone, or is the trade off zone going to stay exactly as it is and it's just going to adjust outside of that. Now, most of the time, your firm zone is exactly what it says, it's firm, no adjustments by MRP. Trade off zone depends on what this means to you commercially and how you have that conversation with your supplier. You may want to provide that to them as an outlook, but they may know that there's going to be slight shifts in those dates or quantities. So you need to make that decision based on those conversations and what the relationship is with your supplier and whether they're holding inventory for you or not. The second option here or opportunity within the scheduling agreement that I wanted to highlight for you is something called a creation profile. And this is very cool because it has a lot of different settings that control the way that we share information with our supplier. For example, if we're working with an LPA scheduling agreement, we can do a just in time delivery schedule and then a forecasted delivery schedule, we actually provide two separate documents to the supplier, we can do two separate outputs for them to be able to see what's happening, and we can control the way in which we issue those changes. Another really awesome opportunity here are the aggregation horizons. So maybe in the near term you want to be able to provide your suppliers with information in daily buckets, in the midterm you would like to have weekly buckets, and in the long term you actually want to roll that up to month. This is a great way to share information with your suppliers based on the relevant information at relevant ranges and how accurate you are able to be from the near term out to the long term. This also sets the tone for those conversations around what that data should be used for in their planning processes. This is a great way to be able to set this up and share that information with the suppliers in a way that is easily consumable by them and so that they understand what the data means. So this aggregation level, the way in which we choose to create releases or changes to the scheduling agreement and the firm and trade off zones are great communication avenues to be able to adjust the way that we're having conversations with our suppliers and share information so the right activities are happening at the right time. This does require a little bit of configuration and a lot of business rules discussion, as well as setting up your outputs to show the correct information, but a super valuable tool in terms of being able to make your strategic sourcing strategies a reality and easily executable and monitorable directly within SAP. So in summary, we have covered how these key features in the scheduling agreement will. Allow you to be clear in your communication with the supplier on what those signals mean. Provide suppliers with broader outlooks while still restricting your commercial obligations. And set the supplier up for success and reduce churn through aggregation. Thank you Kristie. The more we help our suppliers the better positioned our suppliers are to help us. These sound like valuable options to enrich the conversation with suppliers. So folks if you want to know more about how to get the best out of your SAP system please check out our other videos and of course if you have a burning question please submit it below.

Setting the ABC Indicator

Discover how SAP optimizes your ABC indicator evaluation and setup

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP Optimization
P2P; PTM
MD04; MM03; MC40; MC41
Hi, supply chain friends, Martin here, and in today's video we're not just scratching the surface, we're going to deep dive and unlock and reveal the hidden value in your SAP system. Ready for this journey? Okay, let's get going. In this video, we're going to explore the ABC indicator and how to put it to best use. So Monique, why don't you tell us a bit about what to do about the ABC indicator and how best to use it in our supply chain. Well, Martin, when I was running my warehouse I used the ABC indicator to drive our cycle count program. It is one of the tools that supports grouping and segmentation to drive focus and attention based on the use, importance, or velocity of that particular material. Now there are actually two ABC indicators. The one I mentioned that relates to warehouse ops and the one that I used was the MRP 1 tab. SAP can actually help us to set or determine values for either, but today I am going to focus on the one in the MRP view, which is used for material selection, reporting, and analysis. Many people are unaware that SAP does this, so I'm looking forward to this one. So let's dig in. Now, I mentioned that there are two ABC indicators. The one folks tend to be most familiar with is the one that drives the cycle count program. But have you ever noticed that there is also one on the MRP 1 view? Let's go take a look. I'm going to go into the material master for this guide by double clicking on the material number. Here we go, and you can see this is the field. Now this field, unlike the other ABC indicator that controls the cycle counting program, this one is for informational and reporting purposes only. It's very powerful information and we can use it in a number of ways for decision making and cadence of activities in particular. It requires a regular review and maintenance. Now, did you know that SAP can help you both evaluate and update the ABC indicator? Yeah, it's pretty awesome, and you actually have two options for how to review and determine what that ABC indicator should be. You can look at either usage or requirements. So, backwards based on historical consumption, or forward looking based on expected future volumes. Let's head over here and take a look. The techniques around setting and utilizing the ABC indicator are part of grouping and prioritization. As we look at this selection screen, it will guide us through the thought process, but we have some decisions to make. First, what does our pool of evaluation look like when we go into the set indicator? Are we looking based on the velocity in one particular plant? Or are we accumulating across multiple plants? So do we want to see the performance or importance at the material level or the material plant level? Secondly, what kind of time horizon do we want to look at? And this also contributes to the cadence of review. We need to think about the nature of the business we're in. Is it seasonal? Do our products have long or short life cycles? Is it different based on the type of material, product, family, etc? You do want to be careful with this next one. Materials, the evaluation is performed on the plants and items that are chosen. So when you limit the pool, you are nominating materials for ABC based only on the plants and materials in scope. Be careful with this and make sure you explore with curiosity to make sure your pool is a good one. The next important decision is around the analysis strategy. An ABC indicator is meant to convey the importance of that material. How does your organization define important? And how does this relate to how you intended to use this information to drive focus in planning and execution of the supply chain? The most common selection is the top option here, percent. Percent of either requirement or usage depending on whether you're performing your evaluation via MC40 Past Historical Consumption or Usage or MC41 Future Plan Requirements. They both have their advantages. I like options so I will often run both and compare notes. I'm particularly looking for items that are in transition and sometimes I'll even catch an anomaly in consumption or forecast that I can reach out and ask a question about. So like the cooking shows, I know going to pull the finished cake out of the oven and show it to you because it takes time for this to run . What SAP has done is analyze the information based on what we selected and here are the results. You can see that some are the same and some have changes. I can go through and select some ones I'd like to change. See here. And I can execute that change. I can also process the entire list. With great power comes great responsibility, so please make sure you like it before you buy it. This is a good starting point to get a first pass at what the ABC should be. There will be materials that you will want to set differently for business reasons, life cycle, or pieces of the puzzle that SAP just does not have the visibility to. Work on that, but in the meantime, manage those as an exception and play with some of the different analysis options. There's a great opportunity to be curious and I hope you'll go explore. Welcome back. So I'm glad you were able to explore the system with me today. Let's get to a few of the so whats. First, the ABC indicator can help drive focus and attention, especially as we think through our planning activities. Second, it does require regular but not excessive frequent revisits. Think about the way your business runs throughout the course of a year and think through when a revisit might be right for you. Lastly, this is a good data point to factor in as we're thinking about our investment in inventory, contracts, labor, and capacity. When the chips are down, this can be a good additional data point to help break the ties and make sound decisions. Wow Monique, the ABC Indicator is a really nice feature because it's available in a lot of the reporting and analytic tools. And it's valuable to see what SAP can help us do to both review and update these values. Thanks again for those insights. If you want to learn more about how to get the most out of your SAP system, please check out our other video catalogs and of course, if you have a specific question, or even just a suggestion or comment, please feel free to submit it below.

Shelf Life Expiration Date

Identifying and organizing materials nearing expiration

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LX02; LX27
The best way to learn is by doing and welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. In this video we're going to focus on shelf life expiration date capability in warehouse. Steven, this is a big deal for many companies, how about you tell us a little bit more about how to deal with shelf life management? Absolutely Martin. Managing shelf life expiration dates in your warehouse is no easy task. WM has built specific stock removal or picking strategies that automatically direct you to the material or batch that will be expiring first. This allows you to maintain FIFO principles and minimize expiring materials. The most critical thing warehouse folks must do is pick the batch called upon from SAP rather than picking another just because it may be easier or closer. In this video I will demonstrate. A few tools. And best practices to help warehouse staff identify and manage SLED materials and materials that have surpassed their expiration dates. Many organizations and warehouses have materials that expire. There's many different strategies and really ways that you can manage your shelf lives within your organization, your supply chain, and SAP is certainly capable of helping utilize and really manage those shelf lifes. So one of the first transactions that we'll display here is going to be LX27 which is the SLED, which is shelf life expiration date control list. There's two required fields here, it could be your warehouse number which has shelf lives. The second is going to be down here in the number of days remaining in your shelf life. You can see below that there's two bubbles that are populated there. The first is total remaining shelf life, which accommodates for your transit time or your transportation time, such as your goods receipt time. It takes into consideration the overall picture outside of the warehouse, which is awesome. The second one below that is just simply, hey, it's expired in the warehouse, you need to get it out now before it actually expires and doesn't take into consideration some of those lead times. So in this case, at the very least, we want to enter one day okay, and we'll just go ahead and let this run. What this shows, you get a traffic light, and it simply means, this material has expired by a lot in this case, it's June 2023, so almost 5,500 days, thankfully this is just a test system and not real materials. You could see, it actually gives you the amount of days, the number of when this actually expired, so back in 2008, you can also see the total quantity and the storage bin and where it's at. So that's going to be very key is to know where it's at. But one of the things that it's missing, because when we're talking shelf lifes, we're also talking in potentially batches, right, which makes sense. If you're dealing with shelf lifes for materials that expire, you want to be able to identify which batch it was on to be able to trace it back for a lot of quality issues. So you don't see that here now, however so one of my clients asked, can we get the batch on this, absolutely, which I would highly recommend. What you could simply do is you can click these three staircases from this current layout and it just simply shows you your material, your plant, so on and so forth up there. You want to click item and then there's some additional fields there. So we'll just bring in storage unit and batch, highlight both of those, bring them over, they drop to the bottom there, go ahead and click copy and there you go. It now brings in the batch. So that's Tcode LX27, it's a very nice display of traffic lights. So we touched on red, obviously these have expired. If you had a yellow, it would mean, hey, maybe it's expiring in your warehouse in the WM environment, but not the total shelf life, so that would be a yellow. And then your green obviously means that you're in line or you're not in the potential of expiring yet. Another way to find this, if you do have shelf lifes, is just simply through Tcode LX02. So if you go into LX02, you can see all of your material listed in your warehouse and one of the fields that you can bring in, which is the last one here, is SLED or best by date. And it's just very nice here because, you could do some sorts, so if you have many different shelf lives within your warehouse you could just get all that same information here and it'll sort ascending, descending, however you want to have it displayed. The overall theme here is SAP will absolutely point you in the direction of your SLED, your shelf lifes, it has the stock removal strategy of picking by SLED or your oldest shelf life, right? So you don't risk picking materials that are just produced. So it'll point you to that batch, the one that's going to expire first. The system is only as good as your setup. Now, I can't emphasize that enough. If your material, if you're working in an environment such as like a floor stack area and working with shelf lifes, you want to be able to access that material from the back, because if you're going to continue to pile materials in the front, SAP will point you to that batch all day long, it'll point you to the bin, but you want to set your warehouse staff up for success in order to quickly access that batch and or material that's going to be expiring first. I've seen often too many times a lot of workarounds where it will propose that batch, that shelf life and the warehouse workers, just simply, out of bad practices, don't want to move six pallets in order to get to that one in the back, so they've worked around the system and just picked the one in the front. You really want to be disciplined when working with shelf lifes, utilize SAP, be disciplined to the process, and really pick that shelf life which is going to be expiring first. So, in summary we have covered how managing shelf life expiration dates are no easy task. But there are many tools and strategies to leverage in SAP. That enable us to manage and work proactively with expiring shelf life dates. Hey, once again Steve thank you very much. Fantastic stuff here and some great strategies shared on how to leverage SAP to assist within the management of shelf life. Folks again if you want to learn more about how to get the most out of your SAP system please check out our videos and of course if you have a suggestion or a question for us please submit it below.

Should I Use MD06 or MD07

Explore MD06 vs. MD07, the similarities, differences, and the ideal choice

11 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
DM; MM; PP; SD
MD06; MD07
Hey, folks, Martin here and in today's video we're going to be talking a lot about whether we should be using MD06 or MD07. So welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. Let's get cracking. So in this particular case we're going to look at whether an MRP controller planner or buyer should be using an MRP list, i. e. MD06 or a stock requirements list, i. e. MD07. It's a pretty common question, and the answer is both. This is one of the many situations where it truly is not an or, but rather an and. And it really helps with the day to day planning. Kristie, I know this is a common topic that comes up all the time, why don't you share some more details on this? Yes, I would love to. Both of these are fantastic transactions, and they are absolutely essential to a planner and buyer's life. They have a ton of similarities, but they also have some key differences. The best way to explain is to go in and take a look, but spoiler alert, and most of you have probably already noticed this. The MRP list is static, as of the last MRP run, great for managing the business of the day and for troubleshooting when something looks off. The stock requirements list is dynamic, it's alive, and it's keeping pace with the activities of the day. Also, as the names imply, the MRP list is only relevant for the materials that ran through MRP, and the stock requirements list exists for all of our materials. Both are very valuable, so let's go in and do a side by side comparison. Such a common question, do I use MD06, which is the MRP list, or do I use MD07, which is the stock requirements list. Let's go through some of the differences between the two, and I'm going to specifically focus on when we go in and we're seeing the exception monitor and so I'm going to point out some of the key differences to you. So the first one is that the MRP list is static as of the last MRP run. So as things are happening with your materials, they get planning file entries, and that tells the system that something has changed and it's time to go out and run MRP. And on a regular cadence, you may be running across your entire planning book, either on a weekly or monthly level, and going through and making sure that everything gets the opportunity to run through MRP. But in general, most of the time, you're going to see that you have different MRP dates out here for different materials, and you can see that clearly. So every piece of information that we see here is static as of that last MRP run. And if you have any challenges with your discontinuation process, very often you'll see older materials that are hanging out here with really old MRP dates where they haven't been pushed to the process in a while. Now this is a test environment, so you're going to see all kinds of different information. But we're just going to do a compare and contrast here. So, this is MD06, and I'm going to flip screens so that you can see MD07, I'll tell you we're going to go through the differences so that you can see on the screen what those are, but to make it really easy for you to tell which one I'm looking at, MD06 doesn't have any materials highlighted. MD07 I've highlighted some materials just so it's really obvious as we're going through here which one we're looking at. The other thing you can do is look down here in the lower right hand corner of the screen if it ends in 7. This is MD07, the stock requirements list exception monitor and if you look at this one, it says MD06, this is for the MRP list. So a couple of telltale signs that you are in and you are working with the MRP list, and this is also one of the big advantages, is first of all, you'll see the MRP date. We do not have this column in MD07 because it is dynamic. It is live as of the moment you enter the transaction, and the reason you see that little refresh button in MD07 is because it's as of the moment you go into the transaction. So you can go in and you can refresh right from there to make sure that everything is up to date or you'll get a queue to update your statistics. So it's collecting that data and information. But the other thing that you're going to see in MD06 or the MRP list is your ability to set the processing indicator. So as you are going through your morning ritual of reviewing your exception messages and cleaning up your planning results, as you're doing that, when you go through and you pull this in and you're working through your list you have the option to go in and click on the processing indicator. When you set this, then the rest of the day, when you go to run your MRP list, you can choose to exclude the items that you have already worked on. So this is for our folks who are either running classic MRP or are still on ECC. You no longer get an MRP list if you're running MRP live. So that is really powerful and important because it also lets you know how far you're making it into your day. And I don't know about you, but you know, there's interruptions all the time. So it's nice to be able to go, oh, yep, click, click. I've gone through and I've looked at that one and then I'm not going to see that come off until the next time that item runs through MRP, which means that there's been a change. Okay, so it will come back off though the next time that it runs through MRP. So you see here, we don't have those things. So that's one of the ways that we can tell that we are in MD07. A couple of other things you're going to see here is you're going to see your stock information and then you're going to see your forward days of coverage, or your receipt days of supply, as well as your exception messages. So if I come back over here to MD06, yep, same thing, I've got some master data elements, I have my inventory information, and then I have my stock days of supply with my forward coverage based on different parameters. There's a whole other couple videos on that to explain how to work with those because they're very, very powerful when they're set up correctly. And the next door to that is my exception messages. So here's the big question. Which one should I be working with? And the answer is both. You actually want to start your day with the business of the day. So you want to work with your MRP list first. What has changed since you went home last night? What is going on that needs attention today? Where are those new messages? And you're going to note that one of the big differences we'll see here is we're going to see a different group of exception messages available to us. So I'm going to tell us to go ahead and update our statistics. You always want to say yes, otherwise you're just going to get a gray screen, it's going to show you all of the different elements and all the different exceptions with no counts. And what you're going to see is we have some exception messages here that do not show up in MD07 because they're related to the MRP run. And those are going to sit in group 4 and group 8, okay? And really when you run your group 8s, instead of selecting it here, you want to actually choose it and find the materials and then choose that exception message group. All the rest of your exception messages, you're better to find them from here. But you're going to see things like newly created, an order proposal has been changed, an order proposal re exploded. You're not going to see any of those in your stock requirements list. You will see scheduling master data inconsistent though because that goes beyond the MRP run, that is a planning problem, so you're going to see that information over there as well. So it's really, if MRP isn't able to run, and it's information like, hey, hey, I'm just letting you know something changed and I want to let you know about it because it's really important because you gave me a job to do and I'm trying to get it done. So MRP is really good about communicating that to you and sharing that information. So let me flip over to the other screen and let's look at the same thing there. So I'm going to go to get into my binoculars and you're going to even see that the counts are going to be different. If I've filtered my MRP list based on a particular date range that it's run, I'll see some things there. So again, find an exceptions and you're going to see the list here is much shorter. We don't see the 8. We don't see the exception message group 4s. And those other three exception message numbers that tell us about what the MRP run was doing, because this is what is going on with this material active as of now. And the list in general is a bit shorter because this is the MRP list might have some things in there that are outdated if we haven't adjusted it based on the run date or if we haven't run any type of reorganization on the MRP list in a while. So, again, if your discontinuation process, if you put materials away and they're not clean, then the MRP list can start to look really, really messy and there's definitely an opportunity to go in and clean that up. And that typically, once you've got a good process in place, you're no longer creating that problem. Going through and doing that cleanup can be a big effort, but it's well worth it because it gets all the clutter out and the things that you're looking at are way more powerful to the buyer, planner, MRP controller that's working with it. So you're going to see a different group of exceptions here. So start your day with the MRP list, go through your materials, get your exception monitoring done, get queued up, make sure that you know what the planning results look like. If you're not happy with them, adjust your business rules and your master data to get good results and then let it roll. And then throughout the day when you're having conversations with folks, then you really want to be over here in the stock requirements list working on those materials. And whether you're doing that collectively coming through the screen that we're looking at right now or whether you're going in and you're choosing an individual material. So this is going to give us a work list or we could be working on an individual material. We can continue to add materials throughout the day to this list just by entering them in and then hitting, the refresh button. We are going to be able to generate that list. So live in the stock requirements list. Bring the work of the day, the problems of the day, the opportunities of the day to the forefront by looking at the MRP list so you know what has changed. That's your business of the day to work through first and then move over into the stock requirements list for the rest of your day to be able to continue to drive value. Excellent, welcome back. This is a great discussion and I love the good conversations we are having. We have more than one tool in our toolkit that supports our planning and as material planners, we definitely need to be using both of these tools on a daily basis. Today we jumped into SAP and did a side by side comparison between the stock requirements list and the MRP list. We compared and contrasted them and added some context on where each could be used. We also highlighted the order of attack, so using the MRP list to gather the business of the day and then moving on to the stock requirements list to help resolve particular situation as the day goes on. Both are invaluable and an MRP controller should have a home base for the work that we do in both of these transactions, right in SAP. Thank you Kristie, great differentiation. This is the workspace and there is so much capability right at our fingertips. We definitely need more conversation on both of these particular features but that's a good starting place for now. So folks, if you want to know more about this and see some more advanced videos on these particular topics, please check out our catalog and of course if you have a particular question or a need please submit it below.

So Green Means Good Right

Discover the exception monitor’s insights and does green signify optimal performance

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; P2P; PTM
MD07
So Green Means Good Right === Martin: [00:00:00] The best way to learn is by doing, so welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Martin here, and in this video, we'll be responding to a very important question about the exception monitor. Here's what it is. So, green means good, right? So, we've heard that so many times. Green means go. It's an interesting one, but I'd have to say that the answer is maybe sometimes. It may be good, but it also may not be good necessarily. And I know Kristie is going to take us away and tell us more about it. Kristie, tell us why we think green may or may not be a good thing. Krisite: You bet you Martin. The traffic lights in the exception monitor offer great insight into the stage of supply of our materials and the best part is how it's visual and we can catch it at a glance. Today we're going to go in and take a look at some examples of. Green lights and, we'll, let you in the audience be the judge of [00:01:00] whether a green light means good. We'll take a look at some healthy and some not so healthy green lights. We'll also review how to see if you have more red, yellow, or green lights, and how to know which green light needs some love. Away we go! So we've been taught our whole lives that red means stop, or sometimes bad, yellow means caution, and green means good. And in many cases, that is true, however in the exception monitor it is only sometimes true. So, here I am in MD07, I could be here either through MD06 or MD07. But I wanted the latest, greatest point of view on what is going on with our stock. And in this case ~um,~ what I want to talk about today are the green lights. But as a quick reminder, our red lights are the items that are at risk of service level degradation, where we don't have enough stock as of today to be able to cover our demand. The yellows are the ones that are in balance, but we need to continue to action them accordingly. And then the green ones are simply the [00:02:00] items that have a positive days of supply, and if you're ever not sure, you can always come to this Define Traffic Light button and click on it, and it's going to tell you ~what~ what will flag as a red, yellow, and green? And don't forget, not only do you have your current days on hand, but then you also have something called first receipt and second receipt. And what this does is it runs very similarly to an ATP check, you choose what portion of the pipeline is included in each of these. So whether it's incoming purchase orders or planned receipts, all of that good stuff. So there's a whole separate video on this you can go check out, but just know that that's out there too in terms of being able to see whether those red, yellow, and green lines make sense. Okay, and this is the SAP default, and if you click on basic setting, it will always restore it for you if you see something different here. But where this becomes really important is if we're looking at our green lights, anytime we see it drift into this 999.9, what that means is that there is more stock on hand than any of the demand that SAP has visibility to. [00:03:00] So if you don't have your demand loaded into the system, you may be seeing this a lot. Or, if you do have your demand loaded into the system, you have discontinued the item, ~um,~ but not wiped out all of the stock, then all of the stock has been relieved from your supply chain, then you may see it here. And, you could also see this ~um,~ if you are just replenishing way, way above what you're expecting to see. ~Um,~ And here, you've got your days on hand. So, this is 10 in this case, so we can see this item is plan to use the 600,000 pieces in the next 10 days. That's about how long it's going to last and down below, that 558 is going to last us about 30 days. Okay, so that may be very, very good. That might be very healthy for your supply chain, and those might be great numbers. But you do want to take a look at your green lights in conjunction with at least the stock days of supply. And then you can start to look further out once you understand how these are configured for your particular business. But definitely paying attention to this is very helpful. The other thing is you might consider is this an A, B, or [00:04:00] C class item? And based on that, if you have some rough inventory targets, you could use that to double check and make sure that it makes sense. And you could even do things like use the document evaluation reports for looking at range of coverage based on historical usage or future projected usage and get a good idea of how long that stock is meant to last. You can even run it for anything over ~um,~ X number of days and ABC classifications so that you can go in and see whether you're meeting those targets. And if you're not, then what you would want to do is you would want to come in and start to look at things like your minimum order quantity. You would want to take a look and see what's going on from a safety stock or a coverage profile. You can see that information here, maybe what's going on with your reorder point, okay? And that information is going to really help you to understand what is going on and how you can correct that situation. If you do find that you're overstocking, either based on your stock position now or after you start to receive your next round of goods in from your suppliers. So, super helpful to make sure that that [00:05:00] working capital is staying at the right level and just making sure that we go in and we take a look at this, and again, looking at your lights in conjunction with your current days on hand, how long that is meant to last you based on the visibility to the current demand. And if you don't trust that number then go over to document evaluation and take a look at your range of coverage, and again, you can break that down based on your ABC classification and start to get a good idea of whether that coverage actually makes sense for you, and then that is going to tell you whether green means good. And the conclusion is, green lights are not always good, but they are generally less urgent to act on than red lights, where we know that we're at risk of service level degradation as of today. Today we saw some good examples of. Good, not so good, and really not so good around healthy green lights. We talked through some options for identification and also some options for how we might resolve them. It's important that the supply chain has tension in it in order to make sure that we're in balance and taking a [00:06:00] deeper look into green light status definitely helps us to maintain that control. Thanks Martin. Martin: Thank you Kristie, love that. We love to think that green is always a go. So many things can factor into an unhealthy green light material status. Where are we in the product's life cycle? Our rules, our behaviors matching or not matching, our inventory policies and our cadence for review. We need to keep our pulse on this and make sure that we're maximizing the quality of our inventory investment. This is really a good one and we really appreciate the question. So thank you. So if you have more questions, please submit them below and we'll try and answer that and of course there are other videos that may be giving you more details around this.

Spend Analysis

Enhance spending insights with advanced purchase value analysis

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
Contract & Supplier Management
P2P; PM
MC$G
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi Martin here, and in this video I want to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's spend analysis capabilities. When use correctly spend analysis can provide organizations with a comprehensive view of the spending patterns and enables identifying opportunities of cost savings as well as process improvements. This is one of the strategic capabilities available in SAP that helps us rise above the individual transactions and hone in on those opportunities. Kristie, how would you take us through a demo on this? You bet you Martin. Spend analysis is a powerful feature when you use correctly and in this demonstration we're going to focus on three primary things. First, we'll dive into spend analysis and explore some of the key figures that are available. Second, we'll take a look at how you use spend analysis tool to dice and slice and create tops list based on different characteristics. And lastly, we'll explore how spend analysis can help us to identify anomalies that's close and near and dear to my heart. All right, so one of the best ways that we can enable our sourcing strategy is to be able to go in and do some spend analysis and I think a lot of folks don't even know that this is here. So this is MC$G and it is my favorite transaction for going through and evaluating our spend with our suppliers, and you can see that this is a report that has a lot of different information in it. So in this case, we have it sorted by supplier. We are seeing our purchase order value over a period of time, so this is our last six months, this is the value of purchase orders that we've placed with each of these suppliers. It has our goods receipt value so this is how much we have received from those suppliers during those same six months and then it has our invoice amount, so it will have how much we have been invoiced over the last six months. And so depending on your terms and your lead time, you will see differences here because it's based on what of those activities has occurred over the last six months. One of my favorite things about the spend analysis is it also helps us to catch anomalies. So when we take this down to the material level, which I'll show you in just a moment, we can evaluate our purchase order price versus our invoice price. Now again, terms will cause some variation here but let's say that you've just gone through and you've done a quarterly or yearly update on your pricing and you want to make sure that you don't have any pricing issues. Maybe you've made a fat finger and you've added an additional zero, it happens all the time. You can catch that in your purchase order price, so you'll see something that is really outside the normal, you'll see it in your roll up of your purchase order value. So when you know that you've had a recent price change, you can use this to help you to detect anomalies and how that pricing has been loaded. The other thing that you can do, because there's lots and lots of key figures available to you, is you can come in here and you can see how you're progressing in terms of how you're using the more strategic pieces of the procurement suite. So contracts, quota arrangements, scheduling agreements, requests for proposals or quotations, all have entries here, and you can pull those in to see how you're using them, what the number of occurrences are during that same time period and evaluate how those particular pieces are getting adopted. So we can see here we have 39 contract items and I'm going to sort that in descending order, and so I can see which suppliers have contracts that'll let me see the suppliers. I can then go in and I can explore, I can drill in to see from here, I can explore what is going on from a material standpoint or material group, plant purchase organization or month. So I can see the month that those were issued in or the materials that they were issued against and that allows me to explore a little bit more of what's happening. And probably most important is just being able to do the general spend analysis. I'm going to back out here. These are our suppliers, I'm going to sort this by purchase order value, so the suppliers that we've had the most activity with are going to come up to the and then I can even go in here and do a tops list. So the top, however many. So I need to select the key figure I'm looking for, click on the top number, and I could do my top 10 or my top 20, and I can start to really take a look and see how my spend is spreading. Especially when we talk about doing something like material group, that'll let you see how effective your material group classifications are, think about grouping and prioritization and being able to get that signal, that's really important. One other important call out here is that you also want to take a look and see what's going on in terms of your free spend. So I'm going to go in here and just come in again. I'll show you what this looks like from the very beginning. You'll notice that this is coming in at the material level and you can see here that I have 5.5 million of my 16 million over the period of evaluation has no material number associated with it. So that's a free text PO so it's largely untracked spend, so as much as we can, we want to classify this. So the next level down for that would be to drill into that particular spend category. So watch the 5.5 million when I do this, I'm going to click on it and I'm going to say, okay, tell me the split out by material group. So you can see now I'm looking at just that 5.5 million dollars and I can see the split by material group. So I'm going to go ahead and again and sort and descending order, and I can start to see if I've got good buckets here that will allow me to get a signal in terms of being able to evaluate in my spend. And then I can come in here and I can drill in further to see what suppliers were involved. I'm going to do that and here's all my suppliers. Now again, I can sort descending order and I can run a tops list if I wanted to, bring that up to the top, and now I want to look at it by month. Now this is free text, a lot of times these purchase orders are for services and there's just one big PO but we'll see what we get here so I can drill down again. Again, I might be looking for anomalies or how my spend is flowing going by month. Okay, and now I can sort this in ascending order and I can start to chart this across time, so I can come in here to assign series graphic and I could actually look at my PO versus my goods receipt versus my invoice just to kind of see how everything is tracking and look at this across time. And then I can look for how those things are stacking up or where I have terms, I would expect to see some differences and I can start to see how the flow of my invoice that has been issued versus my goods receipt versus my purchase orders are lining up. So it really need to be able to do that and map it and start to get some signal out of the spend. We could spend hours talking about this, there's so much fun stuff in here that's really helpful to the process, but this is your spend analysis report an MC$G and lots of good stuff for you here in terms of being able to evaluate how that spend is slowing and also to detect anomalies in the process as you go. So in summary, we have covered how spend analysis allows you to. Be able to evaluate spend and trends over time. Detect anomalies and spend patterns, pricing and terms. And evaluate how we're doing with making smart use of RFQ's, quota arrangements and outline agreements. All really important stuff. Thanks Kristie. Through spend analysis we have an amazing ability to surface opportunities to manage our spend, refine our strategy, and ensure that our buyers have the tools they need to be successful day to day. So if you'd like to learn more about other features and functions in SAP please feel free to check out our other videos and of course if you have any further suggestions feel free to submit them below.

Spoilt for Choice: Make, Buy or Transfer

Learn the right Procurement Key for producing, procuring, or transferring items

4 min
New
SAP® ECC
Demand & Supply Planning
PTM; P2P
MD04; CM05
Hey there folks, Martin here. One of your guides to making the most out of your SAP system. Whether you're a beginner or a seasoned pro, today's video is designed to reveal functionalities that might just be a game changer for you. Let's dive right into it. In this video, Jake is going to introduce us to some tips and tricks for decision making when we find ourselves spoiled for choice and have to decide whether we will be making, buying, or transferring. Jake, this is an interesting topic, something you're very familiar with. Take it away. Definitely, Martin. The decision point on whether to make or buy is a classic. Today, we're also suggesting that it could be make, buy, or transfer. So when you're planning a material, the primary responsibility is in deciding how to supply the demand in the most effective way possible. So in today's introduction, I'm going to focus on a few key things. First, is the procurement key. This is the master data element that indicates that there is a choice to be made. Next, we'll talk about the different options that might be available. And then lastly, we'll highlight a few ideas on how to define the rules that guide that decision making. So let's go in and take a look. So here we are in everyone's favorite transaction to support critical planning decisions. MD04 or the stock requirement list. As a planner, we have a ton of different responsibilities when it comes to making sure that our materials are living out their best and most productive lives. And one of the most critical is determining how we're going to supply the demands. MRP gives us proposals for replenishment and exceptions for when we're out of balance. Most of the time these proposals have a clear source and MRP knows this based on the rules or the master data in the system. However, sometimes we have flexibility and while we do have a preferred source, we also have options. This helps to reduce risk in the process and provides for some flexibility. If we have an item that can be either made or procured, we'll have a special procurement type in place, look, we can see that right here. E is for internally produced and F is for externally sourced. We also have an option for X, which lets us know that this item can be either internally procured or externally sourced. A choice may be baked into the MRP run via a quota arrangement if we have some splits that we want to facilitate. That's great when that can happen as we see here. However, sometimes we have to make the decision. Let's imagine, for example, that demand suddenly goes up and the next plan's replenishment is from the supplier. They're not going to be able to expedite, so now we would want to look and see if we can transfer from another plant that has a less immediate need, or produce if we have the capacity and the components on hand. Now the opposite could also be true. Maybe we find ourselves overcapacity and we need to find some relief. That may be a great opportunity to do some cross plant rebalancing or get some capacity relief by deploying some of the replenishment requests out to the supplier. This is a great proactive activity that should be part of the midterm planning and the supply review or as a lead time intervention as part of the S&OE cycle. So a few tips. Make sure your picture in SAP is up to date and clear as possible. Look at your capacity overloads via CM05 and look for those opportunities to backfill for production. Understand the response time from the suppliers, or even the subcontractors, and review placement across the supply network to help each other out when the times get tough. It's really great to have choices, and I hope this opens up the conversation for future exploration. It's a real privilege to be in the driver's seat for planning, but it's not easy. And choices are awesome, but can also add complexity to the planning process. So it's really important that we can have the information we need, on tap in order to make smart and efficient choices. I love the flexibility that comes with a multi source environment and knowing that we can provide relief to whichever source is struggling is an awesome advantage. Thanks, Jake. That was amazing. Breaking it down like that. That was perfect. Thank you. So folks, if you want to know more about that topic, please check out our video catalog. And of course, if you have a specific question, our chatbot will be able to help.

Staging Crate Parts

Showcasing crate part staging for production and master data locations

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LS41; LP11
Hey folks, we know the best way to learn is by doing, so let's get right into it. My name is Martin, and today we're going to focus on specifically how and what are the options for staging materials from the warehouse to the production floor by using staging crates parts indicator. Wow, that's a mouthful. Steve, why don't you tell us a little bit more about it. I can only imagine that this option for materials or stored in crates may be best suited for specific industries. Is that correct? Exactly, Martin. Crate parts are typically small materials with large quantities, such as nuts and bolts, and are staged near the assembly line. These materials are typically consumed and even ordered in bulk. The big call out with crate parts is that quantity is predefined in the control cycle and requested independent or manually from existing production and process orders. Next, we'll go into SAP. Where I'll demonstrate how crate parts are defined in the control cycle. And how the replenishment process works. With staging crate parts, we'll first identify some of those PSAs and within the control cycle that have indicator 2 and or the crate parts. So we'll go into LS41 to identify some of those. Really, you can go about that a couple of ways. You can enter your plant here, obviously of 1000 for our demo, but if you knew your specific staging indicator, you could just select those and only those would come back. So in this case, we'll do just two of our crate parts. Go ahead and execute that and it lists all of our production supply areas, the materials that are in there, and you can see the indicator is actually a 2 there, there's our crate part. Now to kind of see the bones behind all these and what those quantities are, if you just double click to any of these here or single click, it then brings up the number of kanbans and quantities. Number of kanbans is really just the number of containers, so this is saying, hey there's 2 containers, each of those containers has a quantity of 20. So as we know these replenishments will be independent of a production order, it's really meant just for those production floor associates needing more bulk container, they would then request one. In order to do that, so this is the guts behind it, we'll stick with this material, to now replen, you'll have an LP11 here. So LP11 is going to be staging for specific crate parts. You can go ahead here, you can do this in the background or in the foreground. Once you enter your material, and we'll do a 100-300, and we'll go ahead and just execute this in the background and the plan date of today, this supply area, everything matches. I'm going to go ahead and hit enter, okay and the WM staging was then saved, you can see here. What that is going to do is then create an actual transfer requirement. So we'll go in for that same part, we'll go into LB11. LB11 is just to display the transfer requirements. Okay, and go ahead and enter and you can see it then created our open quantities for replenishing our kanban. It then references the actual PSA or that, and it has our movement type 319. Then we can go about and we can actually go from here and create these into TOs and have these go into the background for them to actual stage to that PSA. It then created that transfer order here from our transfer requirement, so I'm going to go in here and then all we simply have to do is then confirm that TO when it said 350, you go ahead there, I'm going to hit enter and there it is, it has our 100-300 going and replenishing from and to these actual production supply areas for a total quantity of 20. Go ahead and enter that, the transfer order has been created and we can go ahead and verify that in LS24, okay. And here we go right here it's got our decrement of 23 within our production supply area.Welcome back. In this demo. We've covered staging crate parts for production and process orders. Demonstrated how the replenishment takes place. This is one of the few staging options, so please tune into the other videos for staging to explore the best options and solution for your specific situation. Nice job, Steve, that was awesome. I'm actually very excited to continue to unpack the different staging options that are available in WM. So folks, if you want to learn more about what else is available in SAP in the Warehouse Management module, please check out the other videos, and of course if you just have a burning question, feel free to submit it below.

Staging Release Order Parts

Exploring release order parts for production staging and master data locations

3 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LS41; LP12
Hey folks, welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. We know the best way to learn is by doing, so let's get going. In this particular video, we're going to focus on the options for staging materials for production with release order parts. So Steve, I know from the title, I am guessing the orders are staged upon releasing the production order or process orders. Is that right? In a way, they are, Martin. Release order part indicator is used to request materials that are needed in several production or process orders. Unlike crate parts, the quantity may vary or be inconsistent, therefore it's not predefined in the control cycle, as different production lines or work centers may require varying quantities. This is also one of the more efficient staging indicators as you are picking from the storage bin once and staging or dropping these materials in different production supply areas. So let's jump into SAP where I'll demonstrate how release order parts work for staging to production. Release order parts, what we'll do is we'll go into LS41 to identify these in our control cycle, we're going to go into plant 1000, we'll go and we'll enter our warehouse 001, and then we can go into our material staging indicator, and we're going to look for our release order parts. Go ahead and execute this, and this will just simply bring back all of the materials that are eligible to be released from a release order part perspective, meaning you'll release them, they're independent of your actual production order, there's going to be a requirement out there, but until we actually replenish this, that's when it'll trigger that TRTO movement to bring it over, you'll do one swoop though, of the required quantity for all production orders that are required for those materials, and then you drop it at the individual PSA. So that's how it's really different than PIC part, is you're grabbing that material once, and then it's going to look at all the requirements and then stage them individually at each production supply area that has any requirements out there. So to do that, if there's any out there, we'll enter a new session here and that replenishment aspect will be LP12. So LP12 pre populated our plant and then you would enter your supply area that's eligible for a release order pick, you can see there, 1310. It's then going to ask for the actual plan date of when that TR should be created. You have the option to create a TO automatically if you have that configuration set up, and then in this case, you would just simply hit your material staging or enter, and you can then enter any production orders if you had them at that point. It would trigger those TRs for those replens. So it's a little bit how the staging works for release order parts. Welcome back. In this demo, we've covered the use of release order parts. Discussed some of the benefits behind the indicator. And demonstrated how this works from release to staging at the production supply area. Thanks, Steve. I can certainly see the benefits for this staging indicator, especially from the standpoint of the time saving it can provide. So folks, if you want to learn more about SAP and other transactions that can save you time as well, please check out our other videos, and of course, if you have a specific question feel free to submit it below.

Step 1: Committing to What You Possess

Understanding the essentials of ATP checks

11 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Order Fulfillment & ATP
SD; MM; PP
MD04; CO09
Hey folks the best way to learn is by doing so. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. Hi, my name is Martin, in this video, we're going to focus on SAP's available to promise scope of check, and we're starting with what the requirements are to promise against what you have. I'd imagine I'd be preaching to the choir if I rattled off a stats related to being able to provide a quality promise to our customer. Being able to make a reliable and keep a promise to the customer in some areas is a right play and a competitive differentiator. So Kristie, without further ado how would you take us there? Thanks Martin. Today's topic might be a little bit controversial. Why of course you should be able to promise against what you have. Why would you not be able to do that? Sadly, the reason is that some of us do not have reliable inventory, let alone confirmed schedules for replenishment. If you are in this boat, not to worry. We're going to walk through what you need to do about it. So let's get into SAP. Let's explore the setup for the scope of check. Let's talk through the qualifiers for extending it, and let's understand the impacts. The most important thing is to be very honest about where you are, where you want to go, and why. This will lead you to the how and that's the doing that needs to be done before moving along. So today we're going to go in and look at some of the details around what we call a stage one scope of check. And what this is, the rules that we are putting in place to do our availability check to be able to make that promise to the customer and in this case the very starting stage of that is being able to promise against what we have. So that would be our inventory and you may be sitting there going, why are we even talking about whether we can promise against inventory or not, and that's because in order to be able to make a promise against inventory you have to have a degree of confidence that what the system says that you have is indeed what you have. So, if you don't have timely transactions, if you are not passing your cycle counts, or you're not doing them at all, there may be some cases where you have material that's just ineligible for even checking against what it says that you have, and that would be the first place to start to be on your journey to being able to get quality ATP is just simply starting with being able to promise against the inventory that you have. And, if you think about it, as we go through and we're making these promises, it's really the gateway to all the subsequent processes in the supply chain, right? Once we've made that promise to the customer, we want to make sure that we are moving towards trying to achieve it. And so, we've got a variety of videos in this series that talk through different stages of ATP and what the different requirements are and how we get further along in that journey. And so think about this as the very first one, so if you're getting started your ability to be able to promise against the inventory that you do have. Now, it's also really important to note that as you go through the process of making promises to your customer, that there are going to be a variety of times that you are going through and you're conducting that availability check. So sales orders first entered as you're going through, you're making changes to that order, if you're running rescheduling, in the background as a batch job, if you are going to move that sales order from sales order into delivery, then you're checking and potentially with a different rule set all together because there's two things that work together, it's the scope of check, which is what we're going to take a look at today and then the checking role which says based on what stage we are in the process, we would want to have different rules that apply. So let me give you the most simple example, so let's say that you're moving from sales order into a delivery. At the time that you're checking your sales order, you may allow it to check against something like production orders. That would be against scheduled, that would be a stage 2 check. If you were moving into delivery, you might say, Okay, well now that I'm moving into delivery, I want to make sure that I actually have that inventory on hand. So, you're actually restricting that check further because you're starting to put more things in motion. So, the first piece of information to your customer was a commitment, but it was data and information. The second time, you're actually coordinating physical activities. So, now you really want to make sure that before you start to commit that inventory fully to that delivery, that it is in fact on hand and ready to go. So, different process steps, different availability checks as you go through. So, if you're wondering where the availability check lives, a couple of different places in the material master, but we'll focus here today on MRP3, and you'll see that this lives in the same place where you're setting your planning strategy, which we know is how the system is going to react and respond to the demand signal, as well as your availability check down at the bottom. So this is the type of availability check that is in place. And what we're going to do here is we're going to go in and do the availability overview. So I also could have gotten to that right from the stock requirements list, I simply could have gone up and gone into the availability overview and I can get to that under the environment menu. But I can also just go directly in here to CO09, and in this case for my checking rule, I'm going to look at it based on the sales document, and I'm going to go ahead and pop in here, and so what this is going to tell me is what we have currently out there, and then what has been confirmed. And I can go in here and I can look at my scope of check and start to understand what we're checking against. And in this case, this is a very broad scope of check. It's very, very mature. And I'm going to break it down now for you into what this would look like if you were doing a stage one or kind of an inventory only. This means that I trust the inventory that I have on hand, but I'm a little less confident with anything that might be beyond that horizon. And you can see that our end of lead time here is 12/11, today is 11/27, so just about two weeks out into the future is what we're seeing, and you can see we have a total of 25 pieces coming in based on the production orders that we have out there with 19 pieces going out, but we also have zero stock on hand. So let me show you what it would look like if we were doing a scope of check that considered just inventory only. Okay, so if we think about this, so if you've not seen this before, these are the rules that apply to your scope of check, and you'll see the availability check up here. This is related to the scope of check that we're pulling, this is what we're seeing here, it's a rule set that is going to create the inclusions and exclusions for what we are going to account for in the ATP check. And then the checking rule, so when this is applied, in this case for a sales order versus a delivery, or if it was on the production side at the time that we do a planned order versus a production order create versus a production order release. As we move further and further along that cycle, we're going to want to restrict those rules a little bit more. So if we were counting only on our inventory, what we're going to see is a lot of population over here in the stock overview, and what these tick boxes are for the things that we want to include or exclude. For example, if we had high degree of confidence that our inventory was in pretty good shape, then we're going to allow for checking against inventory, and we might include our safety stock, we would generally recommend that, and then we can start to consider if it's stock in transfer, so maybe you have a sister facility that's really close by, inventory counts are pretty good, you can count on that coming in on time, and you might include stock in transfer, or you might include your quality inspection stock. So if you've got a good amount of reliability in your quality inspection process, and you know that those things are releasing timely, and everybody is going through and reviewing them, then you might be able to include quality inspection stock. Now, think about these as being in order, so for example, if you didn't include quality inspection stock and that was part of your process after goods receipt, then you wouldn't want to include anything in the scheduled horizon, like a production order or a purchase order that was coming in. So that's just a side note, it's very, very important. And then these next two include block stock or include restricted use stock. Just as a reminder, block stock in SAP terms is anticipated to not be available for use, so it's generally not going to be included. Okay, and so these are the things that fall into kind of the inventory that we have on hand, and then as we come over here, we see a combination of in and outward movements, and so in our next video about stage two, I'm going to talk through the incoming pieces, but we also want to consider outgoing, so for example, if you have a sales order, we're doing a sales order availability check. We definitely want to include deliveries because they already have stock that's associated with them and likely also sales requirements, so anything that is out there we've already promised against another sales document, we don't want to double dip on that. So those are the kinds of things that you would include, so if you're starting with the stage one, you're likely going to see include safety stock, possibly include quality inspection stock, that's the one you really want to consider, and then over here, you would likely include sales requirements and deliveries in order to make sure that you're fully accounting for what you have outbound as well. So the screen is a little confusing if you're not used to it because it is both in and outward movements but if you really think through the different descriptions here, or if you go any further explore the field, you will see additional information. We'll also have another video that will walk through the replenishment lead time, so stay tuned on that, but that is if you are making a promise against your replenishment lead time, let's say for example, you were in an environment where you really couldn't count on your stock, lead time was the better information for you, that was your only option that might be something that you consider if you're on an extended lead time situation where you've got a particular bottleneck or capacity constraint that you're working through and you're on an extended lead time, then that may also come into play for you as well. So, couple of different options there, but again, starting with what you actually have is the first step in trying to be able to make that and keep that promise. So when that order comes in, you might be accepting the requested delivery date. You might have an estimated ship date in mind based on your overall market stated lead time and then you're actually making that confirmation for go ahead as soon as that inventory is either in quality inspection or has been fully released into unrestricted stock. Welcome back. In this demo, we covered a few important things. First, the difference between making and keeping a promise. Second, what the ATP scope of check looks like. And third, a few of the variations on the most basic scope of check options and how the system reacts to them. It's a journey, and this is simply Step 1. Thanks, Kristie. ATP is an exercise of honesty, integrity, and commitment. It's also an ongoing journey that needs to begin with basics and then grow from there. There's no question this is a hot topic with a lot of differential considerations. Thank you for getting the conversation going, Kristie. Hey folks, if you want to learn more about this topic, ATP, or any other topic related to your customer service, please check out our other videos and of course if you have a particular question, feel free to submit it below.

Step 2: Ensuring Commitments Match Schedules

Unpacking pre-requisites for scheduled promises

13 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Order Fulfillment & ATP
SD; MM; PP
MD04; CO09
Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. Hi, my name is Martin and we know the best way to learn is by doing so let's get into it. This video, we're going to focus on SAP's available to promise or ATP scope of check. So Kristie, we have introduced Step 1 already. If we were to sum it up, it was about promising against material you already have. Are you now going to explain to us the next step, which is promising against what we have scheduled? Why, yes I am, Martin. In this demo we're going to go back to the scope of check and look at some examples. Of what we would consider scheduled items. We're going to discuss whether we should or should not include them. And also how the system will react if we do. The integrity here is essential, we don't want to just make a promise we want to feel confident that we can keep it. Alright, I think we're ready for step 2 in our availability check. So if we think about available to promise as being the gateway into all the subsequent things that we try to do in the supply chain in order to satisfy that customer demand, what comes together to allow us to make a quality ATP check are all of these different pieces of this integrated diagram, right? So we have the requirements that we may be pre planning to so things like our forecast or orders, and then we are constantly getting new orders, and when we do that we're going out based on a rule set making a determination on what kind of promise we can provide to the customer. And it's not only what, but it's when, right? So we have to be at a certain point in our supply process before we're going to make that promise to the customer. So they may get some sort of estimated confirmation or acknowledgement up front, and then eventually they're going to get the actual full confirmation once we've hit that point. So just like if you were to go and try to place an order with Amazon and maybe they don't have enough units in stock, and so it gives you an estimated date or it acknowledges your order and then later fulfills the remaining information about when you're going to receive it. So in step one or stage one, we talk through inventory. So being able to promise against what you actually have. So that means that you have timely transactions, you've got good quality, robust cycle counting programs, you've looked at these materials and they're in pretty good shape, so you're ready to promise against what you have. Now we're going to talk about going a little bit further out into what we would consider some of the scheduled horizons, so things that we have on schedule. So that might be things that are externally procured and you're in a buy sell situation, these may be items from your supplier that have either been acknowledged by them or are in transit or on purchase order, it could be stock transfer orders or confirmed stock transfer orders, and it can be production, so it might be your production orders that are ready to rock and roll out on the manufacturing floor. So those are some of the things that we start to consider once we're into step 2 or stage 2. Now this is a big deal, getting there is an enormous accomplishment, it means your exception messages are relatively under control, you've got good housekeeping, you've got a good segment of materials we can go through and you can start to promise a little further out. You're doing capacity evaluation and leveling, you've got a finite schedule that's moving to the manufacturing floor. It's been through its pre flight checks so you know that you have material available, labor and capacity, and you're planning that really well and you're also sequencing it in a way that allows the manufacturing floor to go out and actually execute that schedule. So it's reasonable, realistic, and actionable. And at that point, when you have good schedule adherence and those activities are working harmoniously together, now we're at a good place where we can start to make those promises. And a lot of that is making sure also that you have the correct data or business rules in the system that match your business behaviors. So when we think about the anatomy of an availability check and we spoke a little bit about this in our last video. So if you haven't watched it yet, go back and watch the step one video where we talk about promising against inventory, we talk about the progression. So as you move from sales order into delivery, you will have a different level of finiteness in terms of what it is that you might want to consider. So once you get into deliveries you probably are at a place where you're checking to make sure you actually have that inventory on hand, you got stock and transfer from another facility, it's through quality inspection, whatever the case may be. But based on that level of confidence, because you're physically doing things with that product you're going to have a more stringent availability check versus a sales order. You still want to be really careful you're making a promise that you can keep and you're not making the promise until you're at a good level of confidence that you can keep it. But you have a little bit more room because really what you're flowing is information you're preparing to be able to execute that shipment versus the actual physical movement of the loading and pickpack process and transportation planning. And so there's a couple of different things that come together to form the scope of check, and that's the checking rule, so the stage of the process that you're in. So sales order or delivery or planned order versus production order create versus production order release and then the check in group that has been identified in the material master. Those two things, so the stage of the process and then the rule set that's been assigned, come together to build your scope of check. And in that, it's a list of inclusions and exclusions that help you to get to what is available to promise. And so that's both things that are coming in and things that are planned to go out like sales orders and deliveries that are already created and out there in existence. And so we're going to go back in and look at our availability overview here. So I switched materials on, I picked a different one this time, but I am going to go in and take another look at the scope of check and give you a little bit more explanation. Now, again, the scope of check I'm about to show you is very, very broad, it's assuming a very high level of maturity in the process and what I'm going to highlight for you here are some examples of what we would consider to be the scheduled horizon and how you should think about that. So, this particular material, so the end of lead time, it goes all the way out to the 25th of January, so that's almost two months out. You can see that we're planning on receiving 39 pieces between what we have already in place and what we have coming in on our next couple of planned orders. We also have 41 pieces that are expected to go out, 23 of those have been confirmed, so you can see we have a deficit here that we're trying to accommodate. So there's a portion of our total demand that we don't have any supply in place to cover that, that is going to pass the availability check. So you can see whether it's been confirmed or not right here. So this first order, all 15 pieces, the second order of the 5, only 2 have been confirmed and on the third order of the 21 only 6 have been confirmed. And we'll go through why that is in another video where we talk about the different options for confirmation. But what I'm going to do here is just pop into the scope of checks, if you've never taken a look at this, great opportunity for you to do that, and you'll see here there's all of these different considerations. And so when we were talking last time about inventory, we were talking over here on the stock overview, and we said typically you're going to include safety stock in that and then the next one to really consider are these two right here, stock and transfer. So if you have a high degree of confidence that those transactions are happening on a timely basis, that once something shows as in transfer, it's going to arrive at your facility in good time and in good accuracy. Same thing with quality inspection. If something is going into quality inspection, do you have a great deal of confidence that it's typically going to go off of quality inspection at the time you're expecting it to do so, and that the result of that quality inspection is generally pretty good. So those are some of the things that you would think through on the inventory side. That was a very quick recap of a longer conversation from a previous video. Once we come over here, now we're in more of the proposal stage, and I'm going to talk through some of the elements around schedules. So these are both your inward and your outward movements, and so if you come down here to this little section, reservations, dependent requirements, sales requirements, deliveries. For example, these are things that are other commitments that you might be making. So at the time of sales order create, you might do things like include delivery and sales requirements, depending on your environment that might also include reservations. When you get further along and you're in delivery, you may drop the sales requirements because that might span a very long period of time, maybe you've got sales orders out there for the next three months and deliveries out there for the next two weeks. So you want to be able to prioritize those requirements. You might drop sales requirements and just count deliveries. So considerations for what counts against your available balance for your outbound goods movements. And then we also have the piece where we want to start to think through what kinds of inbound we would want to include. And so this is going to be things like our purchase orders. It's going to be things like our production orders. And you'll see that there are different options for these based on the different level of firmness. So if we look here, you have the option. to either exclude production orders altogether, to take all production orders into account regardless of whether they're in create or release status, or to take only released production orders into account. So for example, a released production order is one that has been pre flight checked. So it has material, capacity, and labor available. It's been finitely scheduled, so it's been sequenced appropriately, and you have good schedule adherence, meaning that the production is likely to finish on time and move through the process at a quantity that is what the production order was requiring. So, those are the things that you would think about if you want to think about release. Now, if you're a little bit more confident, you could trust that the production order that was out there that had not been through all those processes, maybe it's in created status, but you've got really good adherence to the schedule, and even before you hit release status, you know that you're setting yourself up for success. You've got some materials that would be eligible there, then you can go a little bit further out and think about those production orders for inclusion. So similar thought process comes with purchase orders. So, what level of firmness does your purchase order need to be at before you would consider including it in your ATP check, and so you're going to want to look at what is going on with those suppliers and then be able to make a determination on how confident you are whether those purchase orders are going to arrive on time. So, really important to think through the different releases, levels of your production, and then also to think through how reliable those suppliers are for your procurement and whether you've accounted for lead times in all the right places. And the more your confidence builds in that, then the more likely you are to be able to go past just the inventory that you have on hand and now out into the schedule horizon where we really start to think through what it is that we have confidence in. And again, like all of our other master data settings, this is really around grouping and prioritizing, understanding how well that supply is under control, and how well our daily habits are working in terms of being able to use that cadence to keep the crazy chaos at bay and make sure that we're moving through the process in a good fashion. So step one with ATP, promising against what you have. Step two is being able to take a look at some of your scheduled elements like purchase orders that are out there with suppliers, the good deal of accuracy, stock transfers across facilities where you have a high degree of confidence, and production orders either in create or release status starting with release first and then working your way back into created. And if you can do that you're well on your way to a quality availability check where you can make and keep a promise. Whew! Okay, that was a challenging one to wrap up because there is so much to talk about, but the most important thing is being really honest on how predictable and stable the supply is. Today we explored a little bit of the scope of check. Got a good picture of what's considered scheduled. And discussed how we can be sure of whether we've got a fighting chance of including these items in the scope of check to make a promise that we can keep. Yeah, amazing, Kristie, thank you so much. Every client wants to know how to get here and be confident in what they are promising. So folks, if you want to learn more about ATP, scope of check, or be able to improve your customer service, check out our other videos and of course if you have a particular question submit it below.

Supplier Confirmation: Order Acknowledgement

Communication is key as confirmations ensure we stay aligned with our suppliers

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Contract & Supplier Management
P2P
MD04; ME22N
Howdy supply chain enthusiasts, Martin here. And today we're on a mission to uncover hidden value in your SAP system. So buckle up and let's get started. In this video, we're going to discuss one of the most valuable communication and collaboration tools that SAP has to offer. Supplier Confirmations Order Acknowledgement. Kelly, I know this is a hot topic. Please tell us more about this and why specifically is it so important? You bet, Martin. This is a key capability in SAP that is often underutilized. but can really change the game in the quality of the information that supports MRP and ATP, and it does not have to be difficult to set up or maintain. You're probably getting a lot of this information already. In today's demo, we're going to highlight. How this first step in supplier provided confirmations, the order acknowledgement, allows us to know that the message has been received. Passes the baton to the supplier to provide updates if the situation changes on their end. And allows SAP to stay informed of those changes. Let's go in and take a look. I love this topic because it is all about creating visibility and getting everyone, including SAP, on the same page so we can plan well, make smart decisions, and manage exceptions. Communication is key and the order acknowledgement is the first past communication with the supplier. The first thing we want to do is determine what kind of confirmation we would expect to see from our supplier. We would set that rule with the confirmation control key. This is master data that can be set in several different records in SAP and it tells us what kind of confirmation steps we expect to take a PO through before receiving the goods. You can see here, we're in the stock requirements list. Right from this screen, I can see that we have a few PO lines that look different from the others. Do you see this reference here to a shipping notification? This PO has changed status because there is a confirmation from the supplier. Let's go in and take a look at that. Here's the PO in question and it's automatically taken us to the line item we were just looking at. You can see here that there is a tab called confirmations. In this tab, we can see the confirmation control key. This is going to tell us what the types of confirmations are that we expect to see as the PO lives out. It might be expected to receive an acknowledgement from the supplier that they have the PO in hand and will deliver as requested. Or, on a different date than requested. In which case, we might get the exception message, so we're alerted that the date provided does not align with the current needs. That's great! Then we can have that conversation if needed. The supplier may confirm but may need to break the shipment into two different dates. We can handle that right from the confirmation as well and we don't have to go in and create new lines on the PO. We have a need and they've provided a delivery schedule. Sometimes, especially on longer lead time POs, something will happen either on our end or the supplier's end, and they may need to confirm back a change to their prior commitment. Even if this is bad news, we want to know about it, and our exception monitoring will help us know the size of the problem or if the change is going to be okay. Over time, the back and forth with the supplier may become richer and you may choose other types of communication requirements like advanced shipment notifications. That's very helpful for knowing where the supplier is in the process. So you can know what options you have when you need to request the supplier's increase on an order, decrease an order, speed the delivery up, or slow the delivery down. If it's already on its way, that's a very different conversation than if it's not even due to leave the building for two weeks. Knowing where we are in the process and when we expect those communications to happen is key. We then have another level of collaboration that helps us to know if we're ahead or behind, or if the message was simply not received. So how do you get started? Select suppliers that you are regularly engaged with and who are sending you this type of information today, even if it's via email. The information can get into the SAP through manual maintenance. It sounds like a lot, but if you're regularly maintaining dates anyways, this may work for you. You could use an upload tool and some basic SAP list reporting to create an easy way to communicate your order book to your suppliers. Allow them to send it back and then upload it. Or, there are standard EDI protocols that can be used if your supplier uses EDI or a portal. Start small for big gains and just keep growing over time. So let's bring this home with a few key takeaways. The use of confirmations and specifically order acknowledgements supports collaboration. Through two way communication. And creates the visibility for MRP controller, MRP, and ATP. Back to you, Martin. Cool stuff. Thank you, Kelly. Getting this communication out of your email and into the system is a fantastic step forward in supporting the speed and the quality of data necessary to compete in today's market. So, thank you. So folks, if you're curious about this and other related topics, please check out our video catalog. And of course, if you have a burning question or suggestion, please submit it below.

Supplier In-full Reliability

Optimize supplier performance for reliable in-full deliveries

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Contract & Supplier Management
IBP; P2P
MC$8
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, I'm Martin, and in this video we're going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's supplier in full reliability capability. So when used correctly supplier in full reliability reports will help an organization improve supplier performance by monitoring the reliability of their suppliers delivery quantity commitment. This is all about in full portion of the on-time in full KPI. So Kristie, tell me more. For sure Martin. Supplier in full reliability is a powerful feature when it's used correctly. We often focus on the on time, but neglect the in full. In this demonstration we're going to focus on three things. How this reporting tool is set up to reflect the rules of the business for quantity thresholds. How we can control and define the period of evaluation and drill down to look at trends versus outliers. And where it may be helpful to look at our delivery tolerances to help reduce noise and then focus on our areas of improvement when the quantity deviations are truly meaningful. So there's a variety of ways that we can look at our supplier performance in SAP and we're going to be exploring a number of those in our upcoming videos. But this one is really focused around the in full component of on time and in full. So if you think about it from the standpoint of is the supplier reliable in terms of how they are delivering the quantities that we are requesting from them? So in this report, there's a number of key figures that are available to us. So you'll see here we have our suppliers going down the left hand side of the screen, and then over here we have these key figures. These are our quantity variances, and these are defined at the purchase organization level. So you'll set your quantity tolerances there, and then as you are receiving against the purchase order, it's going to go ahead and start bucketing those for you, and so the middle one is typically your exact quantity. So in this case we set up our tolerances to be 10% under or 10% over. So if the supplier is within that, then it's going to show up for us in this middle column here. That's the good column. Next to that, if we move to the left, this means that they are under-delivering, and in this case it's 10 to 20%, and then over further to the left is the next category, which is under-delivering by 20 or more percent. Same thing over here to the right, now they're over-delivering by 10 to 20% and we're over-delivering by more than 20%. So the other thing that this does is it helps us to really fine tune our tolerances and our tolerances really should be done by different commodity types. So as you're working through and you understand what the agreements are with your suppliers, but also looking at the industry information so you know what the typical under and over delivery tolerances are by commodity, that can really help. And why is this important? Because you do not want to get that phone call every time the purchase order hits the receiving doc that they're delayed in receiving it in because of a quantity variance that falls within standard. However, you absolutely do want that call if it's something that needs to be caught at the dock and so you can have the conversation with the supplier. So we want to alert on the things that are important and differentiate where it matters and not on the things that are within the acceptable tolerance range. It also reduces the lifting on the purchase order to go in and close out. So let's do a little something here. Let's go ahead and sort this, I'm going to sort in descending order, so this is going to bring to the top the highest number where we have been really under-delivering on our purchase orders. And then I can start to drill in and see what's happening. So this is at the supplier level right now. So what happened with the supplier that they had 93 occurrences. I can then drill down either by material group, by plant or purchase organization, by the supplier's country of origin, which could be really important or by month. And so I'm going to go ahead and break this out by month, we're looking at about a six month range here, and I could see, oh, all of this, every single one of those occurrences, something happened specifically in September. And then I could drill in here to see what materials or material groups were involved and go in here and grab the materials. And I can see it was all on one particular material. So now I have some information where I can go through and either go, oh yeah, that thing happened in September I am aware of what happened that's been resolved, we haven't had any recurrences, that's good, I'm checking to make sure that it's staying steady. Or it's been happening a lot, I've got several occurrences spanning several different months or several different materials. Now I want to go in and have a conversation with the supplier. The other thing that's great about this report is that it flows to your buyer negotiation sheet, which is really helpful for having those periodic meetings with your suppliers to talk about on time and in full performance, price performance, all of those different things. So very helpful, and you can look at that both from a supplier perspective as well as a material perspective. We'll take a look at our on time portion of this in another demo, so make sure you keep an eye out for that and I hope this was helpful. So, in summary we have covered how supplier in full reliability allows you to be able to. Have productive conversations with your suppliers on their performance and opportunities for improvement. What can we do to support their success? How do we know where we may need to take action to protect against variability and volatility? And lastly, the capabilities to drill down to evaluate outliers versus ongoing trends that really need addressing. Thanks Kristie. It sounds like it's all about communication and collaboration. If we can identify where we're struggling we can work together to improve, I love that. Okay, so if you'd like to hear more about this feature and other features in SAP please feel free to check out our other videos and if you have a specific video request feel free to submit it below.

Supplier On-time Delivery

Streamline supplier punctuality with on-time, in-full (OTIF) metrics

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Contract & Supplier Management
IBP; P2P
MC$6
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, I am Martin, and in this video we're going to focus on how to take advantage of SAP's supplier on-time delivery capability. So when used correctly, supplier on-time delivery reliability can help organizations track supply performance and collaborate effectively to improve that performance. This is evaluating the on-time portion of the on-time in full KPI and is so critical to an organization's success in planning effectively with their suppliers. Okay, so Kristie, I know this is a KPI that's near and dear to your heart, tell us more. I'd love to Martin. Supplier on time delivery reliability is a powerful feature when you use correctly, and in this demonstration we're going to focus on three key things. First, how we can set up meaningful thresholds that drive performance improvements. Second, the intelligence that comes from drilling down or evaluating trends across time. And third, how to open conversations with our suppliers to collaborate for improvement. There are a variety of ways for us to track our supplier performance in SAP, and this is one of the reports that will help us with that. So if you think about supplier performance for on time and in full, this is the on time report to help us understand what is happening. So this is MC$6, is the report that you would be after and you can come in here and you can run it by a variety of different selection criteria, by country of origin, by supplier, purchase organization, or plant, and then for a date range. And what it's going to produce for you is this little grid that lets you know how these suppliers are performing over that period of time, based on the delivery date tolerances that you've defined. And so once you've defined your delivery date tolerances and you're starting to receive information into these buckets, then you can rename these columns to reflect that. So I can tell you that this middle column here is typically what you would consider to be on time with whatever tolerances that you have set up, and then this might be a certain number of days early, and then beyond that. So let's say that this was 3 days early and then this was anything greater than 5 days early. Same thing over here, 3 days late, anything greater than 5 days late, and you're able to start to drill down and see what is happening. So let's take, for example, let's grab some of our suppliers that have been struggling with being a little bit late and I'm going to sort this in descending order so it pops everything up to the top, and I can come in here and actually start to drill down and see what's happening. So this particular supplier you'll see is actually a little all over the place, right? So they're very little in terms of being on time, but they've got quite a bit on both of the outer ranges. So then you can start to think through what could help that supplier to be able to improve their performance. The other thing that it will help us to do is evaluate our lead time performance and see if there are any adjustments that we need to make. So it's very important for us to be able to hold our suppliers accountable to their stated lead time, but it's also very important for us to plan according to the reality of when it is that they're going to deliver. So we'll have some other conversations around how to accomplish that in terms of your master data but what we can do right here is we can actually drill down and see where this problem is occurring. So I can go for this particular supplier and say, okay, how did they look across the month? Was there one particular month that they were struggling with or were there several, drill down by month, okay and so I can see the spread here. So really no deliveries yet this month and then if I look at the periods of evaluation spanning back across time, there are definitely some months that had more challenges than others. So the majority, for example, of the lates that fell into that mid-range happened in September of 2022, so something may have happened there. The other thing we can do is use this to help make sure that our processes are going well on the dock, that we're receiving things in, in a timely fashion, that our goods receipt information is accurate, real time and up to date, and that we're judging our suppliers fairly in terms of what we set out and expectations for them. So if I was curious what happened in the month of September, I could even go into this month and then I could drill down a little bit more. So when every time you're drilling down, you're looking a little further, a little deeper into that particular drawer, and I could go into material or I could go into supplier country of origin. I could even go in just by material group and start to work my way through what is actually happening. So just out of curiosity, let's see how many materials were involved in this. I'll choose material and let it roll and then I can see, oh, there was one particular material where we were having issues and that's going to explain the majority of it. So now I can think about what happened, understand if that was an outlier or an isolated incident, and then really focus on the trends. So things that are recurring month over a month, or where there's a variety of materials that are involved to see how we can help that supplier to be able to improve their performance. This will also flow through to your buyer negotiation sheet, which is great for periodic review in terms of on time and in full performance, as well as price performance, and you can look at that both from a supplier and a material level. So really good and helpful information to have when you're having those periodic meetings with your suppliers. So in summary, we have covered how supplier on time delivery reliability allows us to. Improve performance through collaboration. Identify where intervening measures are needed or necess. And define what on time means to our organization. There are so many tools out there for supplier scorecarding. The value of this analytical tool is that it's available right here in SAP anytime we wish to look at it, and by populating these structures with the definitions that are meaningful for our particular business and enables another valuable tool, the buyer negotiation sheet. Thank you Kristie. Using this feature opens a door for productive collaboration with our suppliers. Through this collaboration, we get miles closer to aligning our plans, schedules, and actual delivery. That's harmony for everyone. If you'd like to know more about this particular topic and another one that Kristie mentioned around buy negotiation sheets, there are many videos on this. Please feel free to go check out our video catalog and if you have any other suggestions feel free to submit them below.

Switch Drilldown or Drilldown By

Learn how SAP helps aggregate and disaggregate data to prioritize and analyze trends

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP Optimization
P2P; PTM; DM
MC.9
Hello and welcome, future supply chain experts. My name is Martin, and today we're going to explore how we can tap into the untapped potential of your SAP system. Really dig deep. Okay, let's get going. In this video, we're going to be discussing a literal application of digging deep into your SAP data. There are two key features that are prevalent in many of the reporting analytic tools. Switch drilldown, and drilldown by. We have Jake in the house to support this today's conversation. So Jake, tell us more about these two powerful tools and what we can learn from them. Hey Martin, listen. It's all about organizing our data for easy review. But when to use switch, drilldown versus when to use drilldown by can be confusing at first. So as you say, the best way to learn is by doing, and in this case, we find it just takes a little bit of practice. The best way to gain some experience is to think through a real life question that you're trying to answer and then explore the different cuts on the data to surface the insights that you need. So let's go in and take a look. All right, welcome to this Reveal TV segment where we're talking briefly about using the switch drilldown and drilldown by functions in SAP. So let's go. First, we're in SAP and we arrive at a transaction where switch drilldown and drilldown by are available to use. For this example, let's use the MC.9 transaction. So we've entered in our selection criteria for analysis, such as the plant or plants in the date range, keeping in mind that this can be refined even further to what may be relevant to you or your team. One thing I love about SAP is how well we're able to refine these data sets. Next, we need to choose our starting point if it's different than the default, and that's switch drilldown. As with most things in SAP, there are multiple ways to get there. You can either get to switch drilldown in the top menu under View, or you can click this button. Now most of these buttons aren't labeled, so just hover your mouse to see what they do. Luckily for us, this one's conveniently spelled out for us. So let's say we want to begin at the plant level. So we click in the plant radio button, and then green check. This will list the plants for which we want to analyze one of our key figures, and those are the figures across the top. Now that we've chosen our starting point, I want to talk briefly about a question I often hear. If you remember, we had a date range in our selection criteria, and it's important to note that the numbers you see in the key figures are the sum of those dates for each plant during this chosen analysis period. So if this were your business, you might look at this start point and think, wow why are these numbers so high? And that's why. In the same manner, if we were to use date as a starting point, we would see the sum of all plants for each date in our selected range. So now let's utilize the drilldown by function. Like I said earlier, there's more than one way to arrive there. You can either click in the view menu or if you hover here, you see the drilldown by button. Let me demonstrate a common error here. You must choose a characteristic value in order to proceed. And those are these top level starting points. In this case, it's the plants. If we click the drilldown by button, you'll see a red error message if you miss this step. So now then, let's go deeper into one of these characteristics. Click in the field, click the drilldown by button, we're going to choose Month to look at the information over this time period. From here, we can slice and dice the criteria in a bunch of different ways, but we've chosen a plant, we've gone to the date, and now we see the data laid out over this date range. It's really great for spotting inventory or usage trends over time. As always, walk yourself through some real world scenarios in your business and share what you discover. You're not going to hurt anything by, going through these data sets and drilling down further into different areas. You're going to further refine your data and see what's going on? I'll end this by saying that we can find switch drilldown and drilldown by all over SAP. It's available in financial accounting, it's available in purchase to pay using, for example, transaction ME80FN, it's available in sales and distribution, which is OTC, it's available in order to cash in transaction VA05, it's available in plan to make, for example, transaction COOIS. So now when you see the switch dial down button from now on, you'll know what to do. Take a dive and be curious. So that's a little sneak peek or reminder on these powerful tools that help us organize our data to achieve insights. Some parting words of advice though. Go in and be curious. This is very safe functionality to explore. Just make sure that you're clear on what it is that you're trying to answer and the level of data that you're using to answer that question. Lastly, show and share. Get more eyes on what it is that you're doing and chat it through with your friends and colleagues. They may even have an idea or see something interesting that you can explore together. Thank you, Jake. That's personally a tool I actually use quite often. Something that helps me be able to drilldown into the actual answers to the key questions they may have. Very valuable. Thanks again, Jake. So folks, if you want to know more about these key features, feel free to check out our video catalog and of course, if you have a specific question, feel free to use our video chatbot, it will recommend some videos for you.

The Beauty of Dynamic Safety Time

Dynamic Safety Time sets adaptive buffers to tackle time-sensitive challenges effectively

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
P2P; PTM
MD04; MD03
Hey there supply chain enthusiasts, Martin here with a topic to help you tackle a beast of a challenge. SAP offers a variety of ways to tackle variability, volatility, and disruptions in the supply chain. From conventional static safety stock, to dynamic ranges of coverage, to safety time, they all have their place and purpose. And so long as you're not stacking them on the same material, all have a place in the planner's toolkit. But did you know that we also have something called dynamic or time period dependent safety time? This is an opportunity worthy of conversation. Hey Sam, I know you're here to talk us through time period dependent safety time and some of the ways it could be useful. Please help us understand what exactly it is and how we could use it. Yep Martin, it's a good question. We're always going to be dealing with challenges in the supply chain. The question is, what we can do to provide practical protection and risk mitigation without sacrificing inventory performance. So, we want to protect, but not be overprotective, and one of the things we need to consider specifically with safety time is that there are rules for when it should and should not be used. First and foremost, it should be specific in purpose and intended to be a temporary solution. With time dependent safety time, we can go a step further, and when we want to apply it, pre plan for a known temporary constraint, and then return it to normal. It does require a bit of setup and configuration, so think of this as a pre planned events or known time dependent constraints. And for those of us on S/4 and living in the Fiori world, there's an app for that that makes things easier. This is the beauty of solution for some of our most beastly challenges. Let's dive into SAP and explore, I'm excited to give you the tour. Let's go to homebase. Here we are in the stock requirements list and we're looking at a material that has had some challenges in consistent delivery. It currently does have some safety time in place. I'm going to go into the Material Master, head to the MRP2 tab, and scroll down a little bit. These are the current safety time settings. Having safety time in place means we want to follow the demand and not add additional inventory on shelf. But we want the inventory to appear to be due earlier. Now, we may be protecting against variability in demand, in which case we want it on the shelf early because we're not confident in the timing of the demand but we don't want to bring in more than what the demand plant states. Or, we have a process performance issue that we're trying to address. We know it may be late and we're working to improve the performance with that supplier. Safety time should be here for a specific reason and should be intended to be temporary. We can put a note in the material memo for what, why, and how long. The other thing we can do here in the stock requirements list is that we can toggle the safety time on and off to understand the impacts. Speaking of impacts, sometimes we know we've got a tricky situation coming up. Think port congestion at peak times, holiday season, Chinese New Year, things we would proactively go in and try to plan around or pull orders forward for. Well, when we do that, A, it's a beast of a job because we have to do all that manually or get creative, which can be risky, and B, MRP doesn't know why we're doing what we're doing and we get a ton of exception messages. Now, whenever we change key master data, which includes all safety stock , we're going to get some exception messages. There's always a transition period. But you don't want your exceptions firing up and telling you to delay something you've intentionally sped up because you need safety time in place. That is counterproductive. Now, you can see as we've been talking, I've been adding in time dependent safety time. And the beauty of that is that going to plan for a temporary beast of a challenge and then return planning to normal after it's through. It's candy season in Chicago and we can't get trucks. So, I've set this for November 5th to December 5th. Let's run MRP just to get a nice, refreshed line of sight on planning. Yes, yes, I'm sure. Run, baby, run. Okay, good job, MRP. Now, I'm going to go back to the stock requirements list , and let's take a moment to toggle safety time on and off. There we go. Hopefully a new trick to add to your toolkit. We live for aha moments and contemplative looks around here. I really hope this gives you some ideas around how to keep the system and the planning engine that is MRP up to speed on known periods of challenge. It is no fun having to go in and manually manipulate dates or expedite a process off cycle. This gives us an opportunity to plan in advance and meet the challenges in a more elegant way. After all, in supply chain, all we truly have to work with for planning is quantity and time. Hey Sam, thank you so much. I'm a big proponent of MRP running with a full deck of insight. So this is an interesting tool to add to the toolkit. It's a different way to rise to a common challenge. So thank you. Good stuff. Hey folks, if you are looking for some more details on this topic or others, feel free to use the chatbot to recommend some videos for you.

The Plan That Follows the Demand

How MRP decides to plan demand vs. inventory levels and how it reacts accordingly

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; P2P; PTM
MD04; MM03; MD02
Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Martin here, and in this video, we're going to discuss the plan that follows the demand. Hmm, I'm not sure what to make of that. Don't all plans follow the demand, Steven? Clearly not. Take it away. Tell us more. You bet, Martin. SAP offers two broad categories of planning. Consumption based planning, so things like reorder point planning, consumption based forecasting, etc. And another category called deterministic planning. In deterministic planning, we're following the demand program and responding to that demand program following the rules of our planning strategy. This may include sales orders, stock transfers, forecasts, requirements that support our subcontractors or our own manufacturing. This is the type of planning that most of us are most familiar with. So today we're going to go in and take a look at how MRP follows the demand to determine what we need, how many we need, where we need it, and when. We'll also explore a couple of different MRP types, look at the results, and lastly we'll show how a top level change on the sellable goods affects the plan for a component. Now let's dive in and take a look. Now let's go look at this plan that follows the demand. This is the world that most of us live in. We have a demand program that can be made up of several different requirements, and we're having MRP respond to that demand to plan our replenishment. In essence, this is the point of MRP, to supply the demand. So here we are in our stock requirements list. We can see that this material has a forecast or planned independent requirement, and that it also has a plan for replenishment. Every time the stock level dips down too far, there's a response to try and supply. This is the plan that follows the demand. Now there are many master data rules that fuel the MRP engine, but two of the big heroes are the MRP type and the planning strategy or strategy group. Let's go look at the material master and find these fields. The first is MRP type. The MRP types fall into really two categories with many options in each. The first are what we refer to as deterministic planning, aka, the ones that tell MRP it's okay to follow that demand. The second fall into the category of consumption based planning. You have the option to plan based on history or consumption or future requirements. Let's stop by the MRP 3 tab now. This is where we'll see the strategy group that contains the planning strategy. This controls how we respond to or supply the demand. We could be make to stock, make to order, or assemble to order. There are lots of colors in this coloring box as well. Plenty of options to choose from, and we could get really deep into that pool. But the point for today is simply that they work together to produce the results. Now that we have some orientation, I want us to experiment a little bit. Let's do this. Let's go back to the plan and let's change it. We're going to go in and manually adjust the forecast for the purpose of this experiment. Just one period, nothing too crazy, but let's put in a big enough number that we can see the cascade of the results. All right, cool. Now let's run MRP. Yes, yes, we're sure. It's okay to follow that demand. Now let's look at the results. We can see here that a whole bunch of things happened. We have multiple requirement changes because the demand transferred throughout the BOM and then the supply plan was adjusted in response. Let's go look. So here's our top level finished good that we just adjusted and this is one of the materials that goes into making that top level item. This happens to be a phone case and the component is the plastic resin. When the plan follows the demand, and if the component also has an MRP type that supports following the demand, you have a fully linked and very responsive plan. Sometimes that's great, and sometimes it poses some real challenges. If you'd like to hear more about how to address some of those challenges, we have a series of videos coming that start with the word decoupling. Well, welcome back. I want to leave you with a few highlights about the plan that follows the demand. First, it's highly responsive to the latest information. Second, the supporting master data for planning is paramount. And lastly, as we all know, a squeaky clean system is foundational to allowing MRP and ATP to perform well. Let's get it right so we can plan with integrity and make promises we can keep. Thanks, Steven. Leaning into exploring the different options for how we plan exploring how data integrity and proper data rules actually matter and work together to produce the results we're looking for is definitely worth the undertaking. Hey folks, if you want to learn more about this topic and other forecast based topics, please check out our video catalog. And if you have any specific questions, submit it below.

The Subcontracting Cockpit

Discover the latest features in SAP's enhanced Subcontracting Cockpit

6 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
P2P; PTM
ME2ON
Hey everyone, Martin here. And every once in a while, we have a transaction to share that surprises a lot of folks. And today we're talking about the evolution of the subcontracting stock monitor. This new version, which adds finesse and utility to raw functionality. I'm so excited to introduce Rutul to you, who will walk us through why this transaction is sometimes not present, and will share some of the key differences between both versions of the subcontracting stock monitor. Rutul, love to have you here today, take us away. Hello, Martin. Yes, I really like this new version of an always powerful, but not always flexible transaction. It's an excellent evolution. This transaction is the new place to be. People will like it much better and it has all the same fundamental elements. This is still a strong cockpit transaction. And it's great for supporting and achieving process adherence. Let's go in and take a look. Okay, I am in the subcontracting cockpit transaction ME2ON. I am going to run this transaction for my plant 3000. You could do that for multiple plants, or a single plant, or a vendor. You can choose how you want to run it. For this one, I am going to run for plant 3000 , click execute and right from the get go, it's a very different look and very different, feel from the subcontracting monitor. It's much better, much cleaner, and easy on eyes, right? But it also has a lot of additional information. So, first of all I am going to expand this line item here, and you will see that in addition to the material information and stock information and overage, where we are short, it also tells me the PO number. So, in cockpit monitor you do not have that information. Now, it also hassame functionality as monitor, but it has even more. You can still create deliveries, do post course issue, delete, reservation, stock overview, go to stock requirements screen that's also there in the monitor. But one of the cool things is that now you have PO number, a line item number, and so on as well. In this transaction, you can select a particular PO line item, and actually when you create delivery, click on create delivery, now you have, hey, you have this information already filled out. But the additional functionality here is that you can change your movement types, you can change your plant, storage location, shipping point. Those pieces of information you can change and make a decision on whether we need to change that or not, and then create before creating delivery. What it will also do is that it will tie this delivery directly into the PO,for the purchase order line item history. So now you can directly, quickly take a look at it, right? Then, you can also change your layouts, for example, if you are running for multiple plants, you can change the layout let's look at how you can do sort order. In a sort order, I want to look at my plant summation at the plant level and then I want to have the plant, the vendor, and the material. So I'm going to select the summation level subtotals as plant, I'm going select it, and I'm going to move it on top. So now you'll see the subtotals at the plant level, then the vendor level, and then at the material level. I'm going to click OK, and then you can have that. Then in addition, you can do the refresh list quickly. So if you are in this transaction for a while and you are taking a lot of different decisions and a lot of different actions, you want to refresh the data so that it actually refreshes the information for you as the other members are also making decisions and making changes you have the most up to date information as well. You can also go to the stock requirement list. Just like the monitor, you have your stock requirement list, all the information is already passed from the cockpit to the stock requirement list and now you are in your stock requirement list transaction . Okay, You can go to the stock overview, so the material number 2156, stock overview, and now you have 2156, the plant is 3000, and then how much quantity do you have on order, in unrestricted use, you have that information directly. you also have post codes issue capability, just like the other one. You can select, again, it will allow you to change the information, if you need to, and make the decision on the fly, rather than the fixed information that you have in the stock subcontracting monitor. Alright, these are some of the key differences. Cockpit transactions are all encompassing transactions that will allow you to do much more things than the subcontracting monitor. Welcome back. This new version of the subcontracting stock monitor. Really packs a punch. It acts as a single source of truth. Helps keep us on track, and closes the loop on the entire process. That's good stuff, Rutul, thank you so much. Subcontracting is a valuable and much needed opportunity for many organizations. So much so that we're actually releasing a whole series of videos to support this specific conversation. Thank you again for sharing your thoughts and experience with us today Rutul. So folks, if you want to learn more about the subcontractor monitor and this whole series of videos we're going to have around this, just check out our video catalog. Of course, you can always use the chatbot for any kind of help you need.

The Subcontracting Stock Monitor

Discover how SAP's Subcontract Stock Monitor enhances operational visibility

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
P2P; WM
ME2O
Hey folks, Martin here. If you're about maximizing the ROI on your SAP system, you've come to the right place. In this video, we're going to delve into another great tool for visibility and execution. Today's topic is on the subcontracting stock monitor, and Monique is here to introduce us to it. Monique, tell us more about the stock monitor. Hey Martin, I spent many years working in the warehouse, so tools that bring planning and operations together are near and dear to my heart. So today we're going to take a brief tour of the subcontracting stock monitor, which is like the backbone to the subcontracting process. It's where you want to be for managing inventory, POs, and transactions related to the subcontracting process. This is what we call a cockpit transaction, where we can manage to get many functions from one place. Think of it as your home base. It also helps keep our processes on track. So let's go in and take a look. So let's dig in. Now this tool I'm about to show you is not pretty, but it's highly functional. It's been around for a while, and I have to say again, as a warehouse operations person, I think this is a great opportunity to bring a cross functional team into one place where they can pass the baton and execute the process. So here we are at the selection screen this is where it all starts. As you can see here, we have some solid selection criteria to generate our list of materials to review. First up is the vendor. This is the supplier of the subcontracting service. Below that is the component, which is super nice, and also the star of the stock monitor. These are the components that need to be provided to the subcontractor for them to do their thing. Next is the assembly, or the finished or semi finished good product that will be delivered back to you. From there, we get into some of the usual suspects, plants, dates, etc. As well as some inclusion and exclusion criteria. For today's discussion, I know we don't have a crazy amount of data out there, so we'll run it fairly wide open. As expected, pretty quick run. Let's take a second to ground ourselves. The purpose of the subcontracting stock monitor is to monitor the stock at our subcontractors. It helps us to identify if we have stranded stock, perhaps intentionally if they are storing it for us, or perhaps unintentionally. This happens when there's an overshipment to the subcontractor, a miscount, or an error in master data that causes us to incorrectly consume the goods during the receiving process. We can see the results of all of our sins right here, so let's take a look. We also have some items where there is upcoming requirements. In this case, we can see we have an item that has sufficient supply and a couple others that don't. Here, we can see PO information, which also tells us when the components need to be there to set the subcontractor up for success. Now when we see we need to ship more inventory over, we get to one of my favorite parts and where it becomes very operationally relevant. Right from here, I can select the item and initiate the transfer process. I can even post goods issued to complete the transfer. You'll see the movement type 541. Components shipped to the subcontractor are considered vendor provided stock. This means we still own the inventory even though it is on their premises and within their control. So the tools here help us monitor the state of their inventory position, identify stragglers or anomalies in the inventory or receiving and conversion process, and make sure we're getting inventory to them on time so we can set them up for success every time. And that is a whole lot of value all from one place. There is so much to explore in the subcontracting stock monitor. It allows us to make sure we're closing the loop on in flight transactions and our inventory is looking clean, clear, and under control. We can easily see if we are running ahead or behind, even get transactions and start our inventory moves right from the same place. And with the end to end process capabilities of this transaction, we can have folks across functions from planning to warehouse ops all work and transact from the single source of truth. And that makes me happy. Once again, thank you, Monique. Great insights. Subcontracting is a valuable and much needed opportunity for many organizations. So much so that we're releasing a whole series of videos to support this particular conversation. So folks, if you want to know more about that particular topic and some of the subcontracting things we've been talking about today, please check out our other video catalogs. And Monique, once again, thank you for sharing your experiences. And folks if you have another question or suggestion please submit it below.

There’s Only So Much Space: Replen to Max Stock

Discover a lot size key designed to solve space constraints

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
Demand & Supply Planning
P2P; PTM
MD04; MM02; MD03
Hello supply chain aficionados, Martin here. And in this time, we're going to explore how SAP can help us when we have so much space for a material, and we want to take full advantage of that allocated space by replenishing to the max stock level. Let's say, for example, that we have a tank, a silo, a shelf of dangerous goods or storage area, available for storage, and we want and need to control the amount on hand. There are a couple of ways to limit the replenishment to a maximum, but today we're going to specifically explore how to take full advantage of the space available by combining the max with an instruction to MRP to replenish to the max as well. Sean Elliffe is the king of inventory optimization and I'm going to ask him to help us talk through what this looks like and how to use the replenishment levels of maximum stock to be able to get what we need. So Sean, take it away. Thank you, Martin. Encountering a physical or regulatory space constraint is a definite challenge. Did you know that SAP can actually help you to pre plan to have the right level of inventory? Think about it as filling up to the max fill line. But planning to stay at or just beneath, depending on the other lot size rules that you may encounter. Now, you may choose to work this in conjunction with a reorder point, which gets you closer to physical reality due to a delayed trigger, or you may choose to plan in advance to the demand and then continue to refine as you get closer to replenishment time. You might then combine this with a schedule agreement and distinguish between a just in time release and a forecasted schedule. We can get quite sophisticated with this, that's for sure. So to get started today, let's keep it simple. Let's jump into SAP and we'll look at replenishing to max stock level using appropriate lot size key, a minimum lot size, a rounding value, and a max stock level so we do not exceed it. After all, the best way of learning is by doing. We are so spoilt for choices on the ways in which we can set up our planning. There are options to fulfill almost any business scenario and today we're going to produce a simple planning situation that will allow us to readily see the impact of three key master data fields and their settings. The large size key, the maximum stock level and a minimum order quantity. So let's jump into our stock requirements list and what we've done is we've set this up for material PLA black in plant 1000 and this material is our black plastic and supports production of our seasonal phone holder. Now we are storage constrained on Gaylord boxes at this particular facility and so we want to make sure that we have 1, 300 pounds of plastic resin in this facility at any given time. Now, we could use reorder points or deterministic planning to achieve this, depending on our requirements. And to keep the focus on lot size, let's keep the PD MRP type in place. From our stock requirements list, what we can do is we can easily go and make the changes and update the material master. A good way to try out this new technique is to just change one thing at a time, not everything at the same time, just one at a time and to check the results. So that's what we're going to do today. We'll build on our planning results as we go. So first, let's simply change the lot size key, which is over here, from two weeks to HB that's replenished to max, and then of course we have to put in place a maximum stock level, which is 1,300 pounds, which we spoke about. And what are we going to do is we're going to save that so that the master data is now correct. And then we're going to run MRP and just see what's happened and how things have changed. So good. Let's go and take a look at that and see what's happening. So here's our MRP, we're running it , off she goes, yes, we have. And this is what we looked like before we made the changes. Now I'm going to just simply refresh and then let's see as an outcome, what has changed. And there you have it. So we can see now based on the rate of demand that we're getting and the proposals that we need, it's taken us to the 1,300 max that we want. And that's really cool, isn't it? But maybe, maybe I'm not quite happy with this. I think we'll add a minimum order quantity, maybe, and a rounding value. So how do we do that? The same way we did early on, we go back to our material master. So I go to environment, change the material, I can see there's my max stock, which I changed my HB, which I changed as well. And this time, what I'm wanting to do is I'm going to add a minimum lot size. So my minimum lot size here is going to be 300. So that's the MOQ minimum order quantities. And at the same time, I'm going to put in a rounding value and the rounding value is going to be 100. So it's going to say, rounded off in hundreds. Now before we go back and run MRP, think about this use case. Maybe you have a Kanban in place, but you aren't yet fully taking advantage of SAP's Kanban board. To get started, you could set a maximum stock level that reflects the total value of your cards and a rounding value of a single card value. Pretty cool, right? Okay. So I've got one more for you. You have a silo that you want to replenish when it hits its footer. So you change your MRP type to a reorder point, we let it replenish to the maximum stock level to fill it up. You may still need some physical control. But this will get the orders in place for a just in time call off and provide a forecast for your suppliers So, so many good options. So let's do the following. Let's save what we've done now. Once again, let's go and run MRP, there's our MRP run, made the changes in the background and now let's see what's happened. If we go back to the stock requirements here is our snapshot of what it was before we made the changes, and if we hit the refresh button, you're going to see the changes that got made. You'll notice those changes that got made down the bottom because we brought in rounding values and minimum orders, these dependent requirements in terms of new supply have adjusted themselves. And you can see that they won't plan to replenish over the max with the introduction of the minimum order quantity and the rounding value, we've further throttled it back until we have planned to have enough room. And so my friends, that is how to build up a planning situation. Get curious, explore, and make it happen. Welcome back from our demo. Before we release you into the wild to go about your day, I want to give a couple of key points. First, as with all planning related settings, the settings controlling your replenishment to max stock level require regular review. And if you find that you need to be more precise and the supplier is nearby, well, consider moving to a reorder point MRP type with an HB lot size key. Second, this feature has many alternative uses and there are also alternatives to achieving a similar result. If you're trying to achieve a pseudo Kanban, that's very possible with container sized rounding values and a max stock level that represents the number of cards. Or using the actual Kanban functionality in SAP might provide a more accurate status for the stock for your use. Last but not least, this process requires management, space is critical constraint, and someone is going to be struggling if the goods are not flowing as you would expect them. Stay in close contact with the floor and be prepared to refine as necessary. Good stuff, Sean. Thank you. Those are some great insights and wonderful ways to engage and be curious. Thank you for the walkthrough and of course helping us brainstorm through this. Hey folks, if you want to know more about this particular topic, feel free to check out our video catalog. And if you're struggling to find a video, use the chatbot that will help you actually recommend a video for you to watch.

Transfer Order Research

Sort and view by storage type, transfer order, material, group, and bin

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LX06; LX07; LX24
Hey folks, welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Martin here, and in this video, we're going to focus on researching transfer orders within the warehouse. So Steve, with known transfer orders are used for all movements in the warehouse, I can imagine there may be many ways to research these, is that correct? Exactly, Martin. Typically, warehouse folks, when researching TOs, will use LT23 to view the details and history of where materials went and why. But in this demo, we will touch on a few other of the less common transactions that may be used to expedite or simplify the TO research where needed. Let's jump right into SAP, where I'll demonstrate. The use of a few of the tools. And explain some of the features that may be valuable to you and your warehouse team. Researching transfer orders are absolutely critical in your warehouse. A lot of users, if they know the material number, will go straight into T code LT24. You could enter the material number, you can grab all TOs, enter specific dates, and then it'll give you the actual TOs or movements for everything within this material. LT23 is where most people live and this is really all things about your TOs. So you can go all TOs, if I enter a specific date range, I'll just go very recent here because it could be overwhelming. And this is just my default, but you get all these fields in here, which is the biggest amount of data, which could be overwhelming, right? So a lot of people will say variants if some of this information is specific or important to them, but again, very overwhelming. But we'll talk about these next few, where if you just need to go in and these are the most uncommon T codes. So I'll jump into LX11 and this is going to be a little more higher level data. You just enter your warehouse number, you have the ability to select only open TOs, but in this case, we'll just go ahead and execute that wide open. It sorts by TO number in sequential order, but then you just get this amount of information. Higher level, not as much. You just see the TO, the create, if it's open, confirmed, if it's tied to a material document and by who. So not all that information from LT23, but just sorting by TO number, you get some of that details there. I'm going to go back and go to the next LX12 and it looks a little similar to LT23. You get a little more information here and this is actually what's going to be in the report once we execute. So enter it there and it's more of that grid format. And this is just simply where did that material go from and to. It's simple bin to bin by TO number material, what I like is you get the description in there, but really you would go into LX12 if you just want to know if it was tied to the material document, your source storage type and your destination with the quantities. That's really all it's intended to do is to bring forward that information. I would probably use this one, I think a little more than LX11 because this is just, again, give me the facts, give me the details of who, what, where, when, why. And then probably the most high level one too, if you're trying to see your movements by storage type, you'll use LX13, and this is nice because you can enter again, specific date range. I'll just go ahead and hit all TOs, I'll run this wide open for now, I'll show you this view first. And this just simply breaks down by storage type, how many TOs, and it rolls up the amount of TOs that were in there and here you can see that's a pretty large date range. So I'm going to go back and narrow that date range back just to this year, it'll give you a better picture of what's been going on. LTOs, and you can see we were doing some testing in our system, but I received in a lot from 902 and that correlates right back into D02. So little less information because I scaled back my date range there, but just simply shows what is my activity really? What are my movements per storage type? So obviously you're probably going to be using more storage types than just these ones if you're traditionally running a warehouse with all the operations. But it just breaks down per storage type, so it's nice to see that movement there. So,went over LX 11, 12, 13, some of the other ones that we covered in the beginning, you probably know about. But there's a lot of standard tools out there in order to help you research your TOs and movement types throughout your warehouse. Welcome back. In this demo, we've covered. A few different reports that may be used to research transfer orders in different ways. Like many other things in SAP, there are various reports that bring forward similar information. Some of those transactions allow you to get what you need a lot faster than others. Great point, Steve, thank you. That's really good stuff and I can certainly see the value that the warehouse team might have with a few more of these tools in their tool belt. So folks, if you want to learn more about these videos and have more tools in your tool belt, please check out the other videos in the catalog that we have and of course, if you have a question, please submit it below.

Transfer of Possession: It's Ours at Port

Proper Port Receiving: Steps to take possession and handle physically arrived goods

5 min
New
SAP S/4HANA®
Procurement & MRP
P2P; WM
ME21N; MIGO
Hello, SAP supply chain aficionados. Martin here, and today we're on a quest to unlock the hidden treasures within your SAP system. Ready to reveal some full potential? Let's jump straight into it. Today we're going to dig into a topic that has been popping up for several of our clients. How does SAP support taking possession of goods at a port or origin? How can you readily see that the supplier has done their part, but the goods are not physically at the location, physically inspected, received or put away? Today, we're going to have a brief overview of this important capability in SAP. Dave's going to tell us more about what we can do around standard procedures to allow for this process and the associated information and the statuses to flow in SAP. Dave, take us away. Hi Martin. Yes, this is an area where we've seen some very creative workarounds. But this is not an uncommon practice, and there is a standard solution. It's a two step goods receipt process, which allows us to acknowledge the transfer position, kick start the payment terms, and still have visibility into the stage of processing we're in. For example, if you take possession at port, you don't want to show the goods as fully received and available immediately for use. There is an expected process to facilitate this arrangement. So today, we'll go in and get an overview of the basics. I will show you a PO that's in flight and how the movements which trigger the changes in status, which enables the different activities to occur. Let's go in and take a look. This demonstration is going to show how we take ownership of a product at the shipping location. It could be external, it could be international. We have to create a purchase order. purchase order is created and, once we receive the goods, in fact in this case, we take ownership of the goods almost immediately. purchase order number ends in 284. So what I want to do is now process a MIGO 107. So I'm gonna do a goods receipt for purchase order and the goods receipt movement type is a 107. 107 puts it into goods receipt block stock. 107, here we go. Quantity that I need to put in 450 units. What's on the delivery note? I'm putting it into my, block stock. On completion of the 107. These goods are now owned by my company. The next step is now to process the goods receipt. Once the goods arrive physically at my warehouse, I now actually want to put them into my unrestricted stock so I can use them. This could take a number of days, but when the goods arrive, I am ready to process them. I can indicate what quantity was received at the dock. So I'm putting in the same quantities. I can indicate where I want to post it to, in this case, it's going to my store location, finished goods store location, and I can then close that receipt and these goods now belong to us and are actually in our warehouse. Welcome back from our little basics overview. Today we saw how the 107 and 109 movement types, triggered by the way we set up the PO, facilitates a process where we acknowledge the supplier has sent the goods. It's now in our hands to handle the logistics of getting it to our facility and the subsequent process of making it available for use. This creates much needed visibility. Allows us to meet the payment terms as agreed without additional math or manual intervention. And still allows for subsequent processing if an unexpected situation pops up upon goods receipt. So this is the standard process. Give it a try, and see if it meets your needs. Thanks again, and as always, great inputs. We've seen some really interesting ways to facilitate this process. It's nice to get an idea of how SAP is already prepared to handle this for us. So folks, as always, if you have a specific question, please submit it below. And of course, if you have different thoughts or questions around what you want to see, check out our video catalog.

Unconfirmed Transfer Orders

Decode transfer orders and learn to seamlessly correlate and integrate them

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LL01; LT21
Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. Hi, this is Martin, and in this video, we're going to look at the unconfirmed transfer orders within the warehouse activity monitor. Steve, we all know about the best way to learn is by doing so why don't you tell us why unconfirmed transfer orders is so important to manage. Not a problem Martin. Transfer orders within the warehouse activity monitor have surpassed the time allotment and are now deemed as critical and are creating a supply chain disruption. In this video we will demonstrate. How to analyze this portion of the monitor. And review strategies to manage and take action on. In this video we'll focus on the unconfirmed transfer orders in the warehouse activity monitor. So we'll go straight into the warehouse activity monitor which is LL01. The required field here is going to be your warehouse number, so we'll just go ahead, I have mine populated, click execute. The first topic which we'll talk about here is unconfirmed transfer orders. So you could just click execute again and run through this. If you wanted to focus or create a variant specifically to movement type and storage types that you use, you could do so here. So a lot of ways in which this report is split up amongst the warehouse team is someone would own the warehouse inbound movement types, and then you'd have a supervisor own some of the outbounds. So based on that you could save multiple variants or if it's a smaller operation and it's manageable to get through all the activity monitor elements in a day you can absolutely just have one person own the whole monitor. But again, you have those options here, in this case, we're going to just click execute to get the whole picture and you can see you have the time that the batch job was run here and then it lists all the transactions that have surpassed that critical time parameter. So we'll talk about the unconfirmed TOs, which are the actual movements in the warehouse, you can see I have 104 total. If you click open this folder here, the subset, it then breaks down the actual movement types within each, so of the 104, I have 1 related to a GI outbound delivery, a 100 of them, or the bulk of them, are goods receipts in storage type 501, and then the remaining 3 are in a movement type 101 there. So, you can close this, you could again jump straight into those ones if you wanted to, to specify or see the TOs in the specific movement types. Here we'll just double click, we will go into the whole picture. So, it lists all those TOs, you have the TO number, the material, a ton of information here, when it was created, etc. Anything in here, these are your actual movement types. The power of the warehouse activity monitor is to work through, and you can actually confirm straight from here. That power is also dangerous too, so if we were to go ahead and confirm these, you are confirming these movements or the materials from a source bin to a destination bin so you absolutely want to investigate all these and never want to actually just blindly confirm. So you have some options in order to do that. Again, as I just mentioned, you could split it by inbound or outbound however it fits in your warehouse. One thing that you could do if one person owns it, you could create notes for all these things. So, hey, I own it, I'm working on it, or just create notes. .From a research perspective, it gives you at least the source, the destination, et cetera. You can double click in there, which jumps you straight into the TO and you can get a better view of the from, to, some additional information on the quantity, et cetera, you can get the header view here to see who created this. You really want to pinpoint, hey what's going on with this do you know when it'll be done? Really, these are going to be your research aspects right here, all within the TO. You could, from this immediately, actually just confirm this, if you wanted to, again, if you knew what was going on, you have the option to confirm it, you can cancel this, so you have a lot of options. You could do it in mass too, from the Goto, so you can cancel, you can confirm, but in this case, you would only want to do this if you knew what was going on. So all these have surpassed that time limit, which is why they are there. They're listed by movement type. Very, very powerful tool to eliminate those supply chain disruptions, especially from that integrated supply chain perspective. So, in summary we have covered. How unconfirmed transfer orders are supply chain disruptions pushed through the warehouse activity monitor and have surpassed the time allotment. These TOs are late and need to be researched and quickly corrected. Thanks Steve. Yeah, for sure powerful information on why these late transfer orders need quick action to alleviate supply chain disruptions. Folks, if you want to know more about this and other topics please check out our video catalog and of course if you have a question please submit it below.

Unconfirmed Transfer Requirements

Navigate and streamline correlating and correcting transfer requirements

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LL01
The best way to learn is by doing, welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. Hi, my name is Martin, in this video, we're going to focus on unconfirmed transfer requirements within the warehouse activity monitor. Steve, this is a big deal, unconfirmed transfer requirements, tell us more about this. Sure, Martin. Unconfirmed transfer requirements within the warehouse activity monitor have surpassed the time allotment and are now deemed as critical and are creating a supply chain disruption. In this video we will demonstrate. How to analyze this portion of the monitor. And review strategies to manage and take action upon. In this video, I will demonstrate the unconfirmed transfer requirements portion of the warehouse activity monitor. So we'll jump straight into it in LL01. The required field here is going to be your warehouse number. Mine populates, so I'm going to hit execute, and from a transfer requirements, which is what we're going to be discussing. You have options, and I mentioned this in previous videos, you could, if you have variants set up or depending how you split up the warehouse activity monitor, because it could be a lot of overdue elements that have surpassed that time limit, you could specify and just see all the movement types or as in most users do, you could just execute straight through and it'll list everything within the monitor. So the transfer requirements, which is the second line there, which as we know, they will be converted into TOs. So very similar to your purchase requisitions from your procurement aspect, transfer requirements are really the same thing in WM. They need to be converted into TOs right above into actual movements. I have 58 that are open. I can click the subtree here then it'll specify the movement types behind there, so the bulk of them are related to a goods receipt from a PO. The one is from a movement type 312, which is a transfer. Collapse that, jump straight in to get the whole view, and you can see they're all listed there, the TR quantity, the material, the TR number, which is listed, and then you have statuses and that one yellow that's standing out, I'll get into that after. But let's jump straight into the TR number. I'm going to double click there. Jumps me in, gives me additional information. So now I'm in LV03, which is displaying the TR. You can look at the header to really pinpoint the user to gain insight of what's going on, when will this be converted, why has this exceeded that time parameter? So that's really the information, the types of questions that you want to be asking there. From this tool, which is why it's very powerful, you could select and you can create these or convert them into TOs straight from here. You can also, if they're hanging out and you've done your due diligence or your research, you can click this and it will actually complete them. So this one, and really how this should be worked, this report in general, you'll do your research. But many of the users in which I've come across that use this monitor on a daily basis, don't know this powerful functionality is you can actually notate here. So this is yellow because a status has changed. I went in there earlier and I added a note. So if I'm owning portion of this, or I'm trying to identify two other users who have access to this, that hey I'm looking into it, I can click on there, hey, currently working on and you see that there's notes. You could do that for do another one here. I'll just type in note and it'll change that status there, then anyone can go in there, click that line, click the note and see what's going on. But really at the end of the day, you want to convert these into TOs, because these have surpassed that time limit. So, in summary, we have covered how unconfirmed transfer requirements are supply chain disruptions pushed through the warehouse activity monitor and have surpassed the time allotment. These TRs are late and need to be. Researched. And quickly corrected. Hey, thanks Steve, really good stuff there. Again, powerful information on how these late transfer requirements need quick action to alleviate supply chain disruptions in the future. If you want to know more about SAP, warehouse management, and other opportunities that you can do to improve your business in SAP technology, please check out our other videos, and of course if you have any suggestions for us to follow up on, submit them below.

Unsourced Requisitions

Use standard tools to proactively identify and address unsourced requisitions

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
MM
MD04; ME57; ME01
Hi, Martin here. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. In this video we're going to talk about SAP's capabilities to identify and resolve unsourced requisitions. This feature in SAP helps a buyer identify exceptions in source determination where they need to intervene and offers an opportunity to adjust the rules so that there's less manual work required. As we know the best way to learn is by doing, so Kristie, how about you tell us more about this unsourced requisition capability? Fantastic topic. So it's super interesting. We often run into clients who handle a lot of their sourcing manually and aren't even aware that SAP can assign the correct source of supply as a result of the MRP run. We want to get to a place where this is happening consistently, but doing all that master data work can feel really overwhelming. What we'll go through today will help you to get started. In the demo, I will walk through a few things. How to identify unsourced requisitions. And what to do with that information. And what the cadence of work should look like to enrich the data quality so that this becomes fewer and fewer. So what we want to do here is actually go in and find some purchase requisitions that do not currently have a source assigned. So we would think about this as exception monitoring in the procurement cycle. So if our source lists are well maintained, then when we run MRP, when we get our replenishment proposals, we're going to see a source assigned. And even if we have multiple sources we can actually see that split there based on whether we've maintained quota arrangement and fair share rules or capacity requirements or whatever else the case may be to drive that split. One of the ways we can find our unsourced purchase requisitions is through this transaction here. It's ME57. Okay, and as a buyer, we can come in here and look for any requisitions that do not currently have a source assigned and then try to use our master data to get that corrected so that we can be the right kind of lazy and we don't have to come in here and review this every time. Now there may be certain cases where you do need to make that sourcing decision on the fly in which case this will produce a work list for you so you're able to go in and take a look at that. What I want to do right now is look for some items that are eligible for release, so I'm going to look just kind of within this little week period here and I'm going to see if I have anything that is sitting out there that needs my attention. And this is going to give me anything that is not assigned, you can see the tick box down here and I'm focused on the release date because these are the purchase requisitions I'm actually past due and releasing right now, I would actually want to go out another day or two because today happens to be the 10th of June. I don't ever want to release my requisitions too early because I want to have the flexibility that if there's something wrong I can make that adjustment. Now, this is an ugly view, there's a lot of different ways that you can have this information present, but this happens to be the items where I am not able to find a source of supply. So I have some options here, I could tell it to go ahead and assign automatically for me. I could go ahead and work through the process and get it into a purchase order and then assign the purchase order there or I could go through the process and assign it manually. So, if I'm seeing this show up here and I've got a missing source, the first thing I would want to do is let the system try to assign it automatically, but the follow on to that is to look at my master data and to see what is going on and why I'm not able to get my source assigned through the MRP run. So let's go ahead and try this and see if it's able to find a source for me. So what it's going to do here, is because there's no source that is assigned in the source list and relevant for MRP right now, is it's giving me every one that we have ever purchased from in the past. So if we have an info record out there that is valid, it's going to go ahead and pull that through for me and then I can choose which source of supply I would like to proceed with. So I can make that selection and assign it manually. What I really want to do here, though, is I actually want to go through and get this cleared up in my source list. So once I have my list, I can go through and I can process and then I can review my assignments and then I can actually get my purchase order cuts. ME57 is going to help me go through that entire process and we'll go through and demonstrate that in another video. But right now what I want to focus on is how I actually go through and get this assigned. So another place I could see this is if I was in my MD04 and I was looking at this item, I would be able to see that there is no supplier assigned. Another good place would be ME5A, I could see that I don't have a source assigned. That's my purchase requisition kind of list, my information list, so I can see what's going on. But let's go to MD04 real quick just so I can show you how to see it there as well. So it's really quite simple. So these purchase orders that I've already been cut, you can see these are quite outdated, maybe your housekeeping looks a little like mine. You can see these are assigned to a supplier but if I go down further and I get into some more current time, you know, I'm out in 2023 and I've got some requisitions and see all these guys stacked up. If I click on vendor here, I have no supplier that it was able to locate. So let's go in and let's take a look at the source list and see what is happening because clearly we've had sources of supply that have provided us this material in the past. If I come into ME01, this is my source list. This is what is going to allow MRP to pick up the source and the MRP run, so that I don't have to go in and manually do this work all the time. I can have multiple sources set up in here. I can have one that's relevant to MRP, if appropriate, if I want to have it fixed and assigned. And you can see that what this is, is actually just an expired source list. So it's expired as of 2017. Here's the supplier that was involved, it was fixed and it was a relevant record to MRP. You can see that here in the drop down, so it's going to go through and create purchase requisitions. If it was set up for a scheduling agreement, I could set it to a two and it would generate the schedule lines for me. So if this supplier is still qualified, at this point I would want to go through and review my pricing, make sure everything is up to date, validate my lead times, any minimum order quantities, but if all that checked out, then I could extend the source list until the next point where I needed to do a review. So if I have a constraint on how long I'm allowed to have that supplier qualified, and then my exception is going to be when I get a purchase requisition that's not assigned, I know I need to go through and review that information. So what I'm going to do for today's purposes is I'll just go ahead and extend this out so we can take a look and see what happens in the MRP run and I'll just make it good through the end of this year. Let's say we've done all the due diligence and everything is okay. I'll go ahead and save that, and what I would want to do with my source list if I had an expired source is I would probably want to go ahead and create a new record that shows the gap in the validity period. In this case, I'm assuming it's been okay all along, and I just have been remiss in updating it. Now I'm going to go in and I'm going to actually go back to my stock requirements list, pull in here, and I'll go ahead and run MRP on this guy. And you can see I've got 11 purchase requisitions that were changed, probably all those that were stacked up because I'm so far behind in taking good care of this item, and we'll go ahead and just zip on down there, and if I click on the supplier now, we'll see that we actually got that supplier automatically assigned for us in the MRP run. Now, maybe when it's one off, this is not a big deal to have to go in and assign these, but if we have to do this all the time, that can become really challenging, so as you're seeing them, a good way to go through and clear it up is to just go ahead and run for your next day, work through the process of getting your source list set up and in good working order, and then MRP will take over and start to assign your either single source or multi sources based on the rules that you have put in the system. So very helpful to get that initiated through the MRP run, and this is also where we maintain all the information on our outline agreements. So if we want to call off contracts and track our volume in that way, or we have scheduling agreements in place, it's really important that we take good care of that source list and keep it up to date. So in summary, we have covered off on the. Importance of monitoring for unsourced requisitions as part of your daily cadence. How SAP makes recommendations on the potential sources. And how to maintain the data in the source list to indicate the source where possible so that we can adopt that in the MRP run. Thank you, Kristie. Proactive monitoring source determination is a key part of buyer's daily cadence. This is really a great highlight, thanks again. So, if you want to know more about how to get the most out of your SAP system or any other features and functions in the procurement process please check out our other videos and of course if you have a particular question please submit it below.

Warehouse Activity Monitor Overview

Optimize your efficiency by using the warehouse activity monitor

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LL01; LX04
Martin here and thank you for joining us on this video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. In this video, we're going to focus on WM's version of the exception monitor. It's the warehouse activity monitor. This is a big deal and Steve, as we know the best way to learn is by doing so please share with us why this tool is so important. Absolutely Martin. The warehouse activity monitor is WM's way of communicating to the warehouse staff that there are potential supply chain disruptions. If elements appear on the Warehouse Activity Monitor, if simply surpassed the time allotment to process the warehouse task, and should now be investigated and resolved. In this video, we will demonstrate how the monitor works and cover some strategies of ownership. In this video, I will demonstrate WM's version of exception monitoring. T-code LL01 or the warehouse activity monitor is the most powerful tool in WM to really identify, research and take corrective action on potential supply chain disruptions. So I cannot say enough about this tool, we'll talk more as we jump in here. So I'm in LL01. The first requirements, you're just going to enter your warehouse number in there, it'll prompt you to the next screen here. Which you'll see all these are specific transactions that you could play around with after by movement type and storage types there. So for now we're just going to go ahead and hit enter. What it brings up and what this is really built around is time parameters. So you set time parameters per storage type and movement type and depending on whatever that time is that you set, it will end up here on the Warehouse Activity Monitor, really as a flag, to say, hey, it's surpassed that time. So therefore take action on it because at this point, it's a potential supply chain disruption. So all these things are different categories within the WM world. You have your unconfirmed TOs, which are going to be your movements. The opened transfer requirements, which are going to be similar to requisitions. As we know, requisitions are the requirements our first for the transfer order, open posting changes, critical deliveries, negative stocks, interim stock, and potential production supply. So if material is not staged in the according time. So this tool is really essential, every day to get in there, take a look at because if it's in here, it's late, it's really built and you could see here there's a date here so this has to be set up and configured, which is a good thing because this and it's all configured directly to a specific warehouse. So you can have, let's say you're responsible for three warehouses or a production warehouse and then a distribution warehouse. Well, those two different warehouses could have different time parameters set. So it doesn't have to just be a fixed time parameter per movement type across the board. So that's really the power of this, it's all built around how you want to customize it on your movement types. However that time is for your business, it ends up here and really the beauty of it is it only ends up here if it's exceeded that time parameter, so it accommodates for the time to be worked or that processing time. So, for example, if you opened up a truck first thing in the morning and you ran all of your open TOs, you would see all of your open TOs for the day. You wouldn't see them in the Warehouse Activity Monitor if your time parameter was set up accordingly, because it's going to accommodate for that processing time. So, that's the foundational part of the Warehouse Activity Monitor. The biggest thing, and the biggest challenge, after setting it up is going to be how do we want to split and designate this work to different areas in the warehouse, to different supervisors. This should not be worked by every single associate in the warehouse. This is really meant for the supervisor level and above because you can do a lot of things in mass. You can confirm TOs in mass. It's a very powerful tool and as we know with those tools comes great responsibility. So, really, that's one of the foundational parts is you want to decide within your warehouse, who owns what, because that ownership and accountability is really what delivers for this report. So, in summary, we've covered how the Warehouse Activity Monitor is communicating that the warehouse elements are late maybe causing supply chain disruptions that require action and ownership. Good stuff Steve thank you very much. Well, I can certainly see why the warehouse activity monitor is such a fundamental tool for those that are working daily within the warehouse. Thanks again. Hey, so for folks if you're looking for more information about the WM environment and of course just SAP supply chain in general our SAP video catalog will be the best place to go. If you have any questions, please submit them below.

Warehouse Bottlenecks

Master the art of analyzing and utilizing empty storage bins

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LX01; LX02; LX03; LX04
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that reveals and unlocks the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin and in this video, we're going to focus on how to proactively identify warehouse bottlenecks. As we know, the best way to learn is by doing and Steve, we know that bottlenecks are the biggest issue in supply chains. Why don't you share how we alleviate those in WM? Absolutely Martin. There are a few standard tools in WM that can be utilized in conjunction to identify and redistribute stock to relieve capacity in a storage type and prevent a bottleneck. In this video, we will focus on how to analyze the capacity, how to search for empty bins, And finally, how to move these materials in mass to prevent a bottleneck. In this video, we'll demonstrate how to spot possible warehouse bottlenecks at high capacity, how to locate empty bins, and then to actually relocate materials to alleviate that high capacity or potential bottleneck. So we're going to jump around to a few transactions. The first is we're going to go into LX04, and our warehouse, just to run this wide open in LX04, it's going to be your capacity per storage type and what this will do, it'll list all of your storage types, simply occupied versus empty, and you'll get a percentage of what that looks like, that mix of the occupied versus empty. So, in this case, we'll just go ahead and we'll use this 001 since it's our highest used capacity and now we want to find and maybe move some of these 202 materials that are in there to a different storage type below and LX04 is nice because it lists everything in that percentage right there for you. So let's go ahead and move some of these materials in 001 to 007. Now I'm just using this for an example, but if you tune into one of the earlier videos just on LX04, what you'll see is these have rules behind them. So just for the sake, we're going to just go ahead and move those there, but each storage type could be configured in your warehouse for specific reasons with specific put away strategies and stock removal. But this is just a good way to relieve some of this capacity. So, LX04, we'll leave that up, we'll just enter a new session, we'll click here, you can also click up here and hit create, click there and to identify empty storage bins, it's t-code LX01 and then we want 007, which is the one that had very low capacity utilized, and this just simply lists all those bins that are empty or not occupied. So it's just a nice way, LX01 is great too, you could print it out and that's I think what this line is for, for manual entries. Now, I would use this also LX01 as kind of a spot check for inventory sake. So, it's one thing if it's systematically empty, but I would send some of my inventory counters when I was overseeing the warehouse, to go and actually ensure that there was nothing physically there. So, just a good practice to get in, you want to ensure that something is always systematically accurate to what's physically there. So, going back to this, we have our list there and if you tune into one of the earlier videos also on moving materials in mass. We're going to go ahead and utilize t-code LT10 to move some of that stuff. So again, LT10 is going to be our source storage type and what we wanted was exactly that 001. We're going to leave movement type 999, and we're going to move everything out of those bins. So if there's mixed storage, that's okay. We're going to go ahead and we'll just execute this. Here we go. Here's some of our options. So it'll list all those materials and or the bins in there from storage type 001 and LT10. We'll just go ahead and we'll start clicking on these because it's a nice, simple way to alleviate some of this capacity and generally what I would do if we're going to utilize that LX01 sheet, and we just selected a whole bunch, you would want to make sure that each of these are going to this specific location. So I would have someone go check that location again and I would say, okay, yep, it's empty. Do a check mark on that sheet or whatever the case may be and then have this material in the quantity of 40 go to this bin, this one, go to this bin, so on and so forth down the list. I wouldn't just blindly do this, I'm only doing this for the sake of the demo to demonstrate how the tools work. So again, that's what you would want to do, you want to have your list available of empty bins, and then you want to just simply bin to bin them, and that's what LT 10 does and that's what we're going to be doing here. So we're going to go ahead and just hit the stock transfer in the foreground, 007, and this is what I mentioned earlier, we could just go in and specify some bins there, but I'm just going to go ahead and let the system ride with it and select any bins it would like just for the sake of the demo. So go ahead and check. They all went green, that's great, and now if we go back to our capacity, so they all should be in some of these bins depending on the rules of the storage type and put away strategy, et cetera. So I'm going to get out of LT10, go back to LX04 to simply show, these occupied should have been dropped off slightly and this, storage type 007, should have increased slightly. So let's go back, go back again, and there you go. There's now 190 dropped slightly of 65% utilized and this, it looks like I put it all into one bin, so we will go and take a look here. You can even go and spot check where I put all those. I'm going to LX02, 007, and there's our bins. So I put them all into one bin, so that's what happens when you don't specify the bin. It's riding the rules of SAP. So that's why it's so critical to understand all the rules behind each storage type because in this case, right, it's mixed storage, it's great, that's how the system's configured. But if you want to specify individual bins, that's exactly the process you want to do. You want to go one by one in LT10, the origin bin and the destination bin. So again, just a few transactions. We went through LX04. We went into LX01 to identify the empties, and then we used LT10, but I would recommend going one by one. And you really want to just ensure that those locations are physically empty and matching the system. So, in summary, we have covered how standard tools in SAP can be used in conjunction to analyze, search for empty bins, and alleviate warehouse bottlenecks. Wow, thanks Steve. Clearly, there's some great strategies and fantastic ways to utilize these tools in conjunction to alleviate these bottlenecks. Folks, if you want to learn about how to alleviate bottlenecks in other parts of your supply chain, please check out our video catalog and if you have a question, feel free to submit it below.

Warehouse Capacity Evaluation

Gauge warehouse capacity by storage type

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LS03N; LX03; LX04
The best way to learn is by doing and welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. In this video, we're going to focus on SAP's warehouse capacity evaluation and how to quickly understand some of the rules behind each storage type. Steve, why didn't you just take us there and tell us more. Sure Martin. The Warehouse Capacity Evaluation Tool is a hidden gem in the warehouse world. There is a lot of excellent and essential information to unpack and that can be used to understand all the details and information of each of your storage types. In this video, we will focus on the key features such as capacities, load percentages, and how to view the rules behind each storage type. When I was running a warehouse, one of the first transactions I would start my day with was t-code LX04. LX04, as you can see here, is capacity used per storage type. So the required field here is going to be your warehouse number and what it'll do is it will look at your capacity amongst many other things in every storage type within your warehouse. So at the time when I was running my warehouse, we were in a state of very, very high capacity and just looking for any breathing room or any available space. T-code LX04 could absolutely be used for that. So if you see here, it breaks down all of your storage types within your warehouse, and it simply shows the description, and then occupied versus empty. That percentage is calculated right here next to it in the usage. So that's really how I would utilize it in a high capacity situation, is it shows, oh, okay, I have 70% utilized. I have some breathing room in this storage type and as you know, storage types have many different storage bins in there. So that's one way and a great way to utilize this. Another way and really how I started using it towards the tail end of my warehouse journey as soon as my WM maturity really began to develop. So you can actually see the background or the makeup of how these storage types, the rules behind them. So if you click on any of these, so I selected 001 and I click storage type details, it tells you for this storage type, here's the rules. So this does not allow storage unit management, the putaway strategy is set to C, no capacity, so on and so forth. So all these different rules really interact and potentially could disrupt and or be the reason of some of these, high usage, if the rules do not reflect the current situation any longer. You can just continue down this list and you can see the makeup and this one's different. Again, no SU management, the put away strategy is next empty bin, this storage type does not allow mixed storage, so on and so forth. So there's a lot of information within here that really explains how these interact and the rules behind each storage type. Another thing that it shows you within this same storage type, if you click on, I still have this highlighted, detailed analysis, it gives you the breakdown of some additional structural things in WM. You can see now your storage sections, your bin types, etc. So, you have a really good split or make up to see it per storage type all the details behind the scenes, beyond just the capacity. The final thing, which I really, really want to highlight, which is a great way to utilize this tool is going to be down here in this last storage type, D02. You can see in this particular storage type, there's one material occupied out of a bin of four total, which is why it's calculating 25%. But then there's this load percentage. Load percentage is one of the most powerful things in WM because this takes into consideration capacities. So if I look at the rules kind of behind the engine here, click on storage type details, it has storage unit managed, it has a capacity checking used based on the material. So essentially it's taking the size of the material and trying to look at the volume of the bin. So in other words, capacity usage is just looking at occupied bins versus not, so is there a material there or not? Load percentage is actually calculating the volume of each storage bin. So in this case, if we look, and let's, let's dive in here a little more and I'll explain. So, it's set to 20% right now. So if I look, we're going to go into LX03, my warehouse already populated. Let's just pull in D02 to look at our 4 bins within this storage type and then what it shows you, I'll expand this here, here it is, I have 3 empty, 1 occupied, there's 80 units available or in there. So you could click on the storage bin to get the capacities and it says, hey, yep, 80% of this bin is utilized out of 100. My total capacity is a 100. I'm using 80%, there's my 20. So you could see if you really wanted to get into the details behind the material master of this part too, you'll see a capacity usage in there. So it's a great tool again, in many regards where you could look at the capacities or your volume, your total health check, and then really the rules behind the engine. So in summary, we have covered how the warehouse capacity evaluation tool is your one stop shop for all information and rules behind each storage type. Hey, thanks Steve. That is some great information covered on the capacities and the rules behind each storage type. If you want to know more about how to optimize your supply chain, please check out our other videos and if you have any suggestions for us please submit them in the box below.

Warehouse Inventory Counts

Top strategies for accurate and efficient warehouse inventory counting

7 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LI01; LI03N; LX22; MIBC
Hi, Martin here and welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. In this video, we're going to look at the warehouse inventory counting capability and where to view counting records. Steve, as we know the best way to learn is by doing so why don't you take us into the system and show us how to do inventory counting in the warehouse tool. Sure thing Martin. The power of WM is the granular detail down to each storage bin. With this we are able to store thousands and thousands of materials in different bins. Rest assured, SAP offers a variety of strategies to perform inventory counts for all of your inventory and storage bins. In this video we will. Discuss SAP's standard inventory counting methods. Best practices. And demonstrate how to evaluate and reset the ABC indicator for cycle counting. SAP offers a variety of inventory counting methods. The three most common and the warehouse arena are going to be your annual inventory counts, which are, you shut down your operation, you pick a day, you count every material and bin for that one day when there's no activity in there. The second is a continuous inventory, which is at the beginning of your fiscal and or calendar year, whatever year your operation is in, your goal is to count every single bin by the end of the year. What's nice is that you control that and really work in off peak times to get ahead or queue those up in peak times, but you control your destiny there but knowing that your end goal is going to be, you have got to count every single bin. And then finally the last is going to be your cycle counting. So cycle counting is counting by a material number and that material number is tied to a, A, B, C designator, that ABC designator dictates the frequency in which that material is counted. The frequency could be determined by a dollar value of high velocity, whatever you set that as could be your criteria. So we're just going to go ahead and jump in and take a look in the warehouse at tcode LX22. LX22 just simply is a check of are we performing inventory counts or not. The only mandatory field here is going to be your warehouse number. All this other information you don't even need to populate or check. You can just run this wide open. Although if you want to specify, you can absolutely. What this will pull up is all of your inventory records, whether or not they've been cleared, so the status, not cleared, the date, the storage type, all kinds of great information. This first one, and what you really want to look for is going to be inventory active, so if there's an X here that means there's an open count. This is an issue because this count is open. All these bins are tied up. All these bins have materials in them and they're all locked, so they can't be sold, they can't be picked because there's an open inventory count, right? And you don't want your count to fluctuate so therefore, that's why it's locked out for all warehouse activity. So if you spot one of those, you absolutely don't want to have this linger, you want to take action on it because there's materials that are tied up that you cannot sell. So a lot of good information on there but what you really want to look for is consistency here. And if I'm running continuous counting, do I have a consistent record, every day, every few days, if I have cycle counting, do I have a record every single day or every few, an annual account you would be able to spot easily because you would only see once a year, you would have a huge record or a few inventory records here, but all on that same date. So in order to initiate a count, it's just simply LI01 and I'm not going to go ahead and run that, but you would just enter this criteria of when you wanted to actually count the storage type, the warehouse number and then you could see your inventory methods here, which I just mentioned, continuous, your annual accounts, a cycle count, or even a manual inventory. So if you're not sure of material or there's a part missing and you wanted to manually activate an inventory count, you could do so here. So this is really where you initiate those counts. The last transaction that I'll show is going to be with respect to cycle counting. So cycle counting again at the material level is actually going to be set at the plant and storage location level. It is carried out in the warehouse. So again, it's set at that plant level, but you perform them in WM. The tcode in which I have displayed here, which we'll go into is MIBC. MIBC should not be accessible to everyone because it's a very powerful tool, you can see at the bottom you can actually update your ABC indicators. We're going in here just to show you really how this works, so you have all of your materials where they might have an ABC indicator. We could see in this transaction, what it is currently, and then we can run some scenarios to see what it potentially could be so in this case, it's going to be run by consumption or usage, so looking at historical consumption. If you are to check this bubble, it's future looking or forward looking at a look for any requirements in the future. So, we'll just take a look here, I'm going to go way back here because this is our test system, go ahead and just execute this, so for plant 1000, I want to see what's my consumption is, and it will simply display the parts. So all of your materials, the description, what the cycle count indicator was, so this was a D, but based on my velocity and consumption, it's now recommending that it's an A. So you could have the option actually to save this, it will override or you could just use this simply as analysis. So you could look at this and say, like this is great information, you could pull in some of this and say, this is a faster velocity or frequently used material and there might be strategic reasons why you want to keep this as a D or an A. And again, this indicator is going to be the velocity or the frequency that you count those materials. So, there's a little flavor of cycle counting, where to look in WM at LX22. If we're counting or not, but these are going to be the ways to check our counting methods in WM. So, in summary we have covered. SAP's standard inventory counting methods. Best practices. And have demonstrated how to evaluate and reset the ABC indicator for cycle counting. Thanks Steve. That is some fantastic information and tools that you've covered on those counting methods and strategies. Folks if you want to know more about these topics and any other topic related to SAP and getting the most out of it please check out the other videos and if you have a particular suggestion or question submit them below.

Warehouse Wizard Tool

Master the timing and techniques of bulk editing warehouse structures and bins

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Warehouse Management
WM
LS11
Hi, Martin here and welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. In this video, we're going to focus on what's called the warehouse wizard tool. So Steve, you know the best way to learn is by doing so I'm a little curious about these superpowers that you talk about in this wizard tool. Martin, I'd venture to say this may even be more powerful than Gandalf's staff. The warehouse wizard tool, or the capability to change several storage bin rules simultaneously is the ultimate tool for performing warehouse projects. As wizards know, the power of this tool should only be granted to select few who truly understand the capability and rules behind the system to make these changes. In this video, we'll demonstrate the use of this tool and review some scenarios of when to possibly use it. In this video I'll walk you through how to use what we're calling the warehouse wizard tool. The warehouse wizard tool is t-code LS11 and LS11 is to change several storage bins simultaneously. So this transaction has saved me countless hours and really should only be granted access if you have proven yourself in the WM world or really understand the effects of this transaction, because you are changing many bins all at once. So this should not be given out lightly, but really if it is, it goes and can be utilized to save you lots and lots of time if you need to change several bins all at once. So the required fields are warehouse number and then your storage type. So in this case, we'll just do 001. If you wanted to enter specific bin ranges or specific bins, you could do so there. But for now, let's just bring back everything else, run this wide open, hit execute, and it brings all of your storage bins, whether or not they're empty, if there's any kind of blocks, if there's an active inventory, like a cycle count going on there, and then all the characteristics about your storage bin. So if we just single click on any of these bins, that's the bin, right? You could see that there's nothing in that one. That's why I showed that one is empty. It has a storage section of 001 storage bin type of E1 and it has an actual weight in there. So LS11 goes from changing any of this data from a singular bin by bin to multiple all in one swoop by just simply clicking and checking. So that's really the power of it. So you can see all that information there. So if we wanted to change these first two from a total weight of, let's say 1, 000 kilograms, you just click this change and then you can update the weight here. We want to, I'll just say double. 2, 000, okay, hit check, and boom, there it goes. It won't actually take place until you hit the save button and there we go, it's been changed. It's very, very, very helpful. Some of the things, so if there's an active inventory count in there, right, that means that there's materials in there. As we know, if we wanted to delete bins, it won't let us because there's an actual active material and count going on there. So we'll just show you what it does anyway, we're trying to delete those only empty. So it's smart enough to recognize what it can and can't do if there's inventory in there. So if we want to change anything, these are stored section 001. I'm going to change what options do we have there to 002, they're now slow moving let's say, go ahead and double click. There's a 3, it changed to 002, we'll save and boom. Now it's permanent, now they're all in there. So you could do a lot of things in mass here and that's the whole point of this. This is probably the most powerful tool beyond going into the actual configuration yourself. But this is really intended for projects to do in mass, if you really understand the storage sections, the bin types, if you're talking about capacities and weights, this is your transaction to do everything all in mass, which is awesome because saves you a lot of time rather than going in there one by one. You can also reset, so all these fields over there, if it has a picking area already set, which is, there's nothing there populated a storage bin type E1. If you reset those, it'll just go to blank. How and when to edit structure and storage bins in massSo if I hit reset, I have those two selected, check, see it wipes them out. So that's the difference. You could either input something or you could reset it, which takes it out but all in mass. So in summary, we have covered the power of this wizard tool. How it could save a lot of time, but should only be granted to the proven and few warehouse wizards. Great stuff, Steve. Thank you. What a powerful tool that can be and what a game changer for the warehouse projects. I can see why you call it the Warehouse Wizard Tool. Folks, if you want to learn more about other wizard tools out there or in SAP, just getting better capabilities, please check out our video services. And of course, if you have a question for us, please submit it below.

What Is Safety Time

Exploring Safety Time: its purpose, location, and optimal usage

5 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
P2P; PTM
MD04; MD03
The best way to learn is by doing, so welcome supply chain practitioners. Martin here. Ready for another topic to ante up the value of your SAP solution? Okay, today we're diving into an important topic around how to buffer and protect against disruptions. Today's topic is an introduction to safety time. Now SAP has a variety of safety techniques from traditional static safety stock, either via entry or by letting SAP calculate it to dynamic safety stock that moves with demand based on coverage profiles assigned to them. Now SAP has a variety of safety techniques from traditional static safety stock, either via entry or by letting SAP calculate it, to dynamic safety stock that moves with demand based on coverage profiles assigned, to safety time, which seeks to address challenges with the timing of demand or delays in supply. Each has their uses, and we have a series of videos dedicated to the exploration of each. For a topic like this, we need a solid tour guide, and we didn't have to look far to find a good one. Today, I'm pleased to introduce you to Luke. Luke, why don't you share your idea specifically on the topic of safety time. I will take that baton, Martin. While I'm just getting started in my supply chain career, I do know that the one thing that is always constant is our need to work with volatility, uncertainty, complexity, and ambiguity. We need a really solid toolkit to address these conditions and prevent disruptions. And I find safety time to be an interesting way to protect and problem solve. It literally seeks to buy us time. And yes, that time does come with a cost which we need to be aware of. On our tour today, I'm going to show you how MRP responds to safety time, and how we can toggle it on and off in the stock requirements list, so we can check our planning and evaluate what's happening. And while we're there, I'll walk through some options for settings. Let's take a look. Well, if the best way to learn is by doing, we should get right to it. What we can see here is a planning situation which we're going to review from our home base, the stock requirements list. Whenever we want to explore a new feature or even master data value, it helps us start with a simple or familiar planning situation and then build up from there. We can see that this material has a demand plan and a simple plan for replenishment that uses a lot for lot size procedure. Let's take a look at our planning settings. We can bridge the material master via change mode because I do intend on making an adjustment. If I was not planning to make an adjustment, I'd be going in with display only. That's an important habit. Okay, here we are in MRP1. You can see we're using an MRP type that is deterministic in nature and follows the demand plan. Here's the aforementioned lot size procedure that is matching the demand, lot for lot, and I've not added a MLQ or rounding value. We'll come back and play with those in a moment, but let's head over to MRP2 for now. Here's where our procurement type, lead time, and GR processing time lives. Let's take a look at our safety options. Okay, picture this. You have a supplier that is struggling to deliver on time, you are working with them on their challenges and want to continue holding them to their stated lead times, but also want to protect the shop floor and ultimately the customer from your supplier's performance. This is a specific and temporary condition that aligns well with the use of safety time. So let's add some here. I need to do two things. Choose how much safety time and set the safety time indicator. We have two options for which demand we want to include in our offset. Independent demand only or everything. We're going with everything today. Okay, so let's save. Now using my handy navigation profile, I'm going to ask MRP run. But before I do, let's take a second to look at the current timing of supply. Confirm we like the settings, and here we can see that there are some changes. Okay, now let's go back to the stock requirements list and refresh. Here we can see that offset. A good way to make this really easy when you're getting started or sharing this technique with the team is to toggle safety time on and off. It makes it really easy to see the offset. Now last thing, let's go back to the Material Master and add a periodic lot size. Let's add a MOQ and a rounding value as well. Now we can save and let's go run MRP one more time. Confirm we like the settings. See, those are some pretty big impacts. Now, as we see, this is a very important tool, but it does firmly demonstrate that time is money. Thank you all so much for taking a tour through Safety Time with me. I think this is an interesting tool that should be a standard part of our toolkit. Now before you go, I do want to mention a few Surgeon General Warnings. First, it's worth saying one more time. Although this is a time buffer, it does reflect a commitment and inventory investment. Second, Safety Time should be used in specific and temporary situations like the example we walked through today. Lastly, please be careful to avoid stacking safety techniques. Choose a path, define a well and make it transparent to the team. Thank you very much. Hey, Luke, I appreciate your guidance and your perspective on this. Thanks for the tour. I know that we have another video to share on the additional features of dynamic safety time. So be on the lookout for that and explore it when it's available. That'll be a great way to continue this conversation. Also, if you're struggling to find videos, feel free to use the chatbot or if you have a very specific question just for us, please submit it below.

What Is a Scope of Check

A succinct definition of SAP's Scope of Check

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
Order Fulfillment & ATP
OTC; P2P; PTM
MD04; CO09
What Is a Scope of Check === Martin: [00:00:00] The best way to learn is by doing so welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, Martin here, and in this video we'll be discussing checking rules as a part of ATP scope of check. Now this is a definition video on focusing on one key term within ATP process that holds a lot of power and is often misunderstood. This can lead to a lot of chaos and confusion as organizations work hard to begin their ATP journey, and understanding or believing in those results actually. Kristie, I know this is a really hot topic but checking rules, kind of the basics of ATP, take it away. Kristie: Hey, Martin, so great question. Sometimes it's good to take a step back to basics and make sure we're all on the same page with these different definitions. Today, I'm going to use SAP to bring the definition to light and walk through what exactly a scope of check is. What it influences, and how to check and see what scope of check is in [00:01:00] play. I'll also highlight some things that can cause hiccups in the process. Let's go take the tour. Alright, let's use SAP to help give this definition a little bit more life. ~Um,~ I am in CO09, ~um,~ which is the Availability Overview, and I really love this ~list.~ transaction because what it allows us to do is to go through and actually see what is available based on the checking group and the checking rule and it also lets us know ~kind of~ what the end of the lead time is for this item so we know that we should see the situation for planning if we're not running terribly behind we should start to see that even out and we should start to see recovery that should be the next available time to start to take in a customer order. So here's how I got to this transaction. I actually got here from MD04. So I'm going to go ahead and just navigate back and show you how I got here. So I went to Environment and I went to ATP [00:02:00] Quantities. So if you think about MD04 as being the place to be for our planners and buyers and our MRP controllers our schedulers, this is the place to be if you're checking availability, and that might be availability for sales documents, it might be availability for ~um,~ delivery, so customer orders versus deliveries versus stock transfer orders, or even for material that needs to be available for use in manufacturing. And the picture, the rule set that we're going to see is defined by the scope of check and that scope of check is the combination of the checking group and the checking rule. We will have a video that goes through the definition of the checking group and the checking rule, which makes up the scope of check. Now, if you're not sure how you got this particular checking group or checking rule as you were coming into this transaction, let me go back to MD04 and just show you one other thing, this is one of the hidden gems of the stock requirements list [00:03:00] that we highlighted in that video by the same name. So under Settings and Settings, if you come over here on General Settings this is what is controlling the checking rule that you are coming into that transaction, also for when you are doing your order report. So typically for an MRP controller, ~if it,~ if you're buying raw materials, your checking rule is going to be something related to production planning. I've modified that here because this is a finished good, and I want to take a look at it from the sales perspective to see what is going to be available and when. ~So,~ That's how it knew what to pull through, and the other thing I can do is, if you are on the ~um,~ customer service ~or,~ or customer excellence side of the house, you probably are coming directly into this transaction. So I'm just going to do a slash in CO09 and you'll see that it's actually going to prompt me for which checking rule I want to use. We'll talk more about the [00:04:00] definitions, but if you think about this, this is the progression through the process. So planned order versus production order, ~so~ a dependent requirement versus an order reservation, customer orders, a sales order versus delivery, so there's a progression there and that's how it knows what to bring in. And this is important because the combination of these two is what sets the rule for checking availability, so what is allowed to be included versus excluded. And you can see over here in your stock overview, this is the type of stock. This is the kind of stock that is eligible for consideration in the process. It tells us whether we're considering replenishment lead time, so if it's 15 days and we don't have any stock on hand, we know that we can make it and we will have it reliably in 15 days, so we're going to be able to go out and make that promise without any type of capacity constraint or consideration on material availability. We can go in and look at the storage location level information. And then also over here on inwards and outward movement, so [00:05:00] what other types of demand are competing with this particular requirement? And what do I need to factor in as I'm going through and seeing what is left over for this particular item? And then what am I allowed to include in terms of inbound inventory that's on its way in, as well as my certainty, the quality of my housekeeping, and the reliability of my information on what may be over and past due. And this is one where we do want to be really cautious, we want to be able to include receipts from the past and future. We want to be able to get our housekeeping in order and make sure that things are neat and tidy, we've got the correct over and under delivery tolerances. As soon as you start to exclude this, you really do have a significant chance of over planning. So only in very specific business situations should this rule be changed. And the other one that's really big is the replenishment lead time. So if you'd like to know more [00:06:00] about the checking groups and the checking rules that get us to this little playbook that tells us how we're going to determine whether inventory or inbound goods are going to be available for this order, how much we have available to promise, there will be other videos that go through specifically those definitions as well as the requirements for what you should or should not include. But the definition for today, for today's scope of check is the combination of your checking group and your checking rule gives us the rules for what can be included or not in your ATP quantity. Alrighty, thanks for exploring that with me. Being able to clearly articulate a definition can really help to ensure everyone is on the same page and talking about the same thing. One of the things we hope Reveal TV will do is promote a common framework of understanding, which enables critical thinking and excellent conversations. Understanding definitions for the big ticket terms [00:07:00] is essential for getting there. Today we learned. The definition of the scope of check. How we can figure out what scope of check is in play. And lastly, when and what some of the common hiccups may look like. Over to you Martin. Martin: Okay, great, thank you Kristie, much appreciated. This makes a lot of sense if you're thinking about it. We have different expectations for the state of our supply chain, depending on where we are in the process. We should have different levels of firmness and commitment and flexibility. So again, thank you for that, I appreciate that a lot. You know, a picture is worth a thousand words and the best way to learn is truly by doing. So folks, if you want to learn more about ATP and checking rules, please check out other videos related to this topic. And of course, if you have a specific question please feel free to submit it below.

What Is a Skip Lot

Definition and purpose in boosting efficiency and performance focus

5 min
New
SAP S/4HANA®
Quality & Batch Management
P2P; PTM; QM
MM03
Hey there, fellow seekers of quality, Martin here. Managing a supply chain requires the right product, at the right place, at the right time, at the right price, and more specific, at the right quality. So let's talk through one of the key features SAP offers to support us in getting there. It's called skip lots in quality management. skip lots offer an incredible effective technique for building efficiency into the quality management procedures where demonstrated quality is in place. It allows us to focus time and attention on the areas that is the highest risk while permitting more flow where the risk is less. Today, Tom is going to talk us through skip lots. Tom, tell us more and help us understand what skip lots are. Hi, Martin. Let's start with a couple of quick things, and then we'll dive right into the system and see where the skip lot setup happens in the material master. So here's the deal. A skip lot is a sampling procedure whereby we are sampling only a fraction of the goods coming in. It allows us to keep an eye on things without checking everything and can be very useful when the demonstrated performance is high. Or, we don't have regulatory reporting requirements for a full inspection and the risk is not very high on the material that is subject to inspection. There needs to be a solid proven track record from the source and for the material. Let's jump into SAP and take a look at our skip lot procedures. It's important to remember a skip lot is simply a procedure that SAP allows us to skip inspecting certain lots instead of inspecting every single lot. This is particularly useful when the quality of the product is consistently high. So as we can see, we're in the material master in SAP on the Quality management tab. We're going to focus our attention on the inspection setup. When we go into inspection setup, down here it shows us skip lot allowed, which is currently checked on. The other important factor to this, when we're looking at skip lot procedures, is our dynamic modification rule. The dynamic modification rules are what actually dictate the procedure we follow with skip lots. So as we hit our drop down menu, we can see the available options for our skip lot procedures. We would focus our attention on skip lot procedure Z02. We can see we would inspect 1 lot, then skip the following 3 lots upon inspections. If we would shift our focus to the Z03 skip lot procedure, we would inspect 5 lots and then skip the next 10 lots. This is the procedure that SAP will follow when we set up skip lots. Setting up a skip lot in SAP increases our efficiency. It reduces the number of inspections required, leading to decreased inspection time and cost. It can also help us focus on risk management. It allows the quality team to focus their resources on the lots that are more likely to have quality issues based on our historical data. It'll improve our quality throughput. It speeds up the process, by minimizing inspection delays for lots that have high probability of meeting our quality standards. The key factors we have to remember when setting up a skip lot is our historical data. A skip lot procedure should only be based on a robust history of quality , to ensure the only lots with proven consistent quality are skipped. Using skip lots effectively can lead to a significant improvement in our quality management efficiency, but it should only be implemented with careful consideration of the quality risk involved. Thank you very much for taking the little walk through SAP with me. Let's take a moment to highlight the importance of what we just ran through. Skip lots are an effective technique to prioritize our time and energy towards the materials that represent the highest risk. Because we are only sampling some of the materials and not every good receipt. We need to keep up on the sampling, it must be timely. We also need to be vigilant in monitoring the results. If something comes back out of spec, it's very important that we take a decision on upping our inspection procedures for that material or supplier. We need to constantly monitor and stay on top of what's happening. This is a great technique when used correctly and offers flexibility to meet specific business needs. Hey Tom, thanks again. Much appreciated. Skip plots are an important tool in the quality management arsenal. I'm glad you were here to help us discuss it today. Thanks again. It really is going to help us focus our prioritization in both control and flow. Hey folks, if you want to learn more about quality management or even some of these additional features that we talked about today with Tom, please use the chatbot. And of course, if you have a specific question or suggestion for us, submit it below.

What Is the Purpose of MRP?

Find inspiration on why pursuing MRP is essential

10 min
New
SAP® ECC
Procurement & MRP
PTM; P2P; DM; OTC
MD06; MD05
Hey there Reveal TV community. Today we're going to go back to basics and produce a quick video to sure up the foundational understanding on the planning engine in ERP called MRP. Now we have loads of videos around MRP, but this one is for those of you who are not really using MRP today and want a little level set. First of all, I want to clear up confusion around the acronym. MRP stands for Materials Requirements Planning. Second of all, we commonly hear organizations say that they don't run MRP. Most of the time, this is not true. MRP is merely running along in the background. You've just never had the opportunity to find the value in the results. This is an epic journey filled with value. And today we're going to start with some inspiration. It is in my opinion that there is no better human in this world to get you excited about MRP than my friend, Sean. He has helped dozens of organizations come to grips with the journey and quality of MRP and has seen the outcomes for the business and for the people time and time again. So Sean, please tell us more about the definition and the purpose of MRP. Like many things we encounter in life, getting MRP up and running and delivering great value can be challenging. However, at the core, it's very simple. MRP's purpose is life to the supply, the demand, and it does so by determining what is needed. How many are needed. And by when they are needed to be there. It's time and quantity, it's primary school math, at scale, running on a set of rules, which are discussed in some of our other videos. It's a plan for every part in each location. Now then, let's go and we take a look. Well, welcome to the demo on what is the purpose of MRP. Now, in his introduction, Martin addressed MRP as an acronym and acknowledged that MRP stands for Material Requirements Planning. This is important because it is a good descriptor of what MRP does. However, what we want to do this morning is to use a transaction called MD06, and we are going to look inside of a plant at what does the MRP list look like in terms of the last run when MRP ran. And we'll take a look at that out there and you can see here there is a date at which the last MRP ran, which tells us this is the last time that MRP went to work to produce a plan for replenishment. Now we already know that MRP is responsible for determining what materials need replenishment, how many, and by what date. And that's all according to the rules that we've set. Now, most organizations run MRP on a regular cadence. And so even if you don't trigger it yourself, it's out there producing replenishment plans and managing the balance of supply and demand. It's a really, really good communicator. So let's look at our find in lists, which is really a material finder. Let's just focus ourselves for a moment on the group 4 messages where MRP is telling us what has happened. And we'll notice down here are my group 4 messages on the side. The first one, it's telling us is that these are the new proposals that we might want or need to review and to act on. It then also tells us that these are proposals that have been changed and we might want to look at that in case we've already acted and sent out an inquiry, whatever the situation might be, but we may want tolook at that because it has changed. It can even tell us that the replenishment has been triggered by the explosion of a bill of materials. Now, this last one is important to mention because MRP came about to allow companies to scale effectively as product assortments became more diverse, BOM's became more robust, and with more changes MRP could follow the rules and start letting us know if we had inconsistencies or if there were any other challenges that were out there. Now if you've ever wondered about these messages here that MRP is sharing with you and want to get some more background, I'll close this for the moment, you'll see here's an information tab. Inside of that information tab we get to see the groups, the messages, and what their definitions are. And I would encourage you to go and watch some of our other videos where we've done a ton of work around specific messages in terms of understanding and giving you insight into what they are and how you might want to respond. But if we go back to the Group 4 that we were dealing with, maybe let's just see from the highlights some of those exceptions that are coming out against those materials. You'll notice that it highlights them for me and if I go in to take a look at each one, I start to see my Group 1 messages. Here they are down here. This is a new requirement that came about from the last MRP run. And I get that opportunity to look, here's a good one, it's got plenty. All these new requirements have suddenly hit us, and we're going to have to respond to this, and make sure that we bring those materials in on time. Because often these messages , they get neglected. And we really need to guard against that. We spoke, for instance, earlier on about the message 42, which is the second one. So the proposals have been changed. Likewise, we allow the system to do the heavy lifting, we can get in and we can find a material that has now been changed, where the message is telling us it's been changed and we may want to act on that. And as we just go through, we'll just look at a few of those and you can start to see where these changes are and determine whether that's going to have an issue for us. Now, lastly, what I want to do is just to go back to all the exceptions and look at what's known as Group 8. So we look at these Group 8 messages. This is really telling us that MRP was unable to run, and you'll see there's quite a few of these that are out there, that it was unable to run and we need to fix or address the issue or the master data that is preventing MRP from running these materials. If we were just to take a look at it, here's an example for us, this one says it's in status blocked for procurement, warehouse does not allow for planning. So there's a rule that's put in place, but we still have an MRP type that wants to be planned, and therefore there's a conflict, and we need to take a look at trying to resolve that. Okay, so once more, if we go back to our exceptions, and we just look at a couple of materials, and I'm going to pick one or two. I'm going to pick this material, 1417. I'll say find that material, there it is. And when I start to look at it, here I start to see all of these new requirements that are out there. So I can see a number of new requirements which is message 01 for replenishment. So it's seeking supply for the demand and it's following certain rules. And so we don't have to do the math ourselves. Instead, we can focus on managing the process and then proactively intervening with exceptions as they occur. We saw it earlier on with some of the message 42, the new proposals. That is exactly the same thing that we would want to take some action and make sure that we stay ahead of the game as far as looking at business operations Now, the truth is there are probably tens or maybe hundreds of thousands of parts of several locations to plan across. And we quickly lose the ability to scale when only people are involved. And so MRP, it really is our next best friend, provided we have the right rules set in place to enable accurate replenishment proposals. And so folks, I would encourage you to explore what MRP has to offer. It can be a bit of a hill to climb initially but it gets easier as we go and the view from the other side, I can tell you, is great. MRP is a highly effective approach to managing replenishment at scale when it's set up and running well. It requires the discipline of daily cadence to stay relevant and move from the theoretical to the practical and operational. To recap our conversation today MRP is a rule based engine that produces a proposed plan for replenishment. Its job is to supply the demand. And when it's really humming, it puts us in a position to proactively manage by exception, alerting us to deviations from plan so that we can make decisions on how to best move forward and assure quality of supply. I'm a fan, Sean, that is amazing. Thank you for telling us more about MRP and thank you for showing us the power and the purpose of this particular functionality. Thanks again. Hey folks, if you want to learn more about MRP, there is an entire video catalog on MRP and all the exceptions and results related to that. And if you have a specific question, please feel free to submit it below.

What Is the Ripple Effect

Seeing is understanding: discover the Ripple Effect visualized in SAP

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; P2P; PTM; OTC
MD04; MD13
Hey, hey, welcome back supply chain superstars, Martin here. We've got a good one today. Did you know that there is a tool in SAP that will allow you to visualize the connection between a supply element for a component at the lowest level of the bill of material and the final demand element that is planned to serve? Now, we'll acknowledge that it's not the prettiest graphic that you'll ever see, but for the purpose of impact and analysis and connection, it's a very powerful tool. We have two videos on this topic. One on the visualization end product, and the other goes into detail around the pegging report. What we're talking about today is the end result known as the ripple effect. To take us through this excellent feature in SAP, Sean's going to be sharing with the team about how this specific report can actually help us. Sean, take us away. Well, well, well, Martin. How the tables have turned, my friend. Usually, it's Martin who talks about the ripple effect. Today, I get to put my own spin on it. This is exciting. In our walkthrough today, I'm going to focus on three key things. First, I'll carry on the definition Martin started to frame up on what we mean by the ripple effect. Second, I'll show you how to navigate to it and zoom in and out once you're there. And lastly, I'll give you some insight as to why this is so useful. As they say, a picture paints a thousand words. So let's get in and take a good look. Right folks, so here we are and what we're going to do is we're going to go into a transaction called MD04, which is your stock requirements list. And in this stock requirements list, I've chosen a material PLA-BLK, so this is 3D black printing and it is for plant 1000 and it's going to open up the stock requirements list for me and we can see the details that are currently in there in terms of the requirements and so on. And what I want to do is I want to select one of those supply elements. So here is a planned order at the top and we'll look at that planned order and go to what's known as the pegging report. If you notice down the bottom here is a button called pegging requirements. It has the upward arrow. So I click on that and what it does, is it opens up the pegging requirements for me that's related to that particular planned order. And what I then want to do is I want to say, well, show me this geographically , how does this look from a graphical point of view that portrays what's happening in the pegging report. And on the top button here, there's a graphic. So if I click on that, there it opens it up. And what it's doing, and just simply put what the ripple effect is about, is having a visible view that sees the connection and the links from the supply element component, which is here, all the way through to the intended purpose to which it is supplying and supporting. In this case, it's a forecast. So the intended outcome here, or the support that it's for, is for this forecast, but it could just as well be for a sales order or for a delivery. And in between it, we notice all the layers and levels of production in between where that requirement is coming from and what the supply is trying to supply to. Now, one of the neat things inside of this report is that when you get a much more complicated view than the one that I've got here, which is pretty straightforward, it's pretty simple, it's a great example to show graphically what this looks like. You have this functionality of zoom in and zoom out. And so let's just assume if this was a very complicated and dense, you can hardly read it. If I was to hit the zoom in button, see what happens? It increases the size to the point that I will get to, to say, I can see now what these other elements are in terms of the links between the elements from the supply all the way through to where that demand is coming from. So in this case, as I said, it is a forecast. Now we get to stages very often that it's far more complex than this graphic and that's why we need the zoom in capability. So let me show you a quick example of that ripple effect, now take a look at this one. How detailed is this? Oh my goodness, it really does have multiple layers. There are multiple drivers of demand in between the supply element and the demand element. There's all these different production pieces that are part and parcel of the process. And so what this is showing us that where it is way more complicated, it's very useful for us to be able to use that zoom in functionality so that we can understand the ripple effect. We want to understand inside of this, what is it that these are all touching? What is that ripple effect so that we can get to the point of having debate and really looking to improve things. So if I go back to my example, in this case, now I was going to zoom out. There I have, in this case, fortunately, the entire example. And I can then look at what are all of these pieces of the puzzle that make it up. Now, here's a really cool thing that one can look at as well. The real value of doing this analysis and seeing this graphically is when it comes to the quality of the conversations that are going to direct us towards what that outcome looks like. That's really what the whole notion is about. What is the quality of the conversations that we can use these graphics for? And it's going to help us to uncover issues relating to, say, good or bad forecasts. It may be overdue sales orders. Maybe there's missing materials, incomplete production orders, deliveries, and so on. But it really helps us unpack that. And just by way of a quick example, if I look at one of these planned orders in between. If I was to double click on that planned order, look what happens. It opens up the details that are behind it. And so when I get into that conversation as a team, when I get into that conversation as a production team or as a purchasing team, whatever it might be, I can start to look at really what's going on. I can understand the links that are inside of that and it makes things so much more easy for me to understand. And I can see now from the links, from the supplier all the way through to that demand picture. So it really is a phenomenal opportunity for us to have those conversations. And I want to encourage you, that as you get out there, take a look at the ripple effect that you're seeing on your business and use this graphical functionality to enable you to get to a point where you can have good conversations. And with that, we're back in the studio. I hope you found that walkthrough helpful. Today, we wanted to give you a little bit of how you can be curious and explore in your own system. A few key things to keep in mind. One is the visualization of the ripple effect helps us to get a picture of the magnitude of the impact when we're dealing with a wrinkle in the supply or we're working on changing priorities. Two, this is a visual infographic that can be quickly brought up in meetings to answer questions and demonstrate concerns based on that magnitude of impact we just mentioned. And three, this is the visual representation of the pegging report. We have a lovely video on that for you to check out and it walks through the full anatomy of that report. So there's more to come. Thank you, Sean. And thank you for taking one of my favorite topics on the ripple effect. This is just one of those areas that actually just help us with cross functional understanding and just really understand the impact of up and downstream supply chain challenges. So folks, if you want to learn more about how to apply some of these tools, please use our chatbot that will actually help recommend some videos based on your specific questions. Otherwise, if you have a question for us, feel free to submit it below.

Where are Exception Messages

Optimizing demand with exception management strategies

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Demand & Supply Planning
DM; OTC; P2P; PTM
MD04; MD05; MD06; MD07
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin and in this video we are going to focus on where to find SAP exception messages. When used correctly. Exception messages can alert organizations to potential issues with the MRP results or other processes within the SAP. But where are they? Kristie, help us discover where they are. I think I can show you where Martin. Let's talk about where to find this powerful feature. As a buyer or planner, this is the feature that should be helping us most with our day-to-day work. Yet, for many of us, we struggle on how to get started, and in this demonstration, we're going to focus on three key things. First of all, what transactions will lead us to find these exception messages? Second, where the exception messages will actually appear. And third, how we should think about getting started when evaluating and resolving materials with exception messages. Let's learn about exception messages together. So this is a great question. Where do we find exception messages for demand? Have you ever noticed that when you look at where your exception messages are placed that they are not placed against your demand elements, they are only placed against your supply elements. The only one that's a little confusing is safety stock, because safety stock is a demand element, but it's letting you know that the stock is fallen below safety stock level, so it's related to your ability to supply it. So if you think about the purpose of MRP and our purpose as planners is to supply the demand and as buyers to supply the demand. It's our whole, our whole goal is to make sure that we have the right material in the right place, at the right time, the right cost, and the right quality, but our exceptions, because it's communicating to us as folks who are on the supply side of the house, only fall on our supply elements. You can see right here I have this scheduling agreement for this customer. It's actually in the past. Today is the 14th of February. We don't have enough inventory for it. There's no exception message. Where's the exception message? It's on the purchase order that is intended to provide the supply to supply that demand. Interesting, right? There is a lot of exception monitoring available though, for demand side elements. So the first is what I'm going to show you today, which is how we monitor our forecast to see how we're doing there. The second is, a good example would be VA06 for those of you who are on ECC or some of the Fiori apps, for those of you who have migrated to S/4, that let us know what is happening with our sales orders and gives us a lot of exception monitoring and insight into those arenas. Another good example for how we would find some exceptions would be around housekeeping. So we can always look for overdue MRP elements, in our exception monitor related to demand side items. But let's look at one of the exception monitors for managing our forecast, and I'm going to come in here first, and I just want to sum this up. So sometimes it's nice to be able to look at things summed up by periods, so days, weeks, or months, and in this case we happen to be forecasting in monthly buckets, so I want to come in here and take a look, this column here for planned independent requirements. So this is what we have, we can think of it as our open remaining to sell. So if we had planned for the month, this is the balance that we do not currently have a sales order or scheduling agreement pegged against. Our requirements are what we have sold for the month, and then the balance of that is the plans receipts. You can see we're planning perfectly in balance for these items. We're planning to replenish to the total demand, and we're not planning to keep any additional stock. Okay, so then the question becomes if we are starting to see exception messages like request to expedite what caused us to be outside of plan, did we place our purchase orders on time is definitely something we could look at. The other thing we can look at is we can see how we are balancing against our current forecast, and so to do that I'm going to come up to environment and I'm going to go look at this thing called total requirements display. So in the interest of full disclosure, I have a background in demand planning, so this is not blaming the forecast for all of our supply chain woes. I wish that that was the case or blaming the customer, if only the customer would place that order with the lead time that they were promised, if only, you know, the forecasting team would get it together on the demand plan. No, we, we work in supply chain our purpose in life is dealing with the variability and the volatility and the mixed issues that occur. So this is our world and what we're good at working through, but we can get some exception monitoring on how we're performing to the forecast. You can see here all the pieces that are out here, so what we have consumed and where we are able to balance against that forecast and it's easier to do this if we actually go in and we look at the customer view. You'll actually get a red, yellow, and green light here. So these items that are in red at the top, this is demand that does not currently have any forecast that it's able to consume against, and that's why we don't have any information over here to the right. Further down from that we have items that do have forecasts they're able to consume against, so a hundred and this is what's been assigned to it, and we can work our way through until we get out into the future, where we've got greens where there's plenty for us to peg against. So this is our planned quantity, what we're currently pegging against and then based on our consumption rules, how much of that forecast we're able to consume, and so in this case we can see that these sales orders don't have anything, they don't have a forecast that's within their consumption window and so this demand is actually in addition to our forecast. Now this happens in the current period so there's other considerations in terms of how we might be dropping or reorganizing that forecast for the current month, but this is very helpful in determining whether we're ahead or behind. The other piece of this around just rolling it up to these totals is if you can think about the planned independent requirements as you're remaining open to sell. When you exhaust those and the requirements, quantity starts to climb. If you are within your firm zone, your lead time for your suppliers, your firm zone for manufacturing, this is where we'll start to see those exception messages pop up because we aren't in position to be able to supply, so we are overselling plan. The opposite can also happen and we'd be able to see that here if we are underselling the plan. There's lots of plan that is open and we don't have anything currently pegged against it. You know, you can get a look out across the horizons. You can see here for October, we've already consumed the totality of our forecast, we have requirements of 210 pieces, in fact that may be larger than what the original forecast quantity was, and so we can use that customer view for help to determine that and then to be able to have good conversations with our counterparts in the sales and operations planning process, the IPP process, or just in demand planning to work through and resolve any of those exceptions as they occur. So really nice to be able to go through and see how the customer orders are stacking up against that demand and then be able to adjust accordingly and that's how we might be able to detect some of the exceptions that are occurring in our planning process. That and housekeeping are our two main ways to be able to do that because we housekeep both for supply and demand, and we have to push back on the demand in order to resolve the supply. So if we go through and we cancel something, or we delete something, which we should never do, we should close out. If we're doing those types of activities and there's still open demand, then all that will happen is the next time MRP runs, it's just going to regenerate for us, so getting a line of sight on some of these daily views and being able to have those housekeeping conversations with our counterparts definitely helps us to get this cleaned up. So that's where we find our exceptions for demand. So in summary we have covered how exception messages. Show up in key transactions. Highlight areas where our supply is misaligned to our demand. And become a critical daily habit for managing the overall supply chain. Super exciting! Thank you Kristie. We know that exceptions are the lifeblood of buyers and planners daily activities but finding exception messages is important because they highlight potential issues and this allows planners and buyers to proactively work to resolve them before they become larger and time consuming and more impactful into the business. If you'd like to know more about exceptions, finding exceptions and exception management in general, of course plus any other features and function SAP please check out our video catalog and of course if you've got some suggestions we are happy to listen please submit them below.

Where to Focus: QM Lots That Need Prioritization

Identify what's most critical when drowning in inspection materials

8 min
New
SAP S/4HANA®
Quality & Batch Management
QM; P2P; PTM
QA33; MD07; MD04
Hey there Reveal TV community, Martin here. And today I believe we have a quality topic for you. One of my favorite things to see when we're out walking the floor is what's happening to the world of quality inspection. It's such a critical function and often so overlooked. Many of the times the challenge we see in quality isn't the actual defects. It's the efficient movement of material through the inspection process and having the right people, equipment and partners, et cetera, to keep it up. It actually turns into a physical backup on the shop floor, often exploding into exception messages, status confusion, and queue shuffling. Hey Jason, I know this is a tough topic, but such an important one. Tell us more. I completely agree that while quality is central to our processes and while everyone understands that it's a critical step, we really do struggle to keep tabs, keep up, and remain sufficiently resourced. So I can't wait to get into this. Today, we're going to explore how we as planners and buyers and MRP controllers can support our quality colleagues in prioritizing the inspection backlog. In today's video, we will. Identify some past due usage decisions and lock closeouts. Figure out which items have red lights by generating a work list. And use days of forward coverage in our exception messages to help prioritize a list to discuss with our partners in quality. Let's go in and take a look. You'll hear us talk a lot about integration and learning how to work collaboratively across the supply chain using exception messages to direct our actions to the most critical items. It often seems, though, that the quality team gets left behind a bit in this effort. They're off in their own little world, trying to figure out which inspections are most critical, often just taking them in order of start date without really knowing which ones are the most critical to keep the flow of production happening. Other than maybe getting an angry email or phone call when things go off the rails, they're pretty much on their own. Well, out of sight, out of mind is never a good approach to managing critical supply chain functions. So I'm going to share a couple of simple ways that we can help the quality team have better visibility to where they should focus their efforts. Here, you see the selection screen for QA33, which allows us to view inspection lots. We have a number of selection options here to choose from on the main screen, but I want to share a little inside pro tip to expand options. At the top left, you can see a red, green, and blue button. I thought surely this must be someone's flag, however my search proved to be frustrating and I was not able to find it. So, if someone knows out there, I'm curious. Can you send me an email and just let me know which country this belongs to? Or town, or county, I don't know. Whatever. Anyway, this is called dynamic selection options and, when I pop it up, you can see here that I get a bunch of different options that weren't there before. So for example, maybe I want to search QM Lots based on a specific purchase order number or specific purchase org. Those are options that I can use just by clicking here and then I can put my document in and run the list by that. So just a cool little tip that maybe a lot of people don't know about. You can explore this and take note that that button's available in a number of other transactions, so keep an eye out for it, and you might find it can help you refine your searches. Okay, enough of that, for this demo, I'm just going to keep it simple, I'm going to look at plant 1710, and I'm going to use only inspection lots without a usage decision. Now, this can sometimes run a little bit long, so I've already brought the information up on a different screen , and so here we go. First off, I have sorted these on the start date, earliest to latest. Now this is a perfectly logical way to prioritize the list and is often the approach when we're not collaborating as effectively across the supply chain as we possibly could. But how might we use other information in SAP to find out if there's a better sequence to support critical cases? So in this case, I'm going to use the old CTRL Y trick and highlight these guys and then I'm going to CTRL C to copy it to the clipboard and I'm going to pop over to MD07 and upload that list of materials. So I'm only looking at exceptions for those specific materials that I pulled from the QM monitor. So let's run that , and this is a pretty short list, but there's still some good info to be discovered here. If we just went by the dates in QA33, we would inspect one of the lots for QM001, then all four of the lots for this EWMS4-03 material. And then finally, FG129 and the final lots for QM001. But is that really the right approach? Take a look at the three columns that show here the stock days supply, the first receipt days of supply, and second receipt days of supply. What we can see here is that both QM001 and FG129 have red lights over here on the traffic lights, which means that they have a negative supply situation. While the third item is green, meaning that it basically has unlimited coverage. So in this case, if we just follow the dates from QA33, we'd be inspecting four lots of this material here that has no supply disruption and no current demand, while these guys that are having a critical supply situation wait. So that's most likely holding up production and could delay shipping to a customer, which is probably not the best plan. You can do this check very quickly in a daily stand up meeting and provide clear guidance to the quality team on what is most critical for them to complete right now to keep the process flowing. And this is even more crucial if, as we often find, quality is a bottleneck where optimizing the flow is vitally important. So there you have it. A simple way to use the red lights and days of coverage information in the MRP Exception Monitor to better prioritize quality inspections. And I am very serious about figuring out which country that flag belongs to. So help me out, send me an email, let me know what you find out. If it's not obvious, I am passionate about this topic. We so often see quality departments with good procedures that are just struggling to keep up. We need to partner well to provide some perspective on prioritization when there is a backlog. So a few points to take with you. First, Cadence keeps the chaos at bay. Trademark. Regularly review and help your colleagues to review delayed usage decisions or critical incoming inspections. Second, there are all kinds of work lists for status monitoring and QM. Make sure the team knows where to look so that all lots are appropriately addressed. And third, and I can't emphasize this enough, identify and feed your bottlenecks, but don't overfeed them. Work the constraint, look for the pacing that's possible, and adjust your inspection times to reflect reality, then improve that reality. That's what we do to make things better. Hey, thank you Jason. I knew that would get you fired up. Quality both feeds the processes on incoming inspections, and is the last leg in the relay before a product is ready for our customer. We focus on so many of the surrounding processes, but often quality inspection and how we work is prioritized and process is underserved. I'm really glad we're discussing it today. So thank you. Hey folks, you want to learn more about quality management just generally speaking or specifically, check out our chatbot, it will help recommend some videos for you.

Why Do We Call It the MAD Date

Decoding material availability calculation and its impact

9 min
New
SAP® ECC
SAP S/4HANA®
Order Fulfillment & ATP
SD; MM; PP
MD04; VA03
The best way to learn is by doing so. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your system. Martin here, and today we've got a good one, in this video we're going to explore a material availability date, otherwise known as the MAD date. SAP has such a wide variety of dates which all have specific purposes and lead to a flow of information that drives our supply chain. The material availability date is no exception, as is what drives the required on hand date for MRP, traffic light, stock on hand, and exceptions. It's pretty important. We don't want to miss out on what exactly it is. So, Kristie, why don't you tell us exactly why the material availability date is called the MAD date? Because Martin, it's the date that the customers get mad if we don't have material available, and that might be our external customers, or our sister facilities, or even the manufacturing floor. Okay, before I jump into SAP for this demo, did you at least chuckle? That's it, folks. That's as funny as she gets. Yeah, okay. So what will we see in the demo today? We will explore how the MAD date gets determined. And some very important and often overlooked lead time considerations. How it shows up in the stock requirements list and what the impact is on the MRP run and exception monitoring. Off we go! All right, let's go in and see what this MAD date is all about. So, as we previously said, the MAD date is the date that the customer gets MAD if we don't have the product available. It's the date that the product is needed to be on the shelf so that all the other subsequent activities that are required in order to get it out the door to the customer on time based on when we made and are now trying to keep that promise. So, if you go into a sales order, and I'm going to show you an example of what I would call a flat schedule. I'll explain how this is actually working. You may see this a lot on your sales orders and what I want to do is explain what maybe should be happening instead. So let's just go in and we're going to grab the second item and I'm going to go in and I can see that there's a schedule line. So we ran an availability check. There's a schedule line in place and I can see the first date is the 2nd of December, that's when they're looking to get this product from us. And right now we can see that it was not able to be fully confirmed for the 2nd of December but instead has been confirmed partially for the 2nd and partially for the 4th. So this customer is allowing us to do two shipments. So multiple, partial shipments in this case, it happens to be two. Now, if we go in here, though, to the shipping tab, this is what allows us to get to that mandate, and this is so important because this is what drives the supply chain, right? This is the date that we're transferring over because it's the date we've committed to the customer and we're driving our supply chain to be able to meet this date. And if you look here, we have the delivery date of 12/2 and everything else is sitting flat to that date, right? So there's no additional time that is allotted for any of these additional pieces of the puzzle, and SAP has loads of dates and they're all based on lead time offsets. Lead time becomes very, very important, and the really nice thing about SAP is that it allows us all of these different lead time buckets so we can go through and figure out how much time we realistically need in order to accomplish each of these activities in order to be able to make sure that we get this to the customer on time. And so think about it as, you know, your quality inspection time, or your goods receipt processing, or dock to stocks time on the supply side, your planned delivery time, or in house production time, or the time on your routings. Same thing applies for a customer, so we've got a bunch of different things that we have to do. So we're shipping from a particular shipping point, we may have a route and a route schedule involved. The customer may have a receiving calendar that dictates when they're able to receive goods. Let's say it takes five days to ship to the customer and we're responsible for coordinating that delivery. So if the delivery date was 12/2 and we need five days for it to move and make its way to the customer, probably we're going to have a material availability date that is at least five days, if not longer before that in order to be able to make sure that that happens. So if you go into your sales order and you notice that this is really just a flat schedule, think about what kind of time buckets you need in order to be able to set yourself up for success because what you're trying to get to is that material availability date. So the delivery date offset by whatever time is necessary to get that product to the customer, so when do we need to issue those goods in order for it to hit that delivery date. Now for some of us, that delivery date represents the date it's leaving our facility, for others of us that will represent the date it is actually going to be reaching the customer. So you got to know your particular terms with your customer. Based on the date that you want to issue it, when do you need to start pick, packing, and staging for loading? That might be another day offset. If it's export and you have paperwork to do, it may be several days or even a week or two beforehand that's required. All of those things, calculating backwards, the delivery date minus the lead time for your route and transportation time minus the amount of time it takes to pick, pack, and load is what gets you to the material availability date or when that product would be required. And so as you run your ATP check and it's looking to see when inventory can be available, then you're flipping the schedule and scheduling from that material availability date forward for when it actually is ultimately going to get to the customer based on how much time you need to pick, pack, and stage, and load, and when you're going to actually goods issue and then the amount of time it will take in transportation. In addition to that, we have this transportation planning date and this is able to run in parallel, but what it does is it buys us additional time for things like the administrative work of setting up a shipment, going through the process of getting that booked and ready to go so you're able to actually start that process working on that transportation planning, assuming that you're going to hit that material availability date, which again, all has to do with how predictable and stable that supply is and how well aligned the ATP rules are to what it is that you can make and keep a promise against. So again, if you go into your sales order and you go to the schedule line, you look at the shipping tab and you notice that you have a flat schedule here, I really would like to challenge you to think through these different buckets of activities and make sure that you're setting yourself up for success so that customer is less likely to get mad because we will have the correct date in order to allow for all those other activities to occur in this material availability date or the MAD date. That's what's going to drive the supply chain, that's what you're expediting towards, that's what you're working your supply chain to try to achieve, is that material availability date because that's the date that we need to hit in order to make sure that we get the product to the customer on time. Welcome back from the demo, to summarize. The MAD date is the date that the customer gets mad if material is not available. We explored several lead time components that drive the correct date and the importance of getting this right. And lastly, we looked at how the state is driving MRP and exception messages. The date is the entry point for driving the supply chain. It drives all other dates and decisions related to how to best get that supply for the demand. And if we did all the other upfront work on lead time, so long as we meet this date, we have a really good chance of fulfilling our promise to the customer. Good stuff, Kristie. Thank you, once again. If we go to the trouble to really understand how the MAD date is determined, and then work hard to hit that date or manage the client's expectations, we'll be setting ourselves up for success. You know what I've learned today, Kristie? Most of us should not have flat delivery schedules in our sales orders. We really need to think about those lead times. SAP has a lead time bucket for all the different pieces of the process. So getting this right, neither too short nor too long, makes a big difference in efficiency of the flow of material to our customer. Well, I think that's a wrap today. Folks, if you want to learn more about MAD dates please check out our other videos and of course if you have a burning question please submit it below.

Work Center Analysis

Assess work center performance for improved outcomes

8 min
New
SAP® ECC
Scheduling & Shop Floor
PP; PTM
MCP7
The best way to learn is by doing. Welcome to the video service that unlocks and reveals the hidden value in your SAP system. Hi, my name is Martin and in this video we are going to focus on how to take the advantage of SAP work center analysis. When used correctly, work center analysis can help organizations gain insight to how well we're able to run the schedule on the floor and identify where the bottlenecks might lay. It's a valuable way to improve performance and uncover opportunities for improved throughput. So Eacliffe, tell us a little bit more about work center analysis. Sure Martin. Work center analysis is a powerful feature when used correctly, how well a work center is performing and keeping its commitment to its schedule. In this demonstration I'm going to focus on three things. Provide an understanding of what insight this report provides from a work center perspective. How it goes about providing this insight on work center performance. And how to evaluate each work center performance. The intent here is the use transaction MCP7 to perform work center analysis. In this report the data is primarily captured by plant, work center, and month. So let's get into this transaction, and what I'm going to do is, because it's a test system, I'm going to run it for a couple of years. So let me execute this, I'm going to bring up all work centers within this plant that has information. Okay and here we can see that we got information currently sitting at the plant level. So basically we specified the amount of historical information we want to take a look at hence the amount of history was driven by that date range. Ideally we should have zero variances and when I mean zero variances just looking at my screen here, what we can see is we have target lead time, we have actual lead time. So based on our master data, this is how much late time we expect versus based on the production confirmation. The variance is then reflected in this column. In terms of execution time I don't have a variance, but we could see what the target is versus actual. If we want to see what the difference is we can do the quick calculation or you can select this column, come here to comparison to key figures, going to compare the target execution time, I'm going to compare that to the actual execution time. Okay, and here we can see the difference. So we'd spent just over 39 days difference between the two. So the question is, hey, is this something I need to take a look at? Okay. And then even queue time again, we have target queue time, actual queue time. This is the amount of wait we expected based on our master data, we're expecting only one day of queue time, we ended up with 23 days of queue time, so deviation of 24 days. So again, what's going on? And this is sitting at the plant level. So what I'm going to do is do a switch drill down, and I'm going to bring it down to a work center. Let's see what this information looks like. So we have the totals still sitting like before on top, but now we can see who's contributing to the variance perspective, so let's look at this the deviation. So I'm going to sort this. I don't see any negatives. So let's do this, we could see the biggest contributor is coming from this particular work center where we said, yeah, it should take us 9 days when in fact it took us only 1.4 days to fulfill that particular operation for that work center. So this is great, but recognize that, look any kind of deviation, positive or negative that could have a significant risk to our operation. if we are running too fast, like this is implying we may not have other components in a timely manner resulting in a shutdown vice versa, if we are not completing orders in time without operation in time we also run risk to the business. So ideally, our goal is to really bring these lead times into alignment. The other thing I'm going to call out is, notice we see these big numbers here, it's like, wow, this is a big deviation, I mean, the difference is 144 days. So how can this only be 14.4 days at the total level? And we have to recognize that the system is actually averaging these numbers at a total level, so because we are dealing with time we just can't simply add it up, so what SAP has opted to do is to take these number of days and just average them by the number of entries or in this case work centers that we have here. So this can be a bit misleading looking at it, and hence it's definitely good to come down to this work center view and actually look at the information at the work center level. And then just to take this one level further here we can see we had a big deviation the question is, okay, when did this happen? I can pick this single line item, I can then do what is called drill down by, which is this icon here, and we'll dive into that specific work center. I'm going to pick months and we could see we have 4 months listed here and for the most part, things were looking pretty good until we came into 2023. So in this case because there's just one entry we will try and get an answer for what's going on, but it definitely looks like an anomoly and for that reason there's a high probability we don't need to take any action, but still, we don't want to second guess this, we want to determinethe root cause of this. You know, was it a matter of something posted incorrectly, in this case did this order linger around for a couple of years, for example given the number of days, et cetera. So at the end of the day, yes we use this transaction, we focus on columns like lead time deviation, we can compare processing time between the two, like what's going on, actual queue time, and of course we can also take further information to consideration like operation data and so forth. Okay, so this is the type of insight that you can gain from doing a work center analysis to help determine which data set you should be going to, to improve the quality of your master data. So in summary we have covered how work center analysis allows you to. Appreciate the feedback that this report provides by work center. Identify which key figures to focus on in this report. And evaluate each work center performance. Thanks Eacliffe. Using this feature allows real-time information on work center utilization and performance allowing the business to improve production planning, optimize resource utilization, and enhance cost control. If you want to learn more about this topic and others in your SAP features and functions please feel free to check out our video catalog and if you have any specific questions feel free to submit them below.